Ip Office Installation

IP Office
IP Office Installation
15-601042 Issue 19l - (06 November 2008)
2008 AVAYA All Rights Reserved.

Notice
While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of
printing, Avaya Inc. can assume no liability for any errors. Changes and corrections to the information in this document may be
incorporated in future releases.
Documentation Disclaimer
Avaya Inc. is not responsible for any modifications, additions, or deletions to the original published version of this
documentation unless such modifications, additions, or deletions were performed by Avaya.
Link Disclaimer
Avaya Inc. is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced elsewhere within this
Documentation, and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the products, services, or information described or offered within
them. We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and we have no control over the availability of the linked
pages.
License
USE OR INSTALLATION OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES THE END USERS ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS SET FORTH
HEREIN AND THE GENERAL LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE AT
http://support.avaya.com/LicenseInfo/ (GENERAL LICENSE TERMS). IF YOU DO NOT WISH TO BE BOUND BY THESE
TERMS, YOU MUST RETURN THE PRODUCT(S) TO THE POINT OF PURCHASE WITHIN TEN (10) DAYS OF DELIVERY
FOR A REFUND OR CREDIT.
Avaya grants End User a license within the scope of the license types described below. The applicable number of licenses and
units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one (1), unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is
specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User. Designated Processor means a single stand-alone
computing device. Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by multiple users.
Software means the computer programs in object code, originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User,
whether as stand-alone Products or pre-installed on Hardware. Hardware means the standard hardware Products, originally
sold by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User.
License Type(s): Designated System(s) License (DS).
End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor, unless a different number of
Designated Processors is indicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User. Avaya may require the
Designated Processor(s) to be identified by type, serial number, feature key, location or other specific designation, or to be
provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose.
Copyright
Except where expressly stated otherwise, the Product is protected by copyright and other laws respecting proprietary rights.
Unauthorized reproduction, transfer, and or use can be a criminal, as well as a civil, offense under the applicable law.
Third-Party Components
Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party
agreements (Third Party Components), which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the
Product (Third Party Terms). Information identifying Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is
available on Avayas web site at: http://support.avaya.com/ThirdPartyLicense/
Avaya Fraud Intervention
If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support, call Technical Service
Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at +1-800-643-2353 for the United States and Canada. Suspected security
vulnerabilities with Avaya Products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to: [email protected].
For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya Support web site (http://www.avaya.com/support).
Trademarks
Avaya and the Avaya logo are registered trademarks of Avaya Inc. in the United States of America and other jurisdictions.
Unless otherwise provided in this document, marks identified by , and SM are registered marks, trademarks and
service marks, respectively, of Avaya Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Documentation information
For the most current versions of documentation, go to the Avaya Support web site (http://www.avaya.com/support) or the IP
Office Knowledge Base (http://marketingtools.avaya.com/knowledgebase/).
Avaya Support
Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your contact center. The
support telephone number is 1 800 628 2888 in the United States. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya
Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support.
IP Office
Page 2
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Contents
Contents
1. Installing IP Office
1.1 Equipment.....................................................................
Availability
10
1.2 RoHS
..................................................................... 10
1.3 Repair
..................................................................... 10
2. System Overview
2.1 Small Office
.....................................................................
Edition System Components
2.2 IP400 Office
.....................................................................
System Components
2.3 IP500 Office
.....................................................................
System Components
2.4 Control Units
.....................................................................
2.5 Control Unit
.....................................................................
Summary
2.6 IP Office Standard
.....................................................................
Edition
2.7 IP500 Base.....................................................................
Cards
2.8 IP500 Trunk
.....................................................................
Cards
2.9 IP400 Trunk
.....................................................................
Cards
2.10 External Expansion
.....................................................................
Modules
2.11 Other Cards
.....................................................................
2.12 Power Supplies
.....................................................................
2.13 Power Supply
.....................................................................
Cords
2.14 Power Supply
.....................................................................
Backup
2.15 Cabling and
.....................................................................
Cables
2.16 Grounding.....................................................................
2.17 Lightning .....................................................................
Protection/Out-of-Building Connections
2.18 Wall and .....................................................................
Rack Mounting
2.19 Feature Key
.....................................................................
Dongles
2.20 License Keys
.....................................................................
2.21 IP Office Phones
.....................................................................
2.22 Core Software
.....................................................................
& BIN Files
2.23 Supported.....................................................................
Country Locales
2.24 Programming
.....................................................................
Applications
2.25 User Applications
.....................................................................
2.26 Voicemail.....................................................................
Applications
2.27 Call Logging
.....................................................................
Applications
2.28 Call Center
.....................................................................
Applications
2.29 CTI Applications
.....................................................................
2.30 Application
.....................................................................
CD's/DVD's
2.31 VoIP
.....................................................................
2.32 Voice Compression
.....................................................................
Channels
2.33 Training .....................................................................
2.34 Web Sites.....................................................................
13
14
16
18
19
20
21
23
24
26
31
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
47
49
50
51
52
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
3. Planning
3.1 Space Requirements
..................................................................... 62
3.2 Environmental
.....................................................................
Requirements
64
3.3 Tools and Parts
.....................................................................
Required
65
4. Pre-Configuration
4.1 Off Line Configuration
..................................................................... 68
4.2 Creating a .....................................................................
New Configuration
69
4.3 Importing and
.....................................................................
Exporting Settings
70
5. Small Office Edition Installation

5.1 Unpacking .....................................................................
5.2 Installing the
.....................................................................
Admin Applications
5.3 Default Control
.....................................................................
Unit Power Up
5.4 Connecting.....................................................................
the Manager PC
IP Office
74
75
77
79
5.5 Receiving a.....................................................................

Configuration (Pre 3.2)
5.6 Using Monitor
.....................................................................
5.7 Fitting Trunk
.....................................................................
Cards (SOE)
5.8 Shelf/Wall .....................................................................
Mounting
5.9 Grounding .....................................................................
(SOE)
5.10 Upgrading.....................................................................
the Core Software
5.11 Configuring
.....................................................................
Security Settings
5.12 Receiving.....................................................................
a Configuration (3.2+)
5.13 Running the
.....................................................................
System Status Application
80
81
82
84
86
87
89
90
91
6. IP400 Basic Installation

6.1 Unpacking ..................................................................... 94
6.2 Installing the
.....................................................................
Admin Applications
95
6.3 Control Unit.....................................................................
Power Up
97
6.4 Connecting.....................................................................
the Manager PC
99
6.5 Receiving.....................................................................
a Configuration (Pre 3.2)
100
6.6 Using Monitor
..................................................................... 101
6.7 Fitting VCM
.....................................................................
Cards
102
6.8 Fitting Modem
.....................................................................
Cards
104
6.9 Fitting Trunk
.....................................................................
Cards
106
6.10 Rack Mounting
..................................................................... 109
6.11 Adding Expansion
.....................................................................
Modules
111
6.12 Adding a.....................................................................
WAN3 Module
113
6.13 Grounding
..................................................................... 115
6.14 Upgrading
.....................................................................
the Core Software
117
6.15 Configuring
.....................................................................
Security Settings
120
6.16 Receiving
.....................................................................
a Configuration (3.2+)
121
6.17 Running.....................................................................
122

7.1 Tools Required
.....................................................................
7.2 Read the .....................................................................
Documentation
7.3 Unpacking
.....................................................................
7.4 IP500 Card
.....................................................................
Installation
7.5 Inserting the
.....................................................................
Feature Key
7.6 Applying Power
.....................................................................
7.7 Installing .....................................................................
the Admin Applications
7.8 Connecting
.....................................................................
the Manager PC (IP500)
7.9 Start Manager
.....................................................................
7.10 Upgrading
.....................................................................
the Core Software
7.11 Check the
.....................................................................
CPU LED
7.12 Check the
.....................................................................
Card LEDs
7.13 Receiving
.....................................................................
the Configuration
7.14 Adding Licences
.....................................................................
7.15 Adding External
.....................................................................
Expansion Modules
7.16 Configuring
.....................................................................
Security Settings
7.17 Rack Mounting
.....................................................................
7.18 Wall Mounting
.....................................................................
7.19 Grounding
.....................................................................
7.20 Running.....................................................................
126
127
128
129
133
134
136
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
147
148
151
153
155
8. Phone Installation
8.1 Installing .....................................................................
2400/5400 Series Phones
8.2 Installing .....................................................................
an EU24 Add-On
8.3 BM32 Firmware
.....................................................................
Upgrade
8.4 Basic Button
.....................................................................
Programming
8.5 Changing.....................................................................
Extension Numbers
8.6 Swapping.....................................................................
Extension Users
159
164
165
166
168
170
Page 3
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
9. External Trunk Configuration

9.1 Clock Quality
..................................................................... 174
9.2 Unused Trunks
..................................................................... 176
9.3 Prefix Dialing
..................................................................... 178
10. Additional Processes

10.1 Upgrading
.....................................................................
the Core Software
10.2 Creating.....................................................................
a WAN Link
10.3 IP500 Reset
.....................................................................
Button
10.4 Out of Building
.....................................................................
Telephone Installations
10.4.1
............................................................................
DS Phones
10.4.2
............................................................................
Analog Phone Barrier Box
10.4.3
............................................................................
Rack Mounting Barrier Boxes
10.5 Using the
.....................................................................
External Output Port
10.5.1
............................................................................
Port Connection
10.6 Licensing
.....................................................................
10.6.1
............................................................................
License Keys
10.6.2
............................................................................
Feature Key Dongles
10.6.3
............................................................................
Installation Requirements
10.6.4
............................................................................
Serial Port Feature Key Installation
10.6.5
............................................................................
Parallel / USB Port Feature Key Installation
10.7 So8 BRI.....................................................................
Module
10.7.1
............................................................................
Example 1: ISDN Terminal
10.7.2
............................................................................
Example 2: Video Conference
10.8 SNMP .....................................................................
10.8.1
............................................................................
SNMP Introduction
10.8.2
............................................................................
Installing the IP Office MIB Files
10.8.3
............................................................................
Enabling SNMP and Polling Support
10.8.4
............................................................................
Enabling SNMP Trap Sending
10.8.5
............................................................................
Trap Generation
10.9 DTE Port.....................................................................
Maintenance
10.9.1
............................................................................
DTE Port Overview
10.9.2
............................................................................
DTE Port Settings
10.9.3
............................................................................
Erasing the Configuration
10.9.4
............................................................................
Defaulting Security Settings
10.9.5
............................................................................
Erasing the Operational Software
182
184
185
186
187
188
190
191
191
192
192
193
194
195
196
197
197
198
200
200
201
203
203
204
206
206
206
207
209
210
11. System Components

11.1 Control Units
.....................................................................
11.1.1
............................................................................
IP500
11.1.2
............................................................................
IP412
11.1.3
............................................................................
IP406 V2
11.1.4
............................................................................
IP406 V1
11.1.5
............................................................................
IP403
11.1.6
............................................................................
Small Office Edition (SOE)
11.2 Internal Cards
.....................................................................
11.2.1
............................................................................
Modem Cards
11.2.2
............................................................................
Wireless Card
11.2.3
............................................................................
Embedded Voicemail Memory Cards
11.2.4
............................................................................
Voice Compression Modules
11.3 IP400 Trunks
.....................................................................
Cards
11.3.1
............................................................................
Analog Trunk Card Uni (ATM4U)
11.3.2
............................................................................
Analog Trunk Cards (ATM4)
11.3.3
............................................................................
BRI Trunk Cards
11.3.4
............................................................................
T1 PRI Trunk Cards
11.3.5
............................................................................
E1 PRI Trunk Cards
11.3.6
............................................................................
WAN Trunk Card
11.3.7
............................................................................
E1R2 PRI Trunk Cards
IP Office
214
214
216
218
220
222
225
227
227
227
228
229
230
230
231
231
232
232
233
233
11.4 IP500 Base

.....................................................................
Cards
11.4.1
............................................................................
Legacy Card Carrier
11.4.2
............................................................................
VCM
11.4.3
............................................................................
Digital Station
11.4.4
............................................................................
Analog Phone
11.5 IP500 Daughter
.....................................................................
Cards
11.5.1
............................................................................
Analog Trunk Card
11.5.2
............................................................................
BRI Trunk Cards
11.5.3
............................................................................
PRI Trunk Cards
11.6 IP400 Expansion
.....................................................................
Modules
11.6.1
............................................................................
Analog Trunk 16
11.6.2
............................................................................
Digital Station V2
11.6.3
............................................................................
Digital Station
11.6.4
............................................................................
Phone V2
11.6.5
............................................................................
Phone
11.6.6
............................................................................
So8
11.6.7
............................................................................
WAN3 10/100
11.7 IP500 Expansion
.....................................................................
Modules
11.7.1
............................................................................
Analog Trunk 16
11.7.2
............................................................................
BRI SO8
11.7.3
............................................................................
Digital Station
11.7.4
............................................................................
Phone
11.8 Phones .....................................................................
11.8.1
............................................................................
1603
11.8.2
............................................................................
1608
11.8.3
............................................................................
1616
11.8.4
............................................................................
2402
11.8.5
............................................................................
2410
11.8.6
............................................................................
2420
11.8.7
............................................................................
3616
11.8.8
............................................................................
3620
11.8.9
............................................................................
3626
11.8.10
............................................................................
3641
11.8.11
............................................................................
3645
11.8.12
............................................................................
3701
11.8.13
............................................................................
3711
11.8.14
............................................................................
3810
11.8.15
............................................................................
4406
11.8.16
............................................................................
4412
11.8.17
............................................................................
4424
11.8.18
............................................................................
4601
11.8.19
............................................................................
4602
11.8.20
............................................................................
4610
11.8.21
............................................................................
4620
11.8.22
............................................................................
4621
11.8.23
............................................................................
4625
11.8.24
............................................................................
5402
11.8.25
............................................................................
5410
11.8.26
............................................................................
5420
11.8.27
............................................................................
5601
11.8.28
............................................................................
5602
11.8.29
............................................................................
5610
11.8.30
............................................................................
5620
11.8.31
............................................................................
5621
11.8.32
............................................................................
6408D
11.8.33
............................................................................
6416D
11.8.34
............................................................................
6424D
11.8.35
............................................................................
T3 Classic
234
234
235
236
237
238
238
239
240
241
241
243
245
247
249
251
253
255
255
257
259
261
263
264
266
268
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
Page 4
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Contents
11.8.36
............................................................................
T3 Comfort
11.8.37
............................................................................
T3 Compact
11.9 Phone Add-Ons
.....................................................................
11.9.1
............................................................................
4450
11.9.2
............................................................................
BM32
11.9.3
............................................................................
EU24
11.9.4
............................................................................
EU24BL
11.9.5
............................................................................
T3 DSS
11.9.6
............................................................................
201B RIM
11.9.7
............................................................................
XM24
11.10 Applications
.....................................................................
11.10.1
............................................................................
Call Status
11.10.2
............................................................................
Compact Business Center (CBC)
11.10.3
............................................................................
Compact Contact Center (CCC)
11.10.4
............................................................................
Conference Center
11.10.5
............................................................................
ContactStore
11.10.6
............................................................................
Delta Server
11.10.7
............................................................................
Feature Key Server
11.10.8
............................................................................
Manager
11.10.9
............................................................................
Monitor
11.10.10
............................................................................
MS-CRM
11.10.11
............................................................................
Phone Manager
11.10.12
............................................................................
SoftConsole
11.10.13
............................................................................
System Status Application (SSA)
11.10.14
............................................................................
TAPI
11.10.15
............................................................................
VoiceMail Lite
11.10.16
............................................................................
VoiceMail Pro
11.10.17
............................................................................
IP Office Ports
11.10.18
............................................................................
Operating System Summary
11.11 Licence.....................................................................
Keys
11.11.1
............................................................................
IP500
11.11.2
............................................................................
CCC
11.11.3
............................................................................
CTI
11.11.4
............................................................................
Phone Manager
11.11.5
............................................................................
VoiceMail
11.11.6
............................................................................
IP DECT
11.11.7
............................................................................
Trial Licenses
11.12 Ports .....................................................................
11.12.1
............................................................................
Cables
11.12.2
............................................................................
ANALOG Port
11.12.3
............................................................................
AUDIO Port
11.12.4
............................................................................
BRI Port (So)
11.12.5
............................................................................
BRI Port (To)
11.12.6
............................................................................
DC I/P Port
11.12.7
............................................................................
DS Ports
11.12.8
............................................................................
RS232 DTE Port
11.12.9
............................................................................
EXPANSION Port
11.12.10
............................................................................
EXT O/P Port
11.12.11
............................................................................
LAN Port
11.12.12
............................................................................
PF Port
11.12.13
............................................................................
PHONE (POT) Port
11.12.14
............................................................................
PRI Port
11.12.15
............................................................................
WAN Port
11.12.16
............................................................................
V.24 WAN Cable
11.12.17
............................................................................
V.35 WAN Cable
11.12.18
............................................................................
X.21 WAN Cable
11.13 SAP Codes
.....................................................................
11.13.1
............................................................................
Availability
IP Office
302
303
304
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
327
328
329
331
332
336
340
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
353
353
354
355
356
356
357
358
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
386
11.13.2
............................................................................
RoHS
386
12. Safety Statements

12.1 Safety and
.....................................................................
Homologation Statements
388
12.2 Lithium Batteries
..................................................................... 389
12.3 Lightning.....................................................................
Protection/Hazard Symbols
389
12.4 Trunk Interface
.....................................................................
Modules
390
12.5 Further Information
.....................................................................
and Product Updates
391
12.6 Compliance
.....................................................................
with FCC Rules
391
12.7 Port Safety
.....................................................................
Classification
392
12.8 EMC Directive
..................................................................... 393
12.9 Regulatory
.....................................................................
Instructions for Use
394
12.9.1
............................................................................
Australia
394
12.9.2
............................................................................
Canada
394
12.9.3
............................................................................
China
395
12.9.4
............................................................................
European Union
396
12.9.5
............................................................................
New Zealand
396
12.9.6
............................................................................
FCC Notification
396
Index ...............................................................................397
Page 5
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 1.
Installing IP Office
IP Office
Page 7
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Installing IP Office:
1. Installing IP Office
This documentation is intended to assist with the installation of the core components of an Avaya IP Office telephone
system. It describes those components and factors that should be considered for an installation.
The IP Office is a converged voice and data communications system. It should therefore only be installed by persons
with telephony and IP data network experience.
Installers must be trained on IP Office systems. Through its Avaya University (AU), Avaya provides a range of training
courses including specific IP Office implementation and installation training. It also provides certification schemes for
installers to achieve various levels of IP Office accreditation. See Training.
It is the installers responsibility to ensure that all installation work is done in accordance with local and national
regulations and requirements. It is also their responsibility to accurately establish the customers requirements before
installation and to ensure that the installation meets those requirements.
You should read and understand this documentation before installation. You should also obtain and read the Avaya
Technical Bulletins relevant to recent IP Office software and hardware releases to ensure that you are familiar with any
changes to the IP Office equipment and software.
The following components of IP Office are outside the range of a basic IP Office installation. They are covered by separate
installation and configuration documentation. If those components are to be part of the IP Office system installation, that
documentation should be obtained, read and understood prior to the installation.
4600/5600 Series IP Phone Installation.
Compact Contact Center (CCC) Installation.
Embedded Voicemail Installation.
Contact Store Installation.
Voicemail Lite Installation.
Compact DECT Installation.
Voicemail Pro Installation.
IP DECT Installation.
Delta Server (SMDR) Installation.
3600 Series Wireless IP Installation.
Compact Business Center (CBC) Installation. Phone Manager Installation Manual.

SoftConsole Installation Manual.
Conference Center Installation Manual.
IP Office
Page 9
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
1.1 Equipment Availability

SAP codes and details of specific items within this documentation are for reference only. Items available in any specific
locale should be confirmed against the local Avaya IP Office price list for that locale. The local price list may also include
additional items relative to the installation requirements of that locale.
1.2 RoHS
RoHS is an European Union directive for the Removal of Certain Hazardous Substances from Electrical and Electronic
Equipment. Similar legislation has been or is being introduced in a number of other countries. Avaya has decided to make
its global product range compliant with the requirements of RoHS. The actions taken vary
In some cases equipment has been discontinued and is no longer available from Avaya.
In some cases new manufactured stock has been made RoHS compliant and keeps its existing SAP code.
In other cases the equipment has been replaced by a new RoHS compliant alternative with new SAP codes.
The SAP codes within this document are for RoHS compliant equipment unless otherwise stated.
1.3 Repair
IP Office systems do not contain any user serviceable or repairable components. If a faulty unit is suspected the whole
unit should be replace.
IP400 control units should only be opened where indicated for the installation of IP400 cards.
IP500 control units should not be opened under any circumstances.
IP Office
Page 10
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 2.
System Overview
IP Office
Page 11
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2. System Overview
This section looks at the components that collectively form IP Office systems. This includes aspects such as cabling and
the need for additional non-Avaya IP Office equipment.
This section provides just a general description of individual units. For greater detail refer to the System Components
section.
IP Office
Page 12
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview:
2.1 Small Office Edition System Components

The IP Office Small Office Edition is a single control unit with no external expansion modules. It is intended for small sites
and branch offices.
IP Office Small Office Edition Control Unit
The control unit holds the main configuration and performs the routing and
switching for telephone calls and data traffic. Each Small Office control unit
includes LAN ports, a Ethernet WAN port, and depending on the particular
control unit variant a number of integral analog phone, analog extension
and digital station ports.
Trunk Card
The Small Office Edition control unit accepts a single IP400 trunk card for
additional trunks.
Embedded Voicemail Memory Card
IP Office embedded voicemail is supported by the addition of an Embedded
Voicemail memory card.
Wireless Card
The Small Office Edition can support an Avaya 802.11b WiFi wireless card.
Power Supplies
Each Small Office Edition control unit is supplied with an external power
supply unit. Additional power supply units may also be required for IP
phones and some phone add-ons.
Power Cords
Depending on the locale, different power cords are needed for the external
power supply unit.
Cables
The IP Office is designed primarily for connection to a structured cabling
system using CAT3 UTP cabling. This approach allows telephone and data
traffic to share the same wiring infrastructure and simplifies equipment
moves.
Phones
IP Office systems support a variety of Avaya digital and IP phones plus
analog phones.
VK00nDd15SDvXoxkw9cR9x_jOXr_AWz9
License Keys
Various IP Office features and applications require a license key to be
entered into the system's configuration. Each key is a 32-character text
string unique to the feature being activated and the serial number of the
Feature Key dongle (see below) installed in the system.
Feature Key Dongle
A uniquely numbered dongle is used to validate license keys.
Application CD's/DVD's
The IP Office applications can be ordered on a number of CD's. In addition
they can be downloaded from the IP Office section of the Avaya support
web site (http://support.avaya.com).
IP Office
Page 13
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.2 IP400 Office System Components

The following are the typical components of an IP Office system.
IP Office IP400 Control Unit
The control unit holds the main configuration and performs the routing
and switching for telephone calls and data traffic. Each control unit
includes LAN ports, slots for additional internal cards and in some
cases integral digital and analog phone ports. IP Office 4.0 supports
the following IP400 control units:
IP406 V2
Includes 8 integral digital extension (DS) ports, 2 analog phone ports
and an 8 port ethernet LAN switch. Can be expanded by the addition
of up to 6 external expansion modules.
IP412
Includes a 2 port ethernet switch. Can be expanded by the addition of
up to 12 external expansion modules.
Trunk Cards
Each IP400 control unit supports the addition of two IP400 trunk
cards.
Internal Cards
Additional cards can be added to the IP400 control units for features
such as modem ports and voice compression channels (used for
VoIP).
Embedded Voicemail Memory Card
The IP460 V2 supports IP Office embedded voicemail by the addition
of an Embedded Voicemail memory card.
IP400 External Expansion Modules
Additional extension and trunk ports can be added using a number of
external expansion modules. The number supported depends on the
control unit type and the module type.
Power Supplies
Each IP400 Office control unit and external expansion module is
supplied with an external power supply unit. Additional power supply
units may also be required for IP phones and some phone add-ons.
Power Cords
Depending on the locale, different power cords need to be ordered for
each control unit, external expansion module and any phones or
devices using external power supply units.
Cables
The IP Office is designed primarily for connection to a structured
cabling system using CAT3 UTP cabling. This approach allows
telephone and data traffic to share the same wiring infrastructure and
simplifies equipment moves.
IP400 Rack Mounting Kit
The IP400 control units and expansion modules are designed to be
stacked free-standing. However they can also be rack mounted using
an optional rack mounting kit for each unit and module.
Surge Protectors and Barrier Boxes
Where the installation includes extensions in other buildings additional
protective equipment is required. This equipment may also be
required in areas where the lightning risk is high.
Phones
IP Office systems support a variety of Avaya digital and IP phones
plus analog phones.
IP Office
Page 14
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: IP400 Office System Components

License Keys
Various IP Office features and applications require a license key to be
entered into the system's configuration. Each key is a 32-character
text string unique to the feature being activated and the serial number
of the Feature Key dongle (see below) installed in the system.
Feature Key Dongle
A uniquely numbered dongle used to validate license keys. Several
different types of Feature Key dongle are available.
The IP Office applications can be ordered on a number of CD's. In
addition they can be downloaded from the IP Office section of the
Avaya support web site (http://support.avaya.com).
IP Office
Page 15
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.3 IP500 Office System Components

The following are the typical components of an IP Office IP500 system.
IP Office IP500 System Unit
The control unit holds the main configuration and performs the
routing and switching for telephone calls and data traffic. Each
control unit includes LAN ports, slots for additional internal
cards and in some cases integral digital and analog phone
ports.
IP500 Base Cards

The IP500 control unit has slots for up to 4 IP500 base cards.
These can be used to add analog extension port, digital
extension ports, voice compression channels and some legacy
IP400 cards.
IP500 Trunk Daughter Cards
Many of the IP500 base cards can be fitted with a IP500
daughter card in order to support various types of trunk
connections.
IP500 Analog Trunk Card
IP500 BRI Trunk Card
IP500 PRI Trunk Card (IP Office 4.1+)
IP400 Cards
The IP500 Legacy Carrier base card can be used to allow IP400
trunk cards and IP400 VCM cards to be added to the IP500
control unit.

Additional analog and digital extension ports can be added
using a number of IP500 external expansion modules.
To support external expansion modules an IP500
Upgrade Standard to Professional license is required.
Support includes IP400 external expansion modules except
for WAN3 modules.
Power Supplies
The IP500 control unit has an internal power supply unit. Each
external expansion module is supplied with an external power
supply unit. Additional power supply units may also be required
for IP phones and some phone add-ons.
Power Cords
Depending on the locale, different power cords need to be
ordered for each control unit, external expansion module and
any phones or devices using external power supply units.
IP Office
Page 16
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: IP500 Office System Components

Cables
The IP Office is designed primarily for connection to a
structured cabling system using CAT3 UTP cabling. This
approach allows telephone and data traffic to share the same
wiring infrastructure and simplifies equipment moves.
Mounting Kits
The IP500 control unit can be used free-standing, with external
expansion modules stacked above it. With optional rack
mounting kits, the control unit and external expansion modules
can also be rack mounted. Alternatively with an optional wall
mounting kit the IP500 control unit can be wall mounted.
Surge Protectors and Barrier Boxes

Where the installation includes extensions in other buildings
additional protective equipment is required. This equipment
may also be required in areas where the lightning risk is high.
Phones
IP Office systems support a variety of Avaya digital and IP
phones plus analog phones.
License Keys
Various IP Office features and applications require a license key
to be entered into the system's configuration. Each key is a 32character text string unique to the feature being activated and
the serial number of the Feature Key dongle (see below)
installed in the system.
Feature Key Dongle
A uniquely numbered dongle used to validate license keys. For
the IP500 control unit a Smart Card type Feature Key dongle is
mandatory for correct system operation even if no licensed
features are being used.
The IP Office applications can be ordered on a number of CD's.
In addition they can be downloaded from the IP Office section
of the Avaya support web site (http://support.avaya.com).
IP Office
Page 17
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.4 Control Units

The base of any IP Office system is the system or control unit. It stores the system configuration and controls the system
operation.
Each control unit can be customized by adding various internal cards such as trunk cards. Except for the Small Office
Edition control unit, External expansion modules can be also be connected to add additional extension and trunk ports.
IP Office 4.1 supports the following IP Office control units.
IP500 System Unit
This control unit has four front slots for IP500 base cards. It has
an internal power supply unit and uses a mandatory credit-card
sized Smart Card Feature Key dongle. It includes a 2 port
ethernet LAN switch (layer 3 managed) on the rear. The unit
runs in two modes; IP Office Express Edition and IP Office
Professional Edition.
IP Office Standard Edition is the default mode for the IP500
control unit. In this mode it support only 32 users, no external
expansion modules and the basic IP Office applications.
By addition of a license the IP500 can be run in IP Office
Professional Edition mode. In this mode it supports up to 272
extensions, 8 external expansion modules and the full suite of
IP Office applications.
IP412 Control Unit
This unit supports 2 IP400 trunk cards of any type. Up to 12
external expansion modules can be added plus 2 WAN3 10/100
modules. It includes a 2 port ethernet LAN switch (layer 3
managed).
IP406 V2 Control Unit

This unit supports up to 6 external expansion modules plus 2
WAN3 10/100 modules. It supports 2 IP400 trunk cards of all
types though only one may be a dual PRI trunk card. The unit
has 8 Avaya digital DS phone ports and 2 analog phone ports
plus an 8 port ethernet LAN switch (layer 2 unmanaged).
Small Office Edition Control Unit (SOE)

This is a single unit IP Office system. It does not support any
external expansion modules and only supports a single IP400
trunk interface card. However the Small Office is available in a
number of models, with differing numbers of integral analog
trunk, analog extension and Avaya DS phone ports. The modules
all have a 4 port ethernet LAN switch (layer 2 unmanaged) and
an Ethernet WAN port.
IP Office
Page 18
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Control Units
2.5 Control Unit Summary

The following table summarizes the IP Office control units.
Feature
Small Office
Edition
IP406 V2
IP412
IP500
Digital Station (DS) Ports
0 or 8
Up to 24
Analog Phone (PHONE) Ports
2 or 4
Up to 32
Optional Embedded Voicemail Card Slot

Integral WAN Port
Expansion Ports
DTE Port
12
9-way
9-way
9-way
9-way
Audio In (MOH) Port

External O/P Switch Port
Conference Parties*
Configuration Memory
24
64
128
64
192KB
256KB
1024KB
1024KB
Voicemail Pro/TAPI WAV Channels
10
20
30
30
Maximum Extension Capacity
28
190
360
272
- Digital (DS) Phones only.
188
360
264
- Analog Phones only.
182
360
272
- IP Phones only.
16
190
360
272
IP400 Trunk Cards Supported
30
60
128
- Analog trunk cards

- Quad BRI trunk cards
- Single PRI trunk cards
(T1)
- Dual PRI trunks cards
(Slot A)
- WAN port card

- IP500 Analog trunk cards

- IP500 BRI trunk cards
- IP500 PRI trunk cards
VCM Cards
- IP400 VCM Cards
- IP500 VCM Cards
Maximum voice compression channels
2
3 or 16
Dimensions
Height x Width x Depth
76x255x241mm
3"x10"x9.5"
71x445x245mm
2.8"x17.5"x9.7"
73x445x365mm
2.9"x17.5"x14.4"
*Note
1. The Small Office Edition is restricted to 6 callers in any particular conference.
2. Where IP Office Conferencing Center is installed, 5 conference slots are reserved by the control unit for its own use
(call recording, etc) and are not available to IP Office Conferencing Center or for general conference usage.
IP Office
Page 19
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.6 IP Office Standard Edition

The IP500 system unit start operation in a mode called IP Office Standard Edition mode. In this mode, the number and
range of features supported is limited. The limitations can be overridden by the addition of and IP500 Upgrade Standard
to Professional license to the IP Office 500 configuration. Features not detailed in the table below are not affected directly
by Standard Edition or Professional Edition mode selection.
Feature
Extensions
Standard
Edition
Professional
Edition
32
272
External Expansion Modules

Applications
Phone Manager (All modes)*
SoftConsole *
IP Office TAPI
Delta Server
Compact Contact Center (CCC)*
Embedded Voicemail
Voicemail Lite
Voicemail Pro *
ContactStore *
Conference Center *
MS-CRM
Meet-me Conferences
IP DECT Trunks
SIP Trunks *
SES Trunks *
*Also require appropriate application licenses.
The following licences are specific to IP Office 500 systems.

IP500 Upgrade Standard to Professional
This license is required for an IP500 system to run in IP Office Professional Edition mode rather than IP Office Standard
Edition mode. It is a pre-requisite for any licensed features not supported in Standard Edition mode.
IP500 Voice Networking (Base 4 channels)
For IP500 systems this licences enables support for H323 IP trunks between IP Office systems and QSIG or Small
Community Networking over those trunks.
IP500 Voice Networking (Additional channels)
Allows an additional 4 H323 voice networking trunks.
For IP Office 4.0, the IP500 Voice Networking licenses were only supported in IP Office Professional Edition mode.
For IP Office 4.1 they are supported in IP Office Standard and Professional Edition modes.
IP500 PRI Trunk Channels
Each IP500 PRI-U trunk daughter card provides 8 channels by default. Additional channels are enabled by the addition
of the type of license.
IP Office
Page 20
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: IP Office Standard Edition
2.7 IP500 Base Cards

The IP500 control unit has 4 slots for the insertion of base cards. Each
base cards includes an integral front panel with ports for cable
connections.
The slots are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right. They can be used in any
order. However if the capacity for a particular type of card is exceeded,
the card in the highest slot will be disabled.
IP500 Digital Station Base Card
This card has 12 RJ45 ports. The first 8 ports are DS ports for the
connection of Avaya digital phones other than IP phones. The card can
be fitted with an IP500 daughter card which then uses the additional 4
RJ45 ports for connections.
This card accepts one IP500 daughter card of any type.
Maximum: 3 per IP500 control unit.
4400 Series phones (4406D, 4412D and 4424D) are not supported.
IP500 Analog Phone Base Card
This card has 12 RJ45 ports. The card is available in two variants,
providing 2 or 8 analog extension ports for the connection of analog
phones. The card can be fitted with an IP500 daughter card which then
uses the additional 4 RJ45 ports for connections.
This card accepts one IP500 daughter card of any type.
When fitted with an IP500 Analog Trunk daughter card, the Phone 8
base card supports 1 power failure extension to trunk (loop-start
only) connection.
The analog extension ports do not include a ringing capacitor. Where
this is a requirement, connection should be via a Master socket
containing ringing capacitors.
IP Office
Page 21
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 VCM Base Card
This card provides voice compression channels for use with VoIP calls.
The module is available in variants supporting up to 32 or 64 channels.
Each card provides 4 initial channels with additional channels being
enabled by licenses in the IP Office configuration. The card can be
fitted with an IP500 daughter card which then uses the 4 RJ45 ports for
connections.
The maximum number of voice compression channels supported, using
IP500 VCM cards and or IP400 VCM cards on IP500 carrier cards, is
128.
This accepts one IP500 daughter card of any type.
IP500 Legacy Card Carrier Base Card
This card allows a various IP400 trunk and VCM cards to be used with
the IP500 control unit. The front of the card includes a number of
panels that can be snapped off to match the ports when a trunk card
being fitted.
This card does not accept an IP500 daughter card.
IP400 Cards Supported: The following cards are supported. Any card
not listed is not supported.
PRI T1
BRI-8 (UNI)
Dual PRI T1
ANLG 4 Uni (US only)
PRI 30 E1 (1.4)
VCM 4
Dual PRI E1
VCM 8
PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45
VCM 16
Dual PRI E1R2 RJ45
VCM 24
VCM 30
IP Office
Page 22
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: IP500 Base Cards
2.8 IP500 Trunk Cards

Updated for IP500 PRI-U trunk daughter card. Need to add accurate picture of card and also update fitting picture for the
new pillar arrangment.
IP500 daughter trunk cards can be fitted to IP500 base cards to
provide support for trunk. The daughter card uses the physical ports
provided on the front panel of the base card for cable connection.
The addition of an IP500 daughter card is supported on any IP500
base card except the IP500 Legacy Card Carrier base card.
For those base card that support daughter cards, there are no
restrictions on the combination of card types. However in systems
with both analog phone base cards and analog trunk daughter cards,
combining the two type is recommended as it then provides analog
power failure support for one trunk/extension.
Each daughter card is supplied with the stand off pillars required for
installation and a label to identify the cards presence on the physical
unit once installed.
Note: Change to Installation
With the introduction of the IP500 PRI-U trunk daughter card, the
5 plastic stand off pillars supplied with these card were changed.
All trunk daughter cards are now supplied with two pre-fitted
metal pillars and 3 plastic pillars. Two screws and washers for final
attachment of the metal pillars to the base card are also included.
This change does not affect existing cards supplied with 5 plastic
pillars.
IP500 Analog Trunk Daughter Card
This card can be added to an IP500 base card except the IP500
Legacy Card Carrier base card. It allows that base card to then also
support 4 analog loop-start trunks.
When fitted to an IP500 Analog Phone 8 base card, the
combination supports 1 power failure extension to trunk
(loop-start only) connection.
IP500 BRI Trunk Daughter Card
Legacy Card Carrier base card. It allows that card to then also
support up 4 BRI trunk connections, each trunk providing 2B+D
digital channels. The card is available in 2 port (4 channels) and 4
port (8 channels) variants.
S-Bus Connection: On IP Office 4.2+ systems, the card can be
switched from To trunk mode to So mode. This mode requires
additional terminating resistors and an ISDN crossover cable
connection, see BRI Port (So).
IP500 PRI-U Trunk Daughter Card
Legacy Card Carrier base card. The card is a universal card that can
be configured in software for E1 PRI, T1 robbed bit, T1 PRI or E1R2.
The card is available in single and dual port variants.
The IP500 PRI-U card supports E1, T1 and E1-R2 PRI modes. The
IP Office system supports 8 unlicensed B-channels on each IP500
PRI-U port fitted. Additional B-channels, up to the capacity of
ports installed and PRI mode selected require IP500 Universal
PRI (Additional Channels) licenses added to the configuration.
These additional channels consume the licenses based on which
additional channels are configured as in-service from port 9 of slot
1 upwards. D-channels are not affected by licensing.
IP Office
Page 23
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.9 IP400 Trunk Cards

A range of IP400 trunk cards are available for different trunk types. Each IP400 trunk card is supplied with stand off
pillars and a replacement blanking plate for use with IP400 control units.
Small Office Edition Control Units
All versions of the Small Office Edition control include either two or four integral analog trunk ports on the front of the
unit. In addition a single IP400 trunk card can be fitted to the rear of the unit.
IP400 Control Units
The IP406 V2 and IP412 can be fitted with up to 2 IP400 trunk cards. Except where otherwise indicated, it is
recommended that Slot B is used first.
IP500 Control Unit

The IP500 control unit can accept up to two IP400 trunk cards by mounting each card on an IP500 Legacy Card Carrier
base card.
IP Office
Page 24
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: IP400 Trunk Cards

The following IP400 trunk card types are supported by IP Office 4.0:
IP400 Trunk Cards
SOE
IP406 IP412 IP500

V2
Analog Trunk Card (ATM4)

Provides 4 RJ45 loop-start analog trunk ports.
The card is available in several locale specific
variants. This card has been superseded by the
ATM4U card below.
Additional loop or ground start analog trunks can
also be added using Analog Trunk external
expansion modules.
Analog Trunk Card (ATM4U)
Provides 4 RJ45 loop-start analog trunk ports as
per the ATM4 above but available in a single
worldwide variant. Also supports adjustable echo
cancellation on IP Office 3.1.
Additional loop or ground start analog trunks can
also be added using Analog Trunk external
expansion modules.
Quad BRI Trunk Card
Provides support for 4 RJ45 BRI (2B+D) trunk
ports. These can be configured to ETSI or
AusTS013 operation. The ports include 100ohm
termination.
Single PRI T1 Trunk Cards
Supports PRI (23B+D) trunks and T1 Robbed-Bit
(24B) trunks through a single RJ45 port. The
mode of operation is selected in the IP Office
configuration.
Single E1 PRI Trunk Cards
Supports PRI (30B+D) trunks through a single
RJ45 port. The port can be configured for PRI or
QSIG operation.
Single E1R2 Trunk Cards

Supports PRI (30B+D) trunks using E1R2
signalling. Available in coaxial or RJ45 connector
variants. Coaxial variants are not supported on
an IP500 carrier card.
Dual PRI Trunk Cards
As the single PRI cards above but supporting the
connection of two PRI trunks. On the IP406 V2,
supported in Slot A only.
WAN Port Card

Used only with the Small Office Edition. Provides
a single 37-way D-type socket for connection to
a V.24, V.35 or X.21 WAN service. Includes a
replacement back panel for the control unit.
IP Office
Page 25
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.10 External Expansion Modules

Updated to include the new IP500 face lifted expansion modules.
These modules can be used to add additional ports to an IP400 and IP systems. The number of expansion modules
supported depends on the control unit type.
Expansion modules, except the WAN3 10/100 module, connect to expansion ports on the rear of the control unit, using a
1 meter (3'3'') cable supplied with the expansion module. No other cable should be used. The WAN3 10/100 module
differs in that it connects via a LAN port on its front to one of the control unit's LAN ports.
Each module uses an external power supply unit supplied with the module. A locale specific power cord for the PSU must
be ordered separately.
Number of modules supported:
Small Office
Edition
IP406
V2
IP412
WAN3 10/100 modules.
All other modules.
12
IP500
The IP500 control unit only supports external expansion modules when running in IP Office Professional Edition mode.
IP500 control units running in IP Office Standard Edition mode do not support any external expansion modules.
IP Office
Page 26
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: External Expansion Modules

The following IP500 external expansion modules are supported by IP Office 4.2. They are intended for use with an IP500
control unit running in IP Office Professional Edition mode but can also be used with IP400 control units.
Unlike IP400 external expansion modules these units use the IP500 rack mounting kit.
IP500 Analog Trunk Module
Provides an additional 16 ANALOG ports for connection of analog trunks.
Supports both loop-start and ground-start trunks.
Currently only available for the US locale.
Use with ground start trunks requires that the trunk module and the IP
Office control unit are grounded.
IP500 BRI So8 Module

Provides 8 ETSI BRI-So ports for the connection of ISDN devices. This unit is
not intended to support BRI trunks.
IP500 Digital Station Module

Provides, depending on variant, an additional 16 or 30 DS ports for supported
Avaya digital phones.
IP500 Phone Module

Provides, depending on variant, an additional 16 or 30 PHONE ports for analog
phones.
IP Office
Page 27
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

The following IP400 external expansion modules are supported by IP Office 4.2. Except for the WAN3 10/100, these
modules can also be used with an IP500 control unit running in IP Office Professional Edition mode.
IP400 Analog Trunk Module (ATM16)
Provides an additional 16 ANALOG ports for connection of analog trunks.
Supports both loop-start and ground-start trunks.
Available in a number of variants for different locales.
Use with ground start trunks requires that the trunk module and the IP
Office control unit are grounded.
IP400 Digital Station Module (DS16/DS30)

Provides, depending on the variant, an additional 16 or 30 DS ports for
supported Avaya digital phones. This module has been superseded by the
Digital Station V2.
IP400 Digital Station Module V2 (DS16 V2/DS30 V2)

Provides, depending on variant, an additional 16 or 30 DS ports for
supported Avaya digital phones. Supersedes the previous Digital Station
module.
IP400 Phone Module (Phone8/Phone16/Phone30)

Provides, depending on variant, an additional 8, 16 or 30 POT ports for
analog phones. This module has been superseded by the Phone Module V2.
IP400 Phone Module V2 (Phone8 V2/Phone16 V2/Phone30 V2)

Provides, depending on variant, an additional 8, 16 or 30 PHONE ports for
analog phones. Supersedes the previous Phone module. With IP Office 3.1,
the Phone V2 supports a wider range of message waiting indication (MWI)
options than Phone V1 modules.
With V2 units, the labeling of analog phone ports was changed from POT
to PHONE.
IP Office
Page 28
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

IP400 So8 Module
Provides 8 ETSI BRI-So ports for the connection of ISDN devices. This unit is
not intended to support BRI trunks.
IP400 WAN3 10/100 Module

Provides on its rear an additional three 37-way D-type WAN ports. These can
be used for the connection of V.24, V.35 and X.21 WAN services. The
module connects to the control unit via a LAN port rather than an expansion
port.
The WAN3 has been superseded by the WAN3 10/100 and is not
supported by IP Office 3.2 and higher.
IP Office systems are restricted to a maximum of 2 WAN3 modules
regardless of the control unit type.
This module is not supported with the IP500.
IP Office
Page 29
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office
Page 30
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.11 Other Cards

Each IP Office control unit can be fitted with a number of internal cards. The cards supported depend on the control unit
type.
Modem Cards
These cards provide modem circuits to answer incoming V.90 analog modem calls.
The first analog trunk on control units fitted with analog trunks can be set to answer V.32
analog modem calls. Whilst in this mode, the trunk cannot be used for voice calls.
Modem Cards
SAP Code
Internal Modem Card/Modem 12:

Provides 12 V.90 modem channels, 4
only in the IP403 control unit.
700343452
Modem 2 Card:
Provides 2 V.90 modem channels.
700185226
Small Office
Edition
IP406
V2
IP412
IP500

These cards provide message and prompt storage space for embedded voicemail and auto-attendant
options. The cards used are specially formatted compact flash cards.
SAP Code
Small Office Edition Memory Card:

Supports a 64Mb Compact Flash card
fitted in a PCMCIA slot caddy. This
provides up to 10 hours of compressed
message and prompt storage.
Compression uses voice compression
channels during usage.
700289721
IP406 V2 Memory Card:

Supports a 512MB Compact Flash card.
This provides up to 15 hours of
uncompressed message storage.
700343460
Small Office
Edition
IP406 IP412 IP500

V2
Memory cards in these slots can also be used for storage of files normally obtained via TFTP transfer. For example the
music-on-hold .wav file and supported 4600 Series/5600 Series software files. This will however reduce storage space
for prompt and message files if embedded voicemail is being used.
IP Office systems that have downloaded an internal music on hold source can then backup and restore that music on
hold to and from the memory card.
Non-Avaya cards can be used for file storage but will not support Embedded Voicemail.
IP Office
Page 31
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Small Office Edition Wireless Card

The Small Office Edition supports an Avaya supplied 802.11b WiFi wireless card. This
allows the control unit to act as a wireless access point.
Wireless Card
SAP Code
Wireless Card
700289739
Small Office IP406

Edition
V2
IP412
IP500
IP400 Voice Compression Modules

VCM cards are used to provide voice compression channels for calls between IP and
non-IP devices, devices being both trunks and extensions. VCM cards with differing
numbers of voice compression channels are available.
For the Small Office Edition control unit, either 3 or 16 voice compression channels
with 40ms echo cancellation are pre-built into the module. These cannot be changed.
For IP500 control units, voice compression channels can be added using either IP400
VCM modules mounted on a IP500 Carrier Card or using IP500 VCM cards.
VCM Cards
SAP Code
25ms echo
cancellation.
64ms echo
cancellation.
IP400 VCM5*
700185119
IP400 VCM10*
700185127
IP400 VCM20*
700185135
IP400 VCM30
700293939
IP400 VCM4
700359854
IP400 VCM8
700359862
IP400 VCM16
700359870
IP400 VCM24
700359888
Number of IP400 VCM cards.

Maximum number of channels.
Small Office
Edition
IP406
V2
IP412
IP500
3/16
30
60
128
*These modules are still supported but are no longer available from Avaya.
IP Office
Page 32
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Other Cards
2.12 Power Supplies

The IP500 has an internal power supply unit and so only requires a suitable locale specific power cord.
Small Office Edition, IP406 V2, IP412 control units and external expansion modules are all supplied with an external
power supply unit (PSU). These external power supply units include an integral 1.5 meter lead for connection to the
control unit or expansion module. A power cord for connection from the PSU to the power outlet is not included as this
varies by locale. The appropriate power cord must be ordered separately or sourced locally.
Additional power supply units are required for 4450, EU24, XM24 and T3 DSS add-on modules and may also be required
for 4600 Series/5600 Series IP phones.
Area
Type
Used on:
Connector Type
Analog, Digital Station V1, Phone V1.
IEC60320 C7
45W Earthed
PSU
Small Office Edition.
IEC60320 C13
60W Earthed
PSU
IP406 V2, IP412, IP400 Digital Station V2, IP400 Phone V2,
IP400 So8, IP400 WAN3 10/100,
IP500 Phone 30, IP500 Digital Station 30.
1151D1
All phones with XM24 Phone add-ons.

All phones with EU24/EU24BL Phone add-ons unless using
Class 3 PoE.
4600 and 56000 Series IP Phones when not using a PoE.
IP Office Control 40W PSU

Units and
External
Expansion
Modules
IP Phones and
Phone Add-Ons
1151D2
1600PWR 5V
Plug-top PSU used with 1600 Series phones on IP Office

when not being power using PoE.
Various country
variants.
Some units previously supplied with a 40W unearthed PSU are now approved for and supplied with a 60W earthed
PSU. That changes affects the IP412, So8 and WAN3 10/100 units.
The 1151D2 is the same as the 1151D1 except that it includes a backup battery that is charged during normal
operation. This can provide typically 15 minutes backup at maximum load (20 Watts) and up to 8 hours at light load (2
Watts).
Avaya 4600 Series and 5600 Series can use IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE) power supplies. Refer to the IP
Office IP Phone Installation Manual for full details.
IP Office
Page 33
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.13 Power Supply Cords

Each control unit and expansion module requires a switched power outlet socket rated at 110-240V ac, 50-60Hz.
Connection from that power outlet socket requires an appropriate locale specific power cord which is not supplied with
the unit and must be ordered separately.
Power cords must not be attached to the building surface or run through walls, ceilings, floors and similar openings.
Installation measures must be taken to prevent physical damage to the power supply cord, including proper routing of
the power supply cord and provision of a socket outlet near the fixed equipment or positioning of the equipment near a
socket outlet.
For locales not detailed below an appropriate power cord must be obtained locally.
Power Cord Type
Power Outlet Plug Type
Locales
SAP Codes
Earthed Power Cords (IEC60320 C13)
CEE7/7 (Schuko)
Europe and
South Africa.
700289762
BS1363
Czech Republic, 700289747

Ireland, United
Kingdom.
Control Units
IP500.
IP406 V2.
IP412.*
Digital Station V2.
Phone V2.
So8.*
WAN3 10/100.*
NEMA5-15P / CS22.2 No.42 North, Central

and South
America.
700289770

BRI So8.
Digital Station 16/30.
Phone 16/30.
CPCS-CCC
China.
700261977
Unearthed Power Cord (IEC60320 C7)
CEE7/16 (Europlug)
Europe and
South Africa.
700213382

Analog.
Digital Station V1.
Phone V1.
BS1363
Czech Republic, 700213374

Ireland, United
Kingdom.
NEMA1-15
North, Central
and South
America.
700213390
Korea.
700254519
China.
700314172

Analog Trunk 16.
*Older units were supplied with a 40W unearthed PSU and required an IEC60320 C7 power cord.
IP Office
Page 34
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Power Supply Cords
2.14 Power Supply Backup

The use of an Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) with any telephone system is recommended. Even at sites that rarely
lose electrical power, that power may occasionally have to be switched off for maintenance of other equipment. In
addition, most UPS's also provide an element of power conditioning, reducing spikes and surges.
The capacity of UPS systems and the total equipment load the UPS is expected to support are usually quoted in VA.
Where equipment load is quoted in Watts, multiply by 1.4 to get the VA load.
The calculation of how much UPS capacity is required depends on several choices.
What equipment to place on the UPS?
Remember to include server PC's such as the voicemail and Feature Key Server PC's. It is recommended that the total
load on a new UPS is never greater than 75% capacity, thus allowing for future equipment.
How many minutes of UPS support is required?
Actual UPS runtime is variable, it depends on what percentage of the UPS's capacity the total equipment load
represents. For example, a 1000VA capacity UPS may only support a 1000VA (100%) load for 5 minutes. This
relationship is not linear, the same UPS would support a 500VA (50%) load for 16 minutes. Therefore the lower the
percentage of capacity used, the increasingly longer the UPS runtime, typically up to 8 hours maximum. Remember
also that for most UPS's the ratio of discharge to full recharge time is 1:10.
How many output sockets does the UPS provide?
Multiple UPS units may be required to ensure that every item of supported equipment has its own supply socket.
The web site http://ups.avayaups.com provides a calculator into which you can enter the equipment you want supported
on a UPS. It will then display various UPS options. The site uses VA values for typical IP Office systems. However, if more
specific values are required for a particular system, the table below can be used to enter values.
Typical IP Office System
Small Office Edition
VA
Typical IP Office System
VA
17
IP412 System
312
IP406 V2 System
168
IP500 System
230
Individual Equipment
VA
Individual Equipment
VA
17
So8 Module
34
IP406 V2 Control Unit
23
Phone 8 Module
17
IP412 Control Unit
25
Phone 16 Module
23
Analog 16 Module
88
Phone 30 Module
42
Digital Station 16 Module
34
Typical Server PC
600
Digital Station 30 Module
42
Typical Desktop PC
400
WAN3 Module
17
Mid Span PSU - 6 ports
150
Mid Span PSU - 12/24 ports
300
The 1151D2 power supply unit for Avaya H.323 IP phones includes a backup battery. This typically provides 15
minutes backup at maximum load (20 Watts) and up to 8 hours at light load (2 Watts).
IP Office
Page 35
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.15 Cabling and Cables

The IP Office systems are designed primarily for use within an RJ45 structured cabling system using CAT3 unshielded
twisted-pair (UTP) cabling and RJ45 sockets.
A structured cabling system is one where cables are run from a central RJ45 patch panel in the communications/data
room to individual RJ45 sockets at user's desk. All wires in each cable between the patch panel and the desk socket are
connected straight through. This arrangement allows devices connected at the patch panel to be swapped to match the
type of device that needs to be connected at the user socket. For example, making one user socket a phone port and
another user socket a computer LAN port, without requiring any rewiring of the cables in between.
Traditional IDC Punchdown Wiring Installations

Where necessary, the far end RJ45 plug can be stripped from IP Office cables and wired into traditional wiring systems
using punch-block connectors. This type of installation should be performed by an experienced wiring technician.
Trunk Connections
The majority of IP Office trunk ports use RJ45 connectors for acceptance of an RJ45-to-RJ45 cable. However,
connection at the line providers end may require use of a different plug type in order to match the line providers
equipment.
RJ11 Phone Connectors
Many phones use RJ11 sockets and are supplied with RJ11-to-RJ11 cables. RJ11 plugs can be inserted into RJ45
sockets and in many case the connection will work. However this is not recommended or supported as the connection
lock is not truly positive and may become disconnected. An RJ45-to-RJ11 cable is available for these connections.
IP Office
Page 36
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Cabling and Cables
Standard IP Office Cables

The following are Avaya standard cables available for use with IP Office systems. The maximum length is applicable if the
standard Avaya cable is replaced with an alternate cable.
Cable
Description
SAP Code
Standard
Length
Maximum
Length
9-Way DTE Cable
Connects to control unit RS232 DTE

port. 9-Way D-type plug to 9-way Dtype socket.
2m/6'6''.
2m/6'6''.
Structured Cabling DS Line Cable Connects from RJ45 sockets to RJ11

socketed DS and analog phones.
700047871
4m/13'2''.
See table
below.
BRI/PRI Trunk Cable
Connects BRI/PRI trunk ports to the

line providers network termination
point. RJ45 to RJ45. Red.
700213440
3m/9'10''.
Expansion Interconnect Cable
Connects the control unit to expansion 700213457

modules (except WAN3 modules). RJ45
to RJ45. Blue.
1m/3'3''.
1m/3'3''.
LAN Cable
Connects from IP Office LAN ports to IP 700213481

devices. RJ45 to RJ45. Grey.
3m/9'10''.
100m/328'.
LAN Interconnect Cable
Connects WAN3 module to the control

unit. Replace with a LAN crossover
cable for IP412 control units. Green.
700213465
1m/3'3''.
LAN Crossover Cable
Used for connection of IP devices to

LAN ports on the IP412 control unit.
Black
700213473
3m/9'10''.
100m/328'.
V.24 WAN Cable
37-Way D-type plug to 25-way D-type 700213416

plug.
3m/9'10''.
5m/16'5''
V.35 WAN Cable
37-Way D-type plug to 34-way MRAC

plug.
700213424
3m/9'10''.
5m/16'5''
X.21 WAN Cable

plug.
3m/9'10''.
5m/16'5''
The table below details the maximum total cable distances for DS and analog extensions using different cable types.
Unshielded Twisted-Pair (UTP) - 50nf/Km
Telephone
CW1308
AWG22
(0.65mm)
AWG24
(0.5mm)
AWG26
(0.4mm)
2400/5400 Series
1200m/3937'.
1000m/3280'.
670m/2200'.
400m/1310'.
4406D Phone
1000m/3280'.
1000m/3280'.
400m/1310'.
400m/1310'.
4412D Phone
1000m/3280'.
700m/2295'.
400m/1310'.
400m/1310'.
4424D
500m/1640'.
500m/1640'.
400m/1310'.
400m/1310'.
6400 Series
1000m/3280'.
1000m/3280'.
400m/1310'.
400m/1310'.
T3 Series (Upn)
1000m/3280'.
1000m/3280'.
400m/1310'.
Analog Phones
1000m/3280'.
1000m/ 3280'.
400m/1640'.
800m/2620'.
IP Office
Page 37
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.16 Grounding
Use of ground connections reduces the likelihood of problems in most telephony and data systems. This is especially
important in buildings where multiple items of equipment are interconnected using long cable runs, for example phone
and data networks.
All IP Office control units and external expansion modules must be connected to a functional ground. In some cases, such
as ground start trunks, in addition to being a protective measure this is a functional requirement for the equipment to
operate. In other cases it may be a locale regulatory requirement and or a necessary protective step, for example areas
of high lightning risk.
WARNING
During installation do not assume that ground points are correctly connected to ground. Test ground points before
relying on them to ground connected equipment.
The ground point on IP Office control units and external expansion modules are marked with a
or
symbol. Ground
connections to these points should use a 14 AWG solid wire with either a green sleeve for a functional ground or green
and yellow sleeve for a protective ground.
Additional protective equipment

In addition to grounding, additional protective equipment will be required in the following situations. Refer to "Out of
Building Telephone Installations".
On any Digital Station or Phones external expansion module connected to an extension located in another building.
In the Republic of South Africa, on all Analog Trunk external expansion modules (ATM16) and on any control units
containing an analog trunk cards (ATM4/ATM4U).
IP Office
Page 38
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Grounding
2.17 Lightning Protection/Out-of-Building Connections

The following are the only supported scenarios in which wired extensions and devices outside the main building can be
connected to the IP Office system. In these scenarios, additional protection, in the form of protective grounding and
surge protectors, must be fitted.
The fitting of additional protection does not remove the risk of damage. It merely reduces the chances of damage.
Cabling Requirements
Cables of different types, for example trunk lines, extensions, ground and power connections, should be kept separate.
All cabling between building should be enclosed in grounded ducting. Ideally this ducting should be buried.
A Primary Protection Box must be provided at the point where the cables enter the building. This should be three point
protection (tip, ring and ground). Typically this would be gas tube protection provided by the local telephone company.
The ground wire must be thick enough to handle all the lines being affected by indirect strike at the same time.
Connection Type
Protection Device Type
Requirement
DS Phone Extensions
ITWLinx towerMAX DS/2

Supports up to 4 connections.
(This device was previously
referred to as the Avaya 146E).
Connection from the expansion module to the

phone must be via a surge protector at each end
and via the primary protection point in each
building.
Digital Station Expansion

module DS ports only.
The IP Office expansion module and control unit

and IROB devices must be connected to the
protective ground point in their building.
Analog Phone Extensions
IP Office Barrier Box

Supports a single connection.
Phones Expansion module ( Maximum of 16 on any expansion The between building connection must be via
module.
POT or PHONE) ports only.
earthed ducting, preferable underground. The
cable must not be exposed externally at any point.
Analog Trunks
External Output Switch
ITWLinx towerMAX CO/4x4

Supports up to 4 two-wire lines.
referred to as the Avaya 146C).
For installations in the Republic of South Africa, the

fitting of surge protection on analog trunks is a
requirement.
ITWLinx towerMAX SCL/8

referred to as the Avaya 146G)
Connections from an IP Office Ext O/P port to an

external relay device must be via a surge protector.
For other locations where the risk of lightning strikes

is felt to be high, additional protection of incoming
analog trunks is recommended.
The towerMAX range of devices are supplied by ITWLinx (http://www.itwlinx.com).
IP Office
Page 39
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.18 Wall and Rack Mounting

All the IP Office control units are designed to be free-standing. On systems with external expansion modules, the control
unit and modules are intended to be stacked.
Using additional option mounting kits, some systems can be wall or rack mounted.
Wall Mount
Rack Mount

IP400 Control Unit
IP500 Control Unit
Wall Mounting
The Small Office Edition control unit can be wall mounted if required. The base of the unit includes mouldings suitable for
this purpose and an additional securing bracket is supplied with the unit.
The IP500 control unit can also be wall mounted if not using an external expansion units. An IP500 wall mounting kit is
required in addition to suitable wall fixings.
IP500 Wall Mounting Kit (SAP Code 700430150)
This kit must be used when wall mounting an IP500 control unit. Additional 4.5mm fixings suitable for the wall type are
required. A clearance of 500mm around the control unit is required.
IP Office
Page 40
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Wall and Rack Mounting
Rack Mounting
With the exception of the Small Office Edition, all IP Office control units and external expansion modules can be rack
mounted into standard 19" rack systems. Each unit requires a 2U slot space within the rack. Rack mounting requires an
IP400 or IP500 rack mounting kit for each control unit and external expansion module.
Where IP Office systems are being rack mounted, the effect of conditions with the rack cabinet must be considered. For
example the rack temperature may be above the room temperature and airflow within the rack will be restricted. The
environmental requirements for the individual IP Office units are still applicable.
IP500 Rack Mounting Kit (SAP 700429202)

This kit contains all the components required for the rack mounting of a single IP500 control unit or IP500 external
expansion module. This includes screws for fixing of the brackets to the module, bolts for securing the module in the
rack and cable tidy brackets.
IP400 Rack Mounting Kit (SAP 700210800)

This kit contains all the components required for the rack mounting of a single control unit or expansion module. This
includes screws for fixing of the brackets to the module and bolts for securing the module in the rack.
Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit (SAP 700293905)

Barrier boxes must be used for out-of-building analog phone extensions. This bracket allows up to 8 IP Office barrier
boxes to be rack mounted and simplifies the number of connections to the protective ground point in the rack. This kit
must be used when more than 3 barrier boxes are in use and supports a maximum of 16 barrier boxes for a single
external expansion module.
IP Office
Page 41
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.19 Feature Key Dongles

Various IP Office features and applications require entry of a licence key or keys into the system's configuration. Each
licence key is a unique 32-character number based on the feature being activated and the serial number of a Feature Key
dongle installed somewhere with the IP Office system.
PC-Less Licensing
Uses a feature key dongle inserted or attached to the rear of the control unit. This method can be used with any of the
IP Office control units supported by IP Office 4.0 and is mandatory with the IP500 control unit.
PC-Base Licensing
This method uses a dongle attached to a PC running the IP Office Feature Key server application. This PC must be on
the same LAN segment as the IP Office control unit. Typically the dongle and IP Office Feature Key server application
are installed on the same PC as the IP Office Voicemail Lite or Voicemail Pro application if present.
There are three type of Feature Key dongle available. The serial number is printed either directly onto the dongle or onto
a label on the dongle.
Feature Key Type
Description
Smart
Card
Inserts into a dedicated slot on the rear of the

IP500 control unit. This card is required on IP500
systems even if not using any IP Office licenses.
MU-Law
700417470
Serial
Plugs directly into the DTE serial port on the rear of

the control unit allowing PC-less operation.
700293095
Parallel
Plugs into the appropriate port on a PC running the

IP Office Feature Key server application. This PC
must on the same LAN segment as the IP Office
control unit.
700185234
USB
IP Office
SOE IP406
V2
IP412 IP50 SAP Code

0
A-Law
700417488
700261506
Page 42
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Feature Key Dongles
2.20 License Keys

Various IP Office features and applications require entry of license keys into the system's configuration. The license keys
are unique 32-character codes based on the feature being activated and the serial number of the IP Office system's
Feature Key dongle.
Example 1: Enabling Software Features

In the example above, the IP Office system has a valid Phone Manager Pro license. In this case the license is for 20
instances. That means that up to 20 IP Office users can be configured to use Phone Manager Pro simultaneously. Their
previously license free Phone Manager Lite software will automatically change to display Phone Manager Pro features.
Example 2: Enabling Software and Features
The example above the IP Office also a license for Voicemail Pro. This initial Voicemail Pro license provide for 4 ports
between the IP Office system and the Voicemail Pro PC. Additional Voicemail Pro (ports) licenses can be added to
cumulative increase the number of port up to the limit supported by the particular type of IP Office control unit.
When a license key is entered into the IP Office configuration, the following information is shown.
Status
The status, which is Unknown until the configuration file is sent back to the IP Office system.
License
The name of the licensed feature. This may differ from the ordered RFA name.
Instances
Depending on the license, this may be the number of ports enabled or number of simultaneous users of the licensed
feature. Sometime the number of instances is specified in the license name.
Expires
Most purchased licenses have no expiry setting. For some features, trial licenses may be available which will have an
expiry date.
IP Office
Page 43
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.21 IP Office Phones

IP Office 4.2 supports the following phones and phone add-ons. Availability may be subject to local restrictions.
Digital stations connect to the IP Office via DS ports.
Series
IP Office Supported Digital Station (DS) Phones
Region
2400
2402, 2410, 2420.
Global
4400
4406D, 4412D+, 4424D+.

Not supported on the IP500 Digital Station card.
North America
5400
5402, 5410, 5420.
Global
6400
6408D, 6416D+M, 6424D+M.
Global
T3 (Upn)
T3 Compact, T3 Classic, T3 Comfort.
Europe, Middle East

and Africa
3810 Wireless phone.
North America
H323 IP Phones connect to the IP Office system via the RJ45 LAN or WAN.
Series
IP Office Supported H323 IP Phones
Region
1600
1603, 1608, 1616
Global
3600
3616, 3620, 3626, 3641, 3645 (Connect via AVPP add-on module).
4600
4601, 4602, 4602SW, 4610, 4610SW, 4620, 4620SW, 4621SW,

4625.
5600
5601, 5602, 5602SW, 5610, 5620, 5621.
Softphone
Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone application (requires Phone

Manager Pro and Phone Manager IP Audio licenses).
T3 (IP)
T3 IP Compact, T3 IP Classic, T3 IP Comfort.
Others
Other IP softphones and hardphones require entry of an IP

Endpoints license. Functionality beyond making and answering calls
is not guaranteed by Avaya.
Europe, Middle East

and Africa
Analog phones and devices connect to PHONE ports with the IP Office system. However due to the variety of analog
phones and device available no guarantee of operation is given. It is the responsibility of the IP Office installer and
maintainer to test and verify the operation of proposed analog equipment.
Series
IP Office Recommended Analog Phones
Region
6200 Series
6211, 6219, 6221.
North America
Interquartz Gemini 9330-AV, 9335-AV, 9281-AV.
Europe, Middle
East, Africa, AsiaPacific
Series
IP Office Supported DECT Phones
Region
IP DECT
3701, 3711 - Connection via IP DECT base stations.
Global
IP Office
Page 44
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: IP Office Phones
2.22 Core Software & BIN Files

Each IP Office control unit and expansion module contains and runs its own part of the IP Office core software. These
parts take the form of .bin files (binary files).
IP400 control units and external expansion modules are supplied with a base level of core software .bin files loaded.
Currently this base level is IP Office 2.1. Therefore one of the first steps of the installation process is to upgrade the
modules from this base level to the level of IP Office core software required.
IP500 control units are supplied with a base level of IP Office software that acts as a software loader for upgrading the
unit to the required software level. This software loader supports the LAN connection necessary for local PC to IP Office
upgrade.
The .bin files for each IP Office software level are included on the IP Office Administrator Applications CD for that
software level. They are installed from that CD as part of the IP Office Manager application. IP Office Manager can then
be used to upgrade the .bin files loaded in the modules within an IP Office system.
Updated sets of software and bin files may also be made available through the Avaya support web site. See Web Sites.
Software Level
The IP Office core software level is expressed in the form X.Y(Z), for example 2.1(27), where X is the major software
level, Y is the minor level and Z is the build number.
The following rules apply to the core software level used by modules within an IP Office system and between linked IP
Office systems.
All modules within an IP Office should run the same level of core software. Doing otherwise will lead to incorrect
operation of the system.
By default the IP500 runs in a software mode called IP Office Express. To run in full IP Office mode requires the
addition of various licenses.
Upgrading
Upgrading is performed using the Upgrade Wizard tool within the IP Office Manager application (File | Advanced |
Upgrade). It displays the systems it can detect, there existing software level and the levels it has available.
Check IP Office Technical Bulletins
Whenever upgrading check the latest IP Office Technical Bulletins for the various IP Office software releases involved
before proceeding. These may contain information relating to changes that occurred after this document was
completed. Bulletins are available from http://support.avaya.com.
Multi-Stage Upgrades
As indicated in the table below, the upgrade path may require several intermediate upgrades. Skipping an intermediate
level may lead to incorrect system operation and configuration corruption. Multi-stage upgrades are only necessary for
control units. External expansion modules can be upgraded directly between any two levels supported by the module.
Control Unit
.bin File
Unvalidated
Only
Validated
ip401ng.bin
2.0 > 2.1
2.1 > 3.0 > 3.1 > 3.2 > 3.2(999) > 4.2.
IP406 V2
ip406u.bin
2.1 > 3.0 > 3.0(999) > 3.1 > 3.1(999) > 3.2 > 4.2.
IP412
ip412.bin
1.3 > 2.1
2.1 > 3.0 > 3.1 > 3.2 > 4.2.
IP500
ip500.bin
4.0.0 > 4.2.
WAN3 10/100 Modules

In systems containing these modules, it is recommended that control unit and any other external expansion modules
are upgraded first before then upgrading the WAN3 10/100 module.
Large Systems
In systems with a large number of external expansion modules, for example an IP412 with 12 external expansion
modules, it may be necessary to upgrade the control unit first and then the modules.
IP Office
Page 45
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
There are three methods that the IP Office may use for upgrading, these are Validated, Offline and Unvalidated.
Validated Upgrade
This is the preferred method and can be used with any IP Office system that already has IP Office 2.1 or higher
software. By default the Validate option within the Upgrade Wizard is pre-selected. During this process, the required
BIN files are first transferred to the IP Office's RAM memory. Only when the files are received will the IP Office
overwrite the existing software in its Flash memory and restart using the new files.
Offline Upgrade
On some systems, it may not be possible for the validated upgrade to download all the BIN files required into the IP
Office system's RAM memory. If this is the case, the IP Office will offer to reboot in Offline mode and then attempt to
continue the validated upgrade. In offline mode the IP Office only supports the service necessary to allow upgrading,
for example it does not support Small Community Networking (SCN). If in offline mode for more than 15 minutes
without being upgraded, the IP Office will reboot again back to normal operation.
Unvalidated Upgrade
This is the least preferred upgrade method. It should only be used from a PC directly connected to the IP Office and
with a fixed IP address on the same LAN domain as the IP Office LAN1. This method involves erasing the existing
software in the IP Office's Flash memory and then copying the new BIN files directly to the Flash memory. Its uses
BOOTP and TFTP and requires a BOOTP entry for the IP Office system to exist on the Manager PC. This method should
not be used unless absolutely necessary.
IP Office
Page 46
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Core Software & BIN Files
2.23 Supported Country Locales

When a new or defaulted system's configuration is first opened in Manager, the value set in the Locale field (System |
System | Locale) should always be checked and changed if necessary. The system's Locale sets factors such as the
default ringing patterns and caller display settings. The locale also controls the language that a voicemail server will use
for prompts.
This following table indicates locale settings supported for different functions. Note that this does not necessarily indicate
support, availability or approval for IP Office within that country.
This following table indicates locale settings used within 4.0 and higher for different functions. Note that reference to a
locale does not necessarily indicate support, availability or approval for IP Office within that country.
TLA
Locale
Language
Telephony
Phone
Display
Applications
Manager
ess
Argentina
Latin Spanish
ena
Australia
UK English
nlb
Belgium
Dutch
frb
Belgium
French
ptb
Brazil
Brazilian
frc
Canada
Canadian French
esl
Chile
Latin Spanish
chs
China
Mandarin
eso
Colombia
Latin Spanish
dan
Denmark
Danish
fin
Finland
Suomi
fra
France
French
deu
Germany
German
ell
Greece
Greek
zhh
Hong Kong
Cantonese
hun
Hungary
Hungarian
isl
Iceland
Icelandic
ind
India
UK English
ita
Italy
Italian
kor
Korea
Korean
esm
Mexico
Latin Spanish
nld
Netherlands
Dutch
enz
New Zealand
UK English
nor
Norway
Norwegian
esr
Peru
Latin Spanish
plk
Poland
Polish
ptg
Portugal
Portuguese
rus
Russia
Russian
ara
Saudi Arabia
UK English
ens
South Africa
UK English
esp
Spain
Spanish
sve
Sweden
Svenska
frs
Switzerland
French
cht
Taiwan
Putonghua
trk
Turkey
US English
eng
UK
UK English
enu
USA
US English
esv
Venezuela
Latin Spanish
Phone
Manager
Soft
Console
Voicemail
Conf'
Center
EVM
Lite
Pro
TLA:
These are the three character codes used by pre-3.2 IP Office systems to set locales. In IP Office 3.2 they have been
replaced by selection of the required country or language by name. The special locale TTY may appear for some users.
This is used in conjunction with Voicemail Pro and TTY devices for hearing impaired users. Refer to the Voicemail Pro
Installation manual for full details.
Locale:
The country represented by the locale.
IP Office
Page 47
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Language:
The voicemail prompt language used for that locale.
Manager:
Indicates that the IP Office Manager application can run in the specific locale language. Manager uses the best match it
has (French, German, Brazilian, Dutch, Italian, Mexican Spanish or US English) for the regional location settings setting
of the PC on which it is running, otherwise it defaults to UK English. If required the language used within the Manager
screens can be overridden.
Telephony:
The IP Office provides default telephony settings matching the normal expected defaults for the locale.
Phone Display:
Indicates that display messages from the IP Office to Avaya DS and IP phones can be sent using the appropriate
language for that locale. Note that the user locale can be used to override the system locale for these messages. Note
also that some phones support their own language selection options for menus displayed by the phone's software.
Voicemail:
These columns indicate for which locales the different Avaya IP Office voicemail servers can provide the appropriate
language prompts. In all cases, the system locale can be overridden by setting a different user locale.
EVM:
Indicates that the locale is recognized by Embedded Voicemail and appropriate language prompts are then used. If
an unsupported locale is used, Embedded Voicemail will attempt the best match using the first two characters of the
locale.
VM Lite:
Indicates that the locale is recognized by Voicemail Lite and appropriate language prompts are then used. For an
unsupported locale is used, or one for which the necessary prompts are not available, Voicemail Lite will attempt the
best match using a sequence of alternate locales.
VM Pro:
Indicates that the locale is recognized by Voicemail Pro and appropriate language prompts are then used. For an
unsupported locale is used, or one for which the necessary prompts are not available, Voicemail Lite will attempt the
best match using a sequence of alternate locales. For example French Canadian (frc) fallback to French (fra), then
US English (enu) and finally UK English (eng). Note that the languages available are selectable during Voicemail Pro
installation. For further details refer to the Voicemail Pro manual.
IP Office
Page 48
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Supported Country Locales
2.24 Programming Applications

The following Windows applications are used to program and maintain an IP Office system. They run on PC's connected to
the IP Office system via its LAN interface. These applications are all provided on the IP Office Administrator Applications
CD and don't require any licenses.
Typically, with the exception of SNMP, all these applications would be installed onto a single PC on the customer's LAN in
order to ensure that each is available on site if required. Due to the nature of the applications, this should be a secure
PC. If a voicemail server PC is also being installed, the same PC can be used for the programming and maintenance
applications.
For maintainers most of these applications can also be run remotely if a route for data connections to the customer IP
Office exists from the maintainers location.
IP Office Manager
This tool is used to access all parts of the IP Office configuration. Different levels of access can be defined to control
which parts of the configuration the Manager user can view and alter. Manager is also used to upgrade the software
files used by an IP Office system. When running is can also act as the TFTP server from which upgradeable Avaya
phones can request new software.
This application can be used to inspect the current status of IP Office lines and extensions and to view records of
recent alarms and events. It runs as a Java application.
Feature Key Server
This application is required for IP Office systems where licenses are being validated against a parallel or USB port
Feature Key dongle. It must be installed on the same PC as the dongle.
SNMP MIB's
Not an application as such. Using IP Office SNMP MIB files the status of the IP Office system to be monitored by 3rdparty SNMP applications such as Castlerock and HP OpenView. When configured for SNMP operation, the IP Office can
also send alerts for potential problems. IP Office 3.2 and higher supports the sending of the same alerts used for SNMP
to SMTP email addresses.
Monitor (SysMon)
Monitor is a tool that can show a trace of all activity on the IP Office system in detail. As a consequence, interpretation
of Monitor traces requires a high-level of data and telephony protocol knowledge. Despite that however, all IP Office
installers and maintainers need to understand how to run Monitor when necessary as Avaya may request copies of
Monitor traces to resolve support issues.
Call Status
This application is used to display current calls in progress. Call Status is not supported on IP Office 4.0 but is still
included in the IP Office Admin applications suite for maintainers who are supported IP Office's with earlier software
levels.
IP Office
Page 49
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.25 User Applications

Through its LAN interfaces, the IP Office is able to let users run a number of Windows applications that operate in parallel
with their telephones.
These applications are installed from the IP Office User Applications CD. Some of them require licenses to be entered into
the IP Office system's configuration to enable features or to set the number of simultaneous users.
Phone Manager
Phone Manager allows a user to control and monitor their phone through their PC. For Avaya phones that support
handsfree operation, Phone Manager can be used to make and answer calls. During use, Phone Manager records
details of calls made, answered and missed. It can also be configured to show the status of other users on the system.
Phone Manager also allows the user to access and change many of the setting stored in the IP Office configuration that
relate to their own phone operation, for example their forwarding destination numbers. Phone Manager software can
operate in several modes:
Phone Manager Lite
The default mode of Phone Manager. Requires no license, this application can be installed for any IP Office user.
Phone Manager Pro
Users configured for Professional Edition mode are able to access a range of additional features. Phone manager Pro
requires entry of licenses into the IP Office system. The licenses also control the number of simultaneous Phone
Manager Pro users. The user's Phone Manager software then automatically changes from Lite mode to Professional
Edition mode.
Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone
This is a PC softphone mode of Phone Manager operation. The user acts as a VoIP extension, making calls through the
speaker and microphone of their PC. This mode requires further licenses in addition to the Phone Manager Pro licenses.
TAPILink Lite
The Microsoft Telephony Application Program Interface (TAPI) allows TAPI compliant applications to interact with IP
Office phones by installing an IP Office TAPI driver. TAPILink Lite does not require any licenses entered into the IP
Office system's configuration. It allows TAPI compliant applications such as Outlook to make and answer calls. The
speech part of the calls is still via the user's physical phone.
SoftConsole
This is a licensed application. It is intended for telephone system operators or receptionists. Its displays details of calls
directed to the user and allows them to quickly see the status of the callers required destination and transfer the call.
The SoftConsole user is able to access a range of details about the status of users and groups on the IP Office system.
Up to 4 simultaneous SoftConsole users can be licensed.
Conference Center
This is a server application that is then accessed via web browser. It also users with a conference center password to
book conferences. Details of the conference invitees can be entered and those people set to receive either an email or,
using IP Office Voicemail Pro, a call asking them to join the conference.
IP Office MS-CRM
Microsoft's MS-CRM is an application that allows the customer to maintain a database of their business contacts and
details of interactions with those contacts. The IP Office MS-CRM component consists of three parts, one installed on
the MS-CRM user PC, one installed on the customer's MS-CRM server and a license entered into the IP Office system's
configuration. It allows the MS-CRM user to make and answer calls through their MS-CRM application.
IP Office
Page 50
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: User Applications
2.26 Voicemail Applications

The IP Office supports a range of applications for the recording and playing of voicemail messages.
Embedded Voicemail
Also called Integral Voicemail, this application is supported on Small Office Edition, IP406 V2 and IP500 control units. It
is unlicensed but requires the addition of an Avaya memory card to store messages and prompts. Embedded Voicemail
supports basic voicemail mailbox operation, simple auto-attendants and hunt group announcements.
Voicemail Lite
This application does not require an IP Office license. It can be installed from the IP Office Administrator Applications
CD to a Windows PC on the IP Office LAN. It provides voicemail operation for all IP Office users and groups, using the
PC hard-disk to store prompts and messages. Only 4 simultaneous connections to leave or play messages are
supported. Voicemail Lite is not supported on IP500 control units running in IP Office Express Edition mode.
Voicemail Pro
This application requires various licenses entered into the IP Office configuration to control the features it offers and
the number of simultaneous connections, up to 30 on the IP412 control unit. The operation of Voicemail Pro can be
customized to provide special services. Voicemail Pro is not supported on IP500 control units running in IP Office
Standard Edition mode.
Campaigns
The Voicemail Pro can be configured to run a campaign. This consists of a series of questions for which the Voicemail
Pro records the callers answer or key presses. The resulting recordings can then be played back by users. The web
aspect of campaigns allows user to perform this playback and processing of campaign recordings via their web
browser. This requires a web server to be run on the same PC as the Voicemail Pro software.
Text to Speech (TTS)
Through adding additional licenses, the Voicemail Pro is able to use the TTS functions of Windows to speak text and
numbers to callers in addition to recording prompts. This is intended mainly for scenarios where the Voicemail Pro is
obtaining text and number values from a customer database.
Integrated Messaging Service (IMS)
Both Voicemail Pro and Voicemail Lite support a feature called voicemail email to send messages or message alerts
to a users email. This however is a one-way process. IMS allows this to become a two-way process, where users can
play voicemail messages through their email mailbox or voicemail mailbox. IMS interoperates with the customer's
Exchange server and the user's Outlook.
Database Integration
With an additional license, the Voicemail Pro can be integrated with customer database through Windows ODBC.
When combined with TTS operation, this allows the construction of interactive voice response (IVR) applications on
Voicemail Pro.
ContactStore for IP Office
Voicemail Pro can be used for manual and automatic call recording. Those recording are placed into a mailbox and
treated as normal messages. Contact Store allows those recordings to be redirected into a database on the
ContactStore PC. This allows recordings to be archived and searched separately from mailbox messages. This
application requires entry of a license into the IP Office configuration.
IP Office
Page 51
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.27 Call Logging Applications

A wide range of 3rd -party applications exist to provide call logging and accounting for telephone systems. The IP Office
has a number of options for providing call details to those applications.
Call Detail Records (CDR)
IP Office 3.1 and higher supports the sending of CDR records via TCP or UDP to an IP address. A range of common
CDR record formats are supported. This option is configured within the IP Office itself.
Delta Server SMDR Output
This application receives call information from the IP Office systems which it then shares with other applications. The
Delta Server does not require a license in the IP Office configuration. Only one Delta Server can be used with each IP
Office system. The Delta server can be configured to output a call log of all calls made and received by the IP Office
system. The Delta sever send these records to an SMDR file stored on the PC and which can then be accessed by 3rdparty call logging applications. The Delta Server can also send SMDR records to a remote IP address.
2.28 Call Center Applications

Delta Server
The applications below do not communicate directly with the IP Office system. They communicate across the LAN with
a PC running the IP Office Delta Server application. This application receives call information from the IP Office systems
which it then shares with other applications. The Delta Server does not require a license in the IP Office configuration.
Only one Delta Server can be used with each IP Office system.
This is a licensed application. It receives data from the IP Office Delta Server application. The CBC is able to show
details of calls handled by up to 3 selected hunt groups. Its can also display details of IP Office trunk usage. The CBC
retains calls details for 31 days.
CCC is a reporting application designed for use in call centers. It provides a range of both real-time and historical
reporting options. CCC consists of a CCC Server application that receives call information from the IP Office Delta
Server, and a number of client applications for the displaying of that information. CCC and its clients are controlled by
a range of licenses entered into the IP Office configuration.
The CCC server applications are listed below. They are installed onto the same PC:
CCC Archiver
The Archiver manages the collection and storage of call activity information.
Wallboard Manager
Wallboards provide current information on the number of calls waiting, response times and service levels.
Wallboard Manager provides the ability to control both physical wallboards and PC wallboards.
The CCC clients are:
Call Center View (CCV)
Provides a realtime information about call center activity.
Alarm Reporter
Provides real-time and past 7-days information on alarms that have occurred within the call center.
PC Wallboard
The PC Wallboard allows call center agents and supervisors to display real-time call center performance
information on their Windows PC screen.
Report Manager
Provides in depth historical reporting on calls, agents and groups.
Workforce Management
This application allows CCC to share information with a third-party agent scheduling application - Blue Pumpkin.
IP Office
Page 52
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Call Center Applications
2.29 CTI Applications

TAPILink Pro
Using the same software as TAPILink Lite, TAPILink Pro provides all of the features and functionality of TAPILink Lite,
but additionally provides third party CTI operation. This means that a single server can control and monitor any
number of telephone devices. This requires entry of a CTI Link Pro license. TAPILink Pro also provides the ability to
monitor and control groups. This allows an application to be notified when a call enters a queue, and can also redirect
it to another location. TAPILink Pro also supports additional TAPI functionality such as:
Agent login.
Agent logout.
Set and retrieve divert destination.
Set and retrieve extended divert status (Forward All Calls, Forward on Busy, Forward on No Answer, Do not
Disturb).
Retrieving the extension locale (language).
Set and clear the message waiting lamp.
Enable and disable group membership.
Generate and detect DTMF digits and tones (requires the TAPI-WAV driver).
TAPI WAV driver
Provides software-based support for voice processing. Purchasing the CTI Link Pro RFA license key also enables 4 ports
of voice processing; additional ports can be purchased in 4 port increments. The TAPI-WAV driver is for use with TAPI
2.1 only; for TAPI 3.0, IP Office supports the Media Service Provider (MSP) interface, defined by Microsoft in TAPI 3.0.
DevLink Pro
Provides a real-time event stream in addition to the SMDR interface provided in IP Office SMDR (see below). The realtime event stream takes the form of a call record, which is issued whenever the state of any endpoint of a call changes
(typically there are two endpoints on a call, but for some circumstances, such as conference calls, intruded calls there
may be more).
IP Office
Page 53
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.30 Application CD's/DVD's

The IP Office applications are available on a number of CD's and DVD's. These can be ordered at a nominal cost to cover
order processing and delivery. Copies of the CD images can also be downloaded from the Avaya support website at
http://support.avaya.com.
Those indicated with a
Title
IP Office 4.2 User
and Administration
CD Set
are also available on a single IP Office 4.2 DVD (SAP 700459340).

Discs Description
5
SAP Code
This CD set contains the IP Office Administrator Applications CD, IP

Office User Applications CD and IP Office Documentation CD's
(English, German and French). See below for details of the contents
of each CD.
DVD
70045933
2
CD 1: Administrator Applications CD
Contains: the IP Office Wizard, Monitor, Feature Key Server,
Manager, Voicemail Lite, Call Status, DECT Integration applications
plus SNMP MIB's.
CD 2: User Applications CD
Contains the IP Office Phone Manager, TAPI, DevLink, MS-CRM
Integration and SoftConsole applications.
CD 3/4/5: Documentation CDs
Contains an HTML and PDF collection of IP Office documentation.
Available in English, French and German versions.
Voicemail Pro 4.2
CD
This CD set is split into the first CD for Voicemail Pro and a second
CD for the additional IP Office ContactStore application.
70045935
7
CD 1: Contains the Voicemail Pro application including components

for Campaigns, IMS and VPNM.
CD 2: Contains the software for the IP Office ContactStore
application.
Voicemail Pro
ScanSoft TTS CD's
Contains various language text to speech engines for use with

Voicemail Pro's TTS functions.
70029392
1
Languages provided are Chinese, Dutch, English (UK), English (US),

French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Brazilian
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish and Latin Spanish.
Compact Contact
Center V5.2 DVD
This DVD contains Delta Server, CBC and CCC.
70045154
5
Conference Center
V3.2 CD
Installs the IP Office Conference Center application.
70040759
6
It is acceptable to make copies of the Avaya IP Office CD's and DVD's listed above. However the content must remain
intact, unaltered and without change or addition. Avaya does not accept any liability and responsibility for damage or
problems arising from the use of such copies.
IP Office
Page 54
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Application CD's/DVD's
2.31 VoIP
The IP Office is a converged telephony system, that is it combines aspects of traditional PABX telephone systems and IP
data network systems. This works at various levels.
Individual phone users can control the operation of their phone through applications running on their PC.
Data traffic can be routed from the LAN interface to a telephony trunk interface, for example a dial-up ISP connection.
Voice traffic can be routed across internal and or external data links. This option is referred to as voice over IP (VoIP).
The VoIP mode of operation can include IP trunks between customer systems and or H.323 IP telephones for users. In
either case the following factors must be considered:
The IP Office control unit must be fitted with voice compression channels. These channels are used whenever a IP
device (trunk or extension) needs to communicate with a non-IP device (trunk or extension). See Voice Compression
Channels.
A network assessment is a mandatory requirement. For support issues with VoIP, Avaya may request access to the
network assessment results and may refuse support if those are not available or satisfactory.
A network assessment would include a determination of the following:

A network audit to review existing equipment and evaluate its capabilities, including its ability to meet both current and
planned voice and data needs.
A determination of network objectives, including the dominant traffic type, choice of technologies, and setting voice
quality objectives.
The assessment should leave you confident that the implemented network will have the capacity for the foreseen data
and voice traffic, and can support H.323, DHCP, TFTP and jitter buffers in H.323 applications.
An outline of the expected network assessment targets is:
IP Office
Test
Minimum Assessment Target
Latency
Less than 150ms.
Packet Loss
Less than 2%.
Duration
Monitor statistics once every minute for a full week.
Page 55
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.32 Voice Compression Channels

Calls to and from IP devices can require conversion to the audio codec format being used by the IP device. In the IP
Office this conversion is done by voice compression channels. These support the common IP audio codecs G711, G723
and G729a.
For Small Office Edition control units either 3 or 16 integral channels are included. For IP400 control units channels can
be added by fitting IP400 VCM cards. For the IP500 control unit channels can be added using either IP400 VCM cards or
licensed IP500 VCM cards.
The voice compression channels are used as follows.
IP Device to Non-IP Device
These calls require a voice compression channel for the duration of the call. If no channel is available busing indication
is returned to the call.
IP Device to IP Device
Call progress tones (for example dial tone, secondary dial tone, etc) do not require voice compression channels with
the following exceptions:
Short code confirmation, ARS camp on and account code entry tones require a voice compression channel.
Devices using G723 require a voice compression channel for all tones except call waiting.
When a call is connected:
If the IP devices use the same audio codec no voice compression channel is used.
If the devices use differing audio codecs, a voice compression channel is required for each.
Non-IP Device to Non-IP Device
No voice compression channels are required except for Small Office Edition Embedded Voicemail access.
Music on Hold
This is provided from the IP Office's TDM bus and therefore requires a voice compression channel when played to an IP
device.
Conference Resources and IP Devices
Conferencing resources are managed by the conference chip which is on the IP Office's TDM bus. Therefore, a voice
compression channel is required for each IP device involved in a conference. This includes services that use conference
resources such as call listen, intrusion, call recording and silent monitoring.
Page Calls to IP Device
Page calls require 1 voice compression channel per audio codec being used by any IP devices involved. IP Office 4.0
and higher only uses G729a for page calls, therefore only requiring one channel but also only supporting pages to
G729a capable devices.
Voicemail Services and IP Devices
Calls to the IP Office voicemail servers (Voice Mail Pro, Voicemail Lite and Embedded Voicemail) are treated as data
calls from the TDM bus. Therefore calls from an IP device to voicemail require a voice compression channel.
On the Small Office Edition, embedded voicemail uses voice compression channels for audio conversion. Therefore
all calls to SOE embedded voicemail require a voice compression channel and calls from IP devices require two voice
compression channels.
Fax Calls
These are voice calls but with a slightly wider frequency range than spoken voice calls. IP Office only supports fax
across IP between IP Office systems with the Fax Transport option selected. It does not currently support T38.
SIP Calls
SIP Line Call to/from Non-IP Devices
Voice compression channel required.
Outgoing SIP Line Call from IP Device
No voice compression channel required.
Incoming SIP Line Call to IP Device
Voice compression channel reserved until call connected.
Note: T3 IP devices must be configured to 20ms packet size for the above conditions to apply. If left configured for 10ms
packet size, a voice compression channel is needed for all tones and for non-direct media calls.
IP Office
Page 56
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Voice Compression Channels
2.33 Training
Avaya University provides a wide range of training courses for IP Office and its associated applications. This includes
courses necessary for IP Office resellers to become Avaya Authorized Channel Partners and for individuals to achieve IP
Office certification.
Details of all the course can be found on the Avaya University web site (http://www.avaya-learning.com). The site can be
used to check course availability and to book course. It also includes on-line courses and on-line course assessments. The
site requires users to setup a user name and password in order to track their personal training record.
The Avaya University site also includes details of the processes necessary for achieving different levels of product
certification. These processes allow installers and maintainers to achieve certification in different areas such as Selling,
Design, Implementation, Maintenance, Voicemail and Contact Centers. Levels of individual certification within those areas
are:
Avaya Certified Associate (ACA).
Avaya Certified Specialists (ACS).
Avaya Certified Expert (ACE).
Key IP Office courses are:

Course
Course Code
IP Office Hardware and Applications Overview
AVA00136WEN
IP Office Data Components
AVA00138WEN
IP Office Voicemail Pro
AVA00139WEN
IP Office Implementation Workshop
AVA00140H00
IP Office Advanced Applications Workshop
AVA00484H00
IP Office Telephones End-User Training
AVA00619WEN
IP Office Telephones End-User Training ILT
AVA00619H00
IP DECT (Europe only)
AVA00757WEN
IP Office Maintenance and Troubleshooting Workshop
AVA00758H00
IP Office Release 4.0 Product Delta
IP Office
Page 57
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2.34 Web Sites

Information to support the IP Office can be found on a number of web sites.
Avaya - http://www.avaya.com
The official web site for Avaya. The front page also provides access to individual Avaya web sites for different
countries.
Avaya Enterprise Portal - http://partner.avaya.com
This is the official web site for all Avaya Business Partners. The site requires registration for a user name and
password. Once accessed, the site portal can be individually customized for what products and information types you
wish to see and to be notified about by email.
Avaya Support - http://support.avaya.com
Contains documentation and other support materials for Avaya products including IP Office. Copies of the IP Office CD
images are available from this site and updated core software .bin files.
Avaya University - http://www.avaya-learning.com
This site provides access to the full range of Avaya training courses. That includes both on-line courses, course
assessments and access to details of classroom based courses. The site requires users to register in order to provide
the user with access to details of their training record. See Training.
Avaya Community - http://www.aucommunity.com
This is the official discussion forum for Avaya product users. However it does not include any separate area for
discussion of IP Office issues.
Avaya IP Office Knowledge Base - http://marketingtools.avaya.com/knowledgebase
Access to an on-line regularly updated version of the IP Office Knowledge Base.
Avaya UPS Calculator - http://ups.avayaups.com
An online calculator for uninterruptable power supply (UPS) requirements. Allows specification of a range of equipment
to be supported including IP Office 403, 406 and 412 control units. See Power Supply Backup (UPS).
Other Non-Avaya Web Sites
A number of third-party web forums exist that discuss IP Office. These can act as useful source of information about
how the IP Office is used. Some of these forums require you to be a member and to register. These are not official
Avaya forums and their content is not monitored or sanctioned by Avaya.
Tek-Tips: http://www.tek-tips.com.
IP Office Info: http://www.ipofficeinfo.com.
Yahoo Groups: http://groups.yahoo.com/group/ipoffice.
Lycos Forum: http://members.lycos.co.uk/ipoffice.
PBX Tech: http://www.pbxtech.info/forumdisplay.php?f=8.
IP Office Italian: http://www.ipoffice.it.
IP Office UK: http://www.ipoffficeforum.co.uk.
IP Office
Page 58
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Overview: Web Sites
IP Office
Page 59
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 3.
Planning
IP Office
Page 61
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
3. Planning
3.1 Space Requirements
The Small Office Edition is designed to be free-standing or wall mounted. The base includes integral screw-head slots for
wall mounting and an additional bracket is supplied with the module for a locking screw.
All the other IP Office control units and modules are designed to be installed either in a free-standing stack or into a 19"
rack system. Rack installation requires a rack mounting kit for each control unit and expansion module.
Cable Clearance
Clearance must be provided at the front and rear of all modules for cable access and feature key dongle connection.
On IP400 and Small Office Edition systems, allow a minimum clearance of 75mm (3 inches).
On IP500 systems allow a minimum clearance of 90mm (3.5 inches).
Additional Clearance
Care should be taken to ensure that the positioning of the modules does not interrupt air flow and other factors that
may affect environmental requirements. This is especially important on IP500 control units which have ventilation
slots at the side.
Cable Access
Installation measures must be taken to prevent physical damage to the power supply cord, including proper routing of
the power supply cord and provision of a socket outlet near the fixed equipment or positioning of the equipment near a
socket outlet.
Small Office Edition Control Unit

The Small Office Edition control unit can be used free-standing or wall mounted.
IP Office
Page 62
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Planning: Space Requirements
IP400 Control Units and External Expansion Modules
IP500 Control Unit

When wall mounted, a clearance of 500mm is required on all sides. The ventilation slots on the rear and sides should not
be covered or blocked.
IP Office
Page 63
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
3.2 Environmental Requirements

The planned location must meet the following requirements. If being installed into a rack system, these are requirements
for within the rack:
1. o Temperature: 0C to 40C / 32F to 104F.
2. o Humidity: 10% to 95% non-condensing.
3. o Check there are no flammable materials in the area.
4. o Check there is no possibility of flooding.
5. o Check that no other machinery or equipment needs to be moved first.
6. o Check that it is not an excessively dusty atmosphere.
7. o Check that the area is unlikely to suffer rapid changes in temperature and humidity.
8. o Check for the proximity of strong magnetic fields, sources of radio frequency and other electrical interference.
9. o Check there are no corrosive chemicals or gasses.
10.o Check there is no excessive vibration or potential of excessive vibration, especially of any mounting surface.
11.o Check that where telephones are installed in another building, that the appropriate protectors and protective
grounds are fitted (see Out of Building Telephone Installation).
12.o Check there is suitable lighting for installation, system programming and future maintenance.
13.o Check that there is sufficient working space for installation and future maintenance.
14.o Ensure that likely activities near the system will not cause any problems, e.g. access to and maintenance of any
other equipment in the area.
15.o Where ventilation holes are present on any of the IP Office units, those holes should not be covered or blocked.
16.o The surface must be flat horizontal for free-standing or rack mounted installations.
Wall Mounting
In additional to the requirements above, the following are applicable to IP Office units that support wall mounting.
1. Units must only be mounted onto permanent wall surfaces.
2. The surface must be vertical and flat.
3. Orientation of the unit must be as shown in the sections on IP500 Wall Mounting or Small Office Edition Wall Mounting.
4. The appropriate Avaya wall mounting kits must be used.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire,
electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet
basement or near a swimming pool.
2. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric
shock from lightning.
3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
4. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode.
Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions.
IP Office
Page 64
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Planning: Environmental Requirements
3.3 Tools and Parts Required

This section outlines the tools and miscellaneous parts likely to be required during the setup of an IP Office system. Other
tools may also be required.
Tools Required
1. o Pozidrive No. 1 screwdriver for removal of module covers.
2. o Cutter for cable ties.
3. o Pozidrive No. 4 screwdriver.
4. o Wrist-strap for anti-static grounding or similar.
5. o PC running Windows 2000/XP/2003.
During the Staging Installation later in this manual, we recommend that you use a customer PC that will eventually
remain on site. Ideally this will be the same PC that will be used as the customers Feature Key server and or voicemail
server.
6. o Indelible marker for cable labelling.
Parts Required
1. o Cable ties.
2. o Cabling labels.
3. o IP Office CD Pack
Contains IP Office Administration Applications CD, IP Office User Applications CD and IP Office Engineers Toolkit CD.
4. o Technical Bulletins
Each IP Office software release is normally accompanied by a Technical Bulletin detailing special installation
requirements, known issues, etc. Various software releases and their associated Technical Bulletins can also be
obtained from http://support.avaya.com.
IP Office
Page 65
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office
Page 66
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 4.
Pre-Configuration
IP Office
Page 67
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
4. Pre-Configuration
4.1 Off Line Configuration
Manager supports a number of methods by which the configuration of an IP Office system can be setup in advanced of
the physical IP Office. This allows pre-configuration and speeds up the actual on-site installation.
It also allows potential configuration questions to be raised and resolved with the customer in advance of the on-site
installation, reducing the number of post-installation changes required.
Creating a New Configuration

Manager can be used to create a new configuration, specifying the locale, control unit type, expansion modules and
trunk cards in the process. This then gives a default configuration onto which the customer requirements can be
prepared.
Importing Settings
Manager can import settings in the form a simple CSV files. It can also be used to export the settings from another IP
Office system's configuration and then import those settings into a different configuration.
IP Office
Page 68
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Pre-Configuration: Off Line Configuration
4.2 Creating a New Configuration

Manager can be used to create a new configuration without connecting to an IP Office system. During the process, you
can specify the locale of the system, what type of trunk cards it uses and what type of control unit and expansion
modules to include.
This allows the creation of a configuration prior to installation of the real system and so can be used to speed up
installation.
The configuration created must match the physical equipment in the IP Office system onto which the configuration will
be loaded. Doing otherwise may cause the IP Office system to reset and experience other problems.
The Create Configuration tool includes all control units, external expansion modules and trunk cards supported by IP
Office. It is you responsibility to confirm what IP Office equipment is supported in your locale.
Creating a New Configuration

1. Click
in the main toolbar or select File | Offline | Create New Config from the menu bar.
2. Select the Locale for the system. This defines a range of features such as default telephony settings. Click Next >.
3. Select the type of IP Office control unit. Then select the expansion modules, excluding WAN3, to also include in the
system. Click Next >.
4. Select the trunks cards to be included and the IP address of a WAN3 module if required. Click Finish.
5. The configuration is created and loaded into Manager.
6. Once this configuration has been edited as required it can be saved on the PC. In order to send it to the matching IP
Office system, File | Offline | Send Configuration has to be used.
IP Office
Page 69
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
4.3 Importing and Exporting Settings

Manager can import configuration settings created elsewhere. This can be useful when setting up a new system or
sharing common settings such as a directory between systems.
Settings are imported and exported in two formats:
Binary Files (.exp)
These are non-editable files. During import and export it is possible to select what types of entries should be included
in the file. During import the whole file is imported.
Comma Separated Variable Text Files (.csv)
These are plain text files. In addition to being exported from an IP Office system these files can be created and edited
using programs such as WordPad or Excel.
UTF-8 Character Encoding
Manager imports and exports CSV files using UTF-8 character encoding which uses a double byte to support
characters with diacritic marks such as . Other applications, such as Excel, may, depending on the user PC
settings, use different encoding which will cause such characters to be removed or corrupted. Care should be
taken to ensure that any tool used to create or edit the CSV supports all the characters expected and uses UTF-8
format.
Importing into Manager from Excel
From Excel save the file as a .csv. This file will use ANSI character encoding. Open the file in Notepad and use
the Save As option to rename the file and select UTF-8 encoding. Import the UTF-8 version of the file into
Manager.
Exporting from Manager into Excel
Do not double-click on the file exported from Manager. Start Excel and use File | Open to select the file.
Excel will recognize that the file uses UTF-8 encoding and will start its text file importation wizard. Follow the
wizard instructions and select comma as the field delimiter.
Exporting Settings
1. Select File | Import/Export... from the menu bar.
2. Select Export.
3. Select the type of file. The list of exportable entry types will change to match the file type.
4. Select the types of items that should be exported.
5. Use the Save In path to select the location for the exported files. The default location used is sub-directory of the
Manager application directory based on system name of the currently loaded IP Office system.
6. Click OK.
Importing Settings
Importing settings will overwrite any existing entries that match an entry being imported.
1. Select File | Import/Export... from the menu bar.
2. Select Import.
3. Select the type of file. The list of items will change to match the type of file selected and whether a matching file or
files is found in the current file path.
4. Use Look In to adjust the file path. The default location used is sub-directory of the Manager application directory
based on system name of the currently loaded IP Office system.
5. Select the types of items that should be imported.
6. Click OK.
IP Office
Page 70
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Pre-Configuration: Importing and Exporting Settings

CSV File Formats
The format is CSV using commas as field separator, no text delimiters and no header row. The simplest way to check the
required format for a CSV file prior to import, is to export and study the settings from an existing system.
File Name
Fields in Order
Directory
Name, Number.
HuntGroup
Name, Extension, Group, Hunt, Rotary, Idle, Queuing On, Voicemail On, Broadcast, Voicemail
Email.
License
License, License Key
ShortCode
Code, Telephone Number, Feature.
User
Name, Extension, User Restriction/Rights, Voicemail Email.
Configuration
Proprietary format
Notes
Hunt Group: Apart from Name, Extension and Voicemail Email, the fields use a 1 or 0 value for on or off.
License:
The License field is for information only and is ignored during import.
Following import the License name may appear as invalid with Manager. To resolve this save and then reload the
configuration file.
System: The format of the system CSV is too complex to be described. It is a full export of all the IP Office system's
configuration settings. This file format should only be used for export and import between systems and not for any
offline editing.
IP Office
Page 71
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 5.
Installation
IP Office
Page 73
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
5. Small Office Edition Installation

5.1 Unpacking
Use the following procedure when unpacking any equipment supplied by Avaya or an Avaya distributor.
Objective - To check that the correct equipment has been supplied and that no damage has occurred during transit.
Information Required
1. o Equipment Checklist.
Draw up an installation checklist of the parts and equipment expected.
Procedure
1. o Check for Package Damage.
Before unpacking any equipment, check for any signs of damage that may have occurred during transit. If any damage
exists bring it to the attention of the carrier.
2. o Check the Correct Parts Have Been Delivered.
Check all cartons against the packing slip and ensure that you have the correct items. Report any errors or omissions
to the equipment supplier.
3. o Retain All Packaging and Documentation.
While unpacking the equipment, retain all the packaging material. Fault returns are accepted only if repackaged in the
original packaging. If performing a staged installation, the original packaging will also assist when repacking equipment
to be moved to the final install site.
4. o Ensure that Anti-Static Protection Measures are Observed
Ensure that anti-static protection measures are observed at all times when handling equipment with exposed electrical
circuit boards.
5. o Check All Parts.
Visually inspect each item and check that all the necessary documentation and accessory items have been included.
Report any errors or omissions to the dealer who supplied the equipment.
6. o Check All Documentation.
Ensure that you read and retain any documentation included with any items.
IP Office
Page 74
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Small Office Edition Installation: Unpacking
5.2 Installing the Admin Applications

This procedure covers installation of applications in the IP Office Admin suite.
Objective - To install the applications necessary for the installation and maintenance of an IP Office system.
1. o Which IP Office Admin Suite applications are being installed?
The following list indicates those that are required for installation and configuration:
o System Monitor - Install
Monitor is a tool intended primarily for Avaya technicians and engineers. However it is able to report on all aspects of
IP Office operation and is therefore an important tool for diagnostics.
o Feature Key Server - Optional
The Feature Key Server should only be installed if the PC will host the parallel port or USB port Feature Key dongle
for the IP Office system.
o Manager - Install
This application is required to edit and manage the software on the IP Office system.
o Voicemail Mail Lite - Optional
Only install this application if no other voicemail such as Voicemail Pro or embedded voicemail is being installed. IP
Office Lite is not supported by IP500 systems running in IP Office Standard Edition mode.
o System Status Application - Install
This application is used with IP Office 4.0 systems to show equipment and resource within the system, alarms and
calls in progress.
o Previous System Monitor - IP400 Install/IP500 Optional
For IP400 control unit this version of monitor is required until the system is upgraded to IP Office 4.0 software.
o Call Status - Optional
This application is only supported for pre-4.0 IP Office systems. For IP Office 4.0 and higher it has been replaced by
the System Status Application above.
Parts Required
1. o IP Office Administrator Applications CD.
2. o Windows PC
This should meet the requirements of the administrator applications being installed. If a server PC from the customer
installation is available, for example for Voicemail Pro, use that PC. The specification below is just for IP Office
Manager. If other applications are to be installed on the PC then their requirements should also be meet.
Requirement
Minimum
Recommended
Processor
600MHz Pentium or AMD Opteron, AMD

Athlon64, AMD Athlon XP.

RAM
128MB
256MB
HD Space
1GB - 800MB for .NET2, 200MB for

Manager.
1.4GB - 800MB for .NET2, 600MB for the full IP

Office Admin suite.
Display
800 x 600 - 256 Colors
1024 x 768 - 16-bit High Color
Operating System
Windows XP Professional with SP2. Windows 2003 Server. Windows 2003 SBS. Note: 64-bit
versions of the operating systems above are not supported.
IP Office
Page 75
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Procedure: Installing the IP Office Admin Applications

1. Using the Add or Remove Programs option in the Windows Control Panel, check that the PC does not already have a
version of the IP Office Admin suite installed.
If 'yes' and the suite is a pre-IP Office 3.2 version, remove the existing IP Office Admin suite via Add/Remove
Programs.
If the existing suite is IP Office 3.2 or higher, it is possible to upgrade without removing the previous installation.
2. Insert the IP Office Administrator Applications CD. The installation process should auto start. If it does not auto start,
open the CD contents and double-click setup.exe.
3. Select the language you want to use for the installation process. This does not affect the language used by Manager
which will attempt to match your Windows regional setting. Click Next >.
4. Select whether only the current Windows logon account should be able to run the Admin Suite applications or whether
they will be available to all users of the PC. Click Next >.
The previous selection does not affect the IP Office Feature key server application, if installed. That application runs
as a service whenever the PC is running.
5. If required select the destination to which the applications should be installed. We recommend that you accept the
default destination. Click Next >.
6. The next screen is used to select which applications in the suite should be installed. Clicking on each will display a
description of the application. Click on the
next to each application to change the installation selection. When you
have selected the installations required, click Next >.
For IP Office system installations, ensure that at minimum System Monitor and Manager are selected.
Only select Voice Mail Lite if this PC will also be the customer's Voicemail Lite server PC.
Deselect Feature Key Server unless this PC will be hosting a Parallel port or USB port Feature Key dongle for the
customer's IP Office system.
7. Click Install.
8. Installation of Windows .Net2 components may be required. If dialogs for this appear, follow the prompts to install .
Net.
9. If requested, reboot the PC.
IP Office
Page 76
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Small Office Edition Installation: Installing the Admin Applications
5.3 Default Control Unit Power Up

This procedure starts a new IP Office control unit not connected to any LAN. In this scenario the IP Office control unit will
assume its default configuration settings.
Objective - To power up the IP Office control unit to a known state with a known set of defaults.
Parts and Equipment Required
1. o Switched power outlet socket.
2. o IP Office Control Unit.
3. o Locale Specific Power Cord.
Procedure
1. Remove the control unit from its box and check its condition.
2. Connect the external power supply unit to the control unit.
3. Connect the power cord from the power supply outlet to the external power supply unit.
Installation measures must be taken to prevent physical damage to the power supply cord, including proper routing
of the power supply cord and provision of a socket outlet near the fixed equipment or positioning of the equipment
near a socket outlet.
4. Switch on power to the control unit.
5. Observe the center LED on the far-right of the front of the Small Office Edition control unit. Initially this LED will be
red. After approximately 10 seconds it should change to green. During this time other LED's may flash as the unit goes
through its power on self test cycle.
IP Office Default Settings

The following are the basic default configuration settings for an IP Office system.
System
Name
MAC address of the control unit.
System Password
password
License Server IP Address
255.255.255.255
LAN*
LAN1
LAN2/WAN
IP address
192.168.42.1.
192.168.43.1
IP Mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
DHCP Mode
Server
Server
No of DHCP IP Addresses
200.
200.
*See Default DHCP/Data Settings detail below.

Extensions and Users
A user is automatically created for each physical extension port detected in the system. Users are assigned extension
numbers starting from 201. User names take the form Extn201, Extn202, ....
Hunt Group
A single hunt group 200 called Main is created and the first 10 users are placed into that hunt group as members.
Incoming Call Routes
Two default incoming call routes are created. Voice calls are routed to the hunt group Main. Data calls are routed to the
RAS user DialIn.
Default Short Codes
IP400 control units are manufactured as either A-Law or U-Law variants. For IP500 control units, A-Law or U-Law
variant operation is determined by the IP500 Smart Card installed. Depending on the variant, different sets of short
codes are created for the default configuration. Refer to the IP Office Manager application help for full details.
Default DHCP/Data Settings
When a defaulted IP Office control unit is switched on, it requests IP address information from a DHCP Server on the
network. This operation will occur whether the LAN cable is plugged in or not.
If a DHCP server responds within approximately 10 seconds, the control unit defaults to being a DHCP client and
uses the IP address information supplied by the DHCP server.
IP Office
Page 77
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
If no DHCP Server responds, the control unit defaults to being the DHCP server for the LAN using the following
settings:
For its LAN1 it allocates the IP address 192.168.42.1 and IP Mask 255.255.255.0. It supports 200 DHCP
clients using the addresses range 192.168.42.2 and 192.168.42.201, the IP Mask 255.255.255.0 and default
gateway address 192.168.42.1 (the Control Unit's LAN1 address).
For its LAN2 if supported, it allocates the IP address 192.168.43.1 and IP Mask 255.255.255.0.
Note that the IP Office does not check that these addresses are valid and or available on the network.
This mode of operation will persist for subsequent power ups, until a config save occurs due to one of the following
The unit performs its automatic midnight backup.
A configuration is merged using IP Office Manager.
A soft reboot is performed using IP Office Manager.
A software upgrade is performed.
IP Office
Page 78
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Small Office Edition Installation: Default Control Unit Power Up
5.4 Connecting the Manager PC

At this stage we will directly connect the Manager PC to the new IP Office control unit. For this the PC will need to be set
to a fixed IP address in the same subnet range as the IP Office control unit's default address
(192.168.42.1/255.255.255.255).
Objective - Physically connecting the Manager PC and the IP Office without needing to adjust or configure any
intervening equipment.
1. o Manager PC.
2. o LAN Cable.
o IP Office Small Office Edition, IP406 V2 and IP500 control units:
A standard RJ45-RJ45 LAN cable can be used.
o IP412 Control Unit:
A RJ45-RJ45 cross-over LAN cable is required.
Procedure: Direct Connection to a Defaulted IP Office Control Unit

1. Check that the TCP/IP properties for the Manager PC's Local Area Network connection are set as follow:
Fixed IP address: 192.168.42.203
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 192.168.42.1.
2. Connect the LAN cable from the PC's LAN port the LAN 1 port on the IP Office control unit.
3. Check that the orange LED lamp on the IP Office LAN port is on. The green LED may also be flickering as it indicates
traffic across the LAN connection.
4. Select Start | Run and enter cmd.
5. In the command window that appears enter ping 192.168.42.1. The results should show a number of ping replies from
the IP Office. This confirms basic communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office.
6. If there are no ping replies
Enter ipconfig. The results should list the IP address settings of the Manager PC as required above and with no
mention of DHCP being used. Enter exit.
7. Check the cable connection.
IP Office
Page 79
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
5.5 Receiving a Configuration (Pre 3.2)

The following is the normal procedure for receiving a copy of the IP Office configuration from a new or defaulted control
unit running pre-3.2 IP Office core software.
Objective - This process tests the communication between the Manager application and the IP Office control unit.
1. o System Password - For a new or defaulted system this is password.
Procedure: Receiving the Configuration from a Pre-3.2 IP Office Control Unit
1. Select Start | Programs | IP Office | Manager.
2. Click
in the main toolbar or select File | Open Configuration from the menu bar.
3. The Select IP Office window appears. After a few seconds it should list the control unit that is being setup. The default
name used is the control units MAC address.
If the system required was not found, the address used for the search can be changed. Enter or select the required
address in the Unit/Broadcast Address field and then click Refresh to perform a new search.
4. Click the check the box next to the system and then click OK.
5. The name and password request is displayed. The name must match a Manager operator and the password must
match the IP Office control unit's system password. For a defaulted IP Office with pre-3.2 IP Office software enter
Administrator and password.
The name and password used above are applicable to new control units which are supplied with a basic IP Office 2.1
level of software. Once upgraded to IP Office 3.2 the name and password required change.
6. Successful receiving of the configuration is shown by the full configuration tree being shown in the left-hand panel.
With no configuration loaded the configuration tree shows just BOOTP and Operator.
IP Office
Page 80
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Small Office Edition Installation: Receiving a Configuration (Pre 3.2)
5.6 Using Monitor

Monitor is a tool intended primarily for Avaya technicians and engineers. However it is also able to report the presence of
hardware devices that are not reported by the IP Office Manager application and is therefore an important tool during the
installation process. This process shows how System Monitor can be used to obtain information about the components
installed with the IP Office control unit.
Objective
To introduce System Monitor so that it can be used during later stages of installation to confirm the correct installation of
some components into the control unit.
Warnings
1. Running Monitor can create a high network load on the IP Office system. Therefore it should only be used when
necessary and should be closed when not needed.
1. o System IP Address - For a new or defaulted system this will still be 192.168.42.1.
Procedure: Running Monitor

1. Select Start | Programs | IP Office | Monitor.
2. If Monitor has been run before it will attempt to connect will the system which is monitored previously. If you want to
monitor a different system use the steps below.
3. Select File and then Select Unit.
4. Enter the IP Address and Password (see below) of the IP Office control unit you want to monitor.
For a new or defaulted control unit the IP address is 192.168.42.1 and the password is password.
Following installation, the IP Office control unit can be configured with a specific Monitor Password for Monitor access
to an IP Office system. If the IP Office does not have a Monitor Password set, Monitor uses the IP Office's System
Password.
5. For an IP Office system, ensure that IP Office is selected.
6. Click OK.
7. The first few lines give information about various aspects of the IP Office system. For example:
0ms PRN: Monitor Started IP=192.168.42.203 IP406 DS 3.2(8) IPOffice_1
1ms PRN: LAW=U PRI=0, BRI=0, ALOG=0, ADSL=0, VCOMP=16, MDM=0, WAN=0 MODU=0 LANM-0, CkSRC=0
VMAIL=1(VER=2 TYP=1) CALLS=0(TOT=2)
LAW = A or MU law system.
MODU = Number of external expansion modules.
PRI = PRI channels
LANM = Number of WAN3 Modules attached.
BRI = BRI channels.
CkSRC = Current Clock Source (ISDN port number - 0 = Internal Clock

Source)
ALOG = Analog Trunks

VCOMP = VCM channels.
MDM = Modem channels.
WAN = WAN Ports configured.
VMAIL = 1 if connected, 0 if not connected.

VER = Version of the voicemail server if obtainable.
TYP = Type of Voicemail Server:
0= None, 1 = PC (Voicemail Lite or Pro), 2 = Line, 3 = Embedded, 4 =
Group, 5 = Audix.
CALLS = Number of current calls
TOT = Total number of calls made to date since last IP Office reboot.
8. Close Monitor until it is need again. When restarted, Monitor will attempt to reconnect using the last settings entered.
9. For Small Office Edition control units, proceed to Fitting Trunk Cards. For all other control units proceed to Fitting VCM
Cards.
IP Office
Page 81
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
5.7 Fitting Trunk Cards (SOE)

All trunk cards are supplied with 2 plastic snap-in stand off pillars and a blanking plate appropriate to the cards ports.
The blanking plate is not required with the Small Office Edition.
Warnings
1. Correct anti-static protection steps should be taken before handling circuit boards.
2. During this process power to the IP Office control unit must be switched off and disconnected.
1. o Trunk Card or Cards
Check that the correct card has been supplied.
IP400 Trunk Cards
SOE
Quad BRI Trunk Card
WAN Port Card
Tools Required
1. o Cross-head screwdriver.
2. o Anti-static wrist strap and ground point.
3. o IP Office Monitor application.
IP Office
Page 82
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Small Office Edition Installation: Fitting Trunk Cards (SOE)

Procedure
1. Ensure that you wear an anti-static wrist strap that is connected to a suitable grounding point.
2. Remove the top cover (1) from the base cover by removing the four retaining screws (2) on either side.
3. Remove the rear panel (3).
4. Locate the holes for the two trunk card stand off pillars and insert them.
5. Plug the trunk card (5) onto its sockets and stand-off hex. pillars.
If fitting a WAN card, replace the rear panel with the new one supplied with the WAN card.
Otherwise, on the rear panel, press out all of the knock-out panels (4) to match the trunk card being fitted.
6. Replace the rear panel.
7. Fit the top cover back in place and reinsert the four screws previously removed.
8. Proceed to Upgrading the Core Software.
IP Office
Page 83
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
5.8 Shelf/Wall Mounting

Small Office Edition control units can be shelf or wall mounted. Four screw head retaining slots are moulded into the base
of the unit for this purpose. In addition a plastic Z-shaped bracket and screw is supplied with the unit for securing it in
position.
Horizontally on a shelf - leaving sufficient space for the cabling at both front and rear of the unit.
Vertically from a wall with the front panel facing down only.
The Z-shaped bracket must not be used as the sole mounting fixture.
Tools Required
1. o Drill and drill bits suitable for the wall fixings selected.
2. o Screwdrivers.
1. o Wall fixings suitable for 3 No.8 screws.
2. o 3 x No.8 panhead screws, minimum 25mm long.
IP Office
Page 84
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Small Office Edition Installation: Shelf/Wall Mounting

Procedure
1. Using a drill size suitable for the selected wall fixing, drill two holes 6.3 inches (160mm) apart either horizontally or
vertically.
2. Insert the wall fixings.
3. Insert the two No.8 panhead screws leaving approximately 0.4 inches (10mm) proud of wall.
4. Fit the Z-shaped bracket (2) onto the base of the unit using the M3 self tapping screw supplied.
5. Slide the unit onto the two screws, locating them into two of the retaining slots (1).
6. Mark the position of the retaining screw for the Z-bracket.
7. Remove the unit from the wall and drill a hole and insert a wall fixing for the Z-bracket position.
8. Re-position the unit and secure with a No. 8 panhead through the slot of the Z-shaped bracket.
IP Office
Page 85
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
5.9 Grounding (SOE)

and data networks.
WARNING
or
symbol. Ground


1. o 14AWG Solid copper wire for ground connection.
2. o Cable sleeve matching local regulator requirements. Typically green for a functional ground and green/yellow for a
protective ground.
Procedure
On the Small Office Edition control unit, the ground point is provided by a 3.5mm jack socket marked with a
symbol
on the left of the rear panel. Ground connections to these points should use a 14 AWG solid wire with either a green
sleeve for a functional ground or green and yellow sleeve for a protective ground.
IP Office
Page 86
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Small Office Edition Installation: Grounding (SOE)
5.10 Upgrading the Core Software

The installed IP Office Manager includes .bin core software files appropriate to the software level. It can be used to load
those .bin file into the control unit and module within the IP Office system.
WARNINGS
Check the latest IP Office Technical Bulletin for the IP Office software release before proceeding any further. It may
contain information relating to changes that occurred after this document was completed. Bulletins are available from
Upgrading pre-Level 2.1 Systems
For IP Office Systems with software Level 2.0 or earlier, the upgrade procedure must be done from a PC with a fixed IP
address on the same subnet and LAN segment as the IP Office.
Due to the need to adjust internal memory allocation and configuration storage, for certain upgrades some control
units need to perform a multi-stage upgrade process. The table below indicates the required upgrade paths.
Control Unit
.bin File
Unvalidated Only
Validated
ip401ng.bin
2.0 > 2.1
2.1 > 3.0 > 3.1 > 3.2 > 3.2(999) > 4.2.
Multiple Managers
If more than one copy of Manager is running it is possible for the IP Office to request BIN files from a different
Manager from the one that started the upgrade process. Ensure that only one copy of Manager is running when
upgrading an IP Office system.
1. o System Password.
For a new or defaulted system this is password.
Tools Required
1.o Manager PC.
The Upgrade Wizard tool is part of the Manager application.
IP Office
Page 87
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Procedure: Upgrade Procedure

1. Using Manager, click
and receive the configuration from the IP Office. If not already done this action creates a
BOOTP entry in Manager for the IP Office system. This action also confirms communication between the Manager PC
and the IP Office.
2. Select File | Save Configuration As... and save a copy of the configuration file onto the PC. This action should be
completed before upgrading any IP Office system.
3. Select File | Advanced | Upgrade.
4. The UpgradeWiz is started and scans for IP Office modules using the Unit/Broadcast address. Adjust this address and
click Refresh if the expected modules are not shown.
5. For each the control unit and module found, the UpgradeWiz displays the module type, its current version of software
installed in the unit and the software version of the .bin file that Manager has available.
6. For those units and modules where manager detects that it has a higher version available, the tick box next to the unit
or module is automatically selected.
7. If any of the modules have pre-version 2.1 software installed, untick the Validate option.
If this is the case, only continue with the upgrade process using a PC with a fixed IP address on the same LAN
domain and physical LAN segment as the IP Office control unit.
8. If a multi-stage upgrade is necessary, use the following additional steps to select the appropriate interim software:
Right-click on the upgrade wizard and click Select Directory.
Upgrading a Small Office Edition to level 4.0:
Select the V3_2_99 folder within the Manager program directory.
The upgrade wizard should now list just the control unit as having upgrade software available. For the remainder of
the upgrade as detailed below, the upgrade can be rerun again select the final software for the control unit.
9. For those modules which you want to upgrade, tick the check box. For modules where a later version of software is
available the check box may have already been automatically ticked.
10.Select Upgrade.
11.The system password will be requested. Enter it and click OK.
12.Validated Upgrade
If using the Validated option, a number of actions take place as follows;
Firstly the upgrade wizard performs initial checks on the amount of free RAM memory available in the IP Office
system to temporarily store the new BIN files during the upgrade process. If insufficient memory is available, you
will be prompted whether to continue with an off-line upgrade or cancel upgrading.
If offline is selected, the IP Office is rebooted into offline mode. It may be necessary to use the Refresh option
within the Upgrade Wizard to reconnect following the reboot. Validate upgrade can then be attempted to again
check the amount of available RAM memory for transfer of BIN files. If the memory is still insufficient, the option is
offered to either do an unvalidated upgrade or cancel.
The bin files required are transferred to the system and stored in temporary memory.
Once all the files have been transferred, the upgrade wizard will prompt whether it okay to proceed with the upgrade
process. Select Yes to continue.
Each module being upgraded will delete its existing core software, restart and load the new software file that was
transferred. This process may take several minutes for each unit. Do not cancel or close the upgrade wizard while
this process is running.
13.Unvalidated Upgrade
This method of upgrading should be avoided unless absolutely necessary. It is only required for IP Office systems with
pre-2.1 software and should only be done from a Manager PC with a fixed IP address running on the same LAN
segment and subnet as the IP Office system. During the upgrade the units and modules erases their current software
and then request the new software file from Manager.
14.Following the upgrade check that the upgrade wizard now shows that the selected units and modules have upgraded.
It may be necessary to select Refresh to update the information in the upgrade wizard display.
IP Office
Page 88
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Small Office Edition Installation: Upgrading the Core Software
5.11 Configuring Security Settings

Currently the system is defaulted, including the security passwords controlling access to the system's security and
configuration settings.
You should read and understand the Security Settings section of the IP Office Manager documentation. That section
details the settings and operation of the IP Office security settings and is part of the Manager applications help file.
Objective - Make the control unit configuration settings secure from unauthorized changes by changing the default
passwords.
Procedure
2. Select File | Advanced | Security Settings.
name used is the control unit's MAC address.
5. The name and password request is displayed. As the system has been upgrade to IP Office 3.2 software, the name and
password now requested are a Service User name and password stored within the IP Office. The default name and
password for security settings access are security and securitypwd.
6. The Manager should load and display the IP Office control unit's security settings.
7. Select
General. On the tab displayed, the Security Administrator section contains the default name and password
used to access the IP Office's security settings. Click Change and set a new password. The default password is
securitypwd. Click OK.
8. Click OK to save the changes to that tab.
9. Select
Rights Groups and then the Administrator Group.
10.Select the System Status tab and check that System Status Access is selected. This is required for the System
Status Application.
11.Click OK to save the changes to that tab.
12.Select
Service Users. This tab shows the settings for one of the Service Users who have names and passwords
used for access to the configuration settings on the IP Office control unit.
Click Change and set a new password. The default password matches the name. Click OK.
13.Click OK to save the changes made on that tab.
14.Click > button to display the settings for the next Service User and repeat the process in the previous two steps to
change their password.
15.Click OK.
16.The new security settings can now be sent to the IP Office control unit. Click
17.The original name and password used to load the settings will be requested. Enter the details and click OK.
IP Office
Page 89
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
5.12 Receiving a Configuration (3.2+)

The process here applies to systems running IP Office 3.2 and higher.
Objective - Receive a configuration from an IP Office running IP Office 3.2 or higher software.
1. o Service User Name and Password
The defaults for full configuration access are Administrator and Administrator. However these should have been
changed as part of the installation process, see 16. Configuring Security Settings.
Procedure: Receiving the Configuration

2. Click
3. The Select IP Office window appears. After a few seconds it should list the control unit that is being setup. The
default name used is the control units MAC address.
5. The name and password request is displayed. The name and password must match one of those setup through the
security settings. The default name and password for full configuration settings access is Administrator and
Administrator.
With no configuration loaded the navigation pane shows just BOOTP and Operator entries.

System
Name
System Password
password
255.255.255.255
LAN1
LAN1
LAN2/WAN
IP address
192.168.42.1.
192.168.43.1
IP Mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
DHCP Mode
Server
Server
200.
200.

Hunt Group
RAS user DialIn.
IP Office
Page 90
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Small Office Edition Installation: Receiving a Configuration (3.2+)
5.13 Running the System Status Application

In the previous process (Configuring Security Settings) the Administrator service user was configured to be able to use
the IP Office System Status Application (SSA) with the control unit. This application is useful during the following
installation processes as it can be used to validate the correct installation of equipment.
By default the System Status Application is enabled for the Administrator service user. For other service users, use of
System Status Application must be enabled through the IP Office's security settings.
Objective - Allow SSA to be used to check the correct installation of additional equipment.
Procedure
1. Select Start | Programs | IP Office | System Status.
2. On the Logon menu enter the required details. For a default systems these will be:
Control Unit IP Address: 192.168.42.1
Services Base TCP Port: 50804
User Name: Administrator
Password: Administrator
3. Click Logon.
4. If the details are correct, SSA should show Waiting for connection and then the IP Office system status.
IP Office
Page 91
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office
Page 92
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 6.
IP400 Basic Installation
IP Office
Page 93
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

6.1 Unpacking
Use the following procedure when unpacking any equipment supplied by Avaya or an Avaya distributor.
Objective - To check that the correct equipment has been supplied and that no damage has occurred during transit.
Procedure
4. o Ensure that Anti-Static Protection Measures are Observed
circuit boards.
Ensure that you read and retain any documentation included with any items.
IP Office
Page 94
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Unpacking

Objective - To install the applications necessary for the installation and maintenance of an IP Office system.
o Feature Key Server - Optional
The Feature Key Server should only be installed if the PC will host the parallel port or USB port Feature Key dongle
for the IP Office system.
o Manager - Install
Only install this application if no other voicemail such as Voicemail Pro or embedded voicemail is being installed. IP
Office Lite is not supported by IP500 systems running in IP Office Standard Edition mode.
This application is used with IP Office 4.0 systems to show equipment and resource within the system, alarms and
calls in progress.
o Previous System Monitor - IP400 Install/IP500 Optional
For IP400 control unit this version of monitor is required until the system is upgraded to IP Office 4.0 software.
o Call Status - Optional
Parts Required
1. o IP Office Administrator Applications CD.
2. o Windows PC
Requirement
Minimum
Recommended
Processor


RAM
128MB
256MB
HD Space
1GB - 800MB for .NET2, 200MB for

Manager.
1.4GB - 800MB for .NET2, 600MB for the full IP

Office Admin suite.
Display
800 x 600 - 256 Colors
Operating System
Windows XP Professional with SP2. Windows 2003 Server. Windows 2003 SBS. Note: 64-bit
versions of the operating systems above are not supported.
IP Office
Page 95
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

Programs.
7. Click Install.
Net.
IP Office
Page 96
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Installing the Admin Applications
6.3 Control Unit Power Up

This procedure starts a new IP Office control unit not connected to any LAN. In this scenario the IP Office control unit will
assume its default configuration settings.
Objective - To power up the IP Office control unit to a known state with a known set of defaults.
Procedure
1. Remove the control unit from its box and check its condition. Check that an external power supply unit has been
included with the control unit.
2. Connect the external power supply unit to the control unit.
3. Connect the power cord from the power supply outlet to the external power supply unit.
5. Observe the center LED on the front of the control unit. Initially this LED will be red. After approximately 10 seconds it
should change to green. During this time other LED's may flash as the unit goes through its power on self test cycle.

System
Name
System Password
password
255.255.255.255
LAN*
LAN1
LAN2/WAN
IP address
192.168.42.1.
192.168.43.1
IP Mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
DHCP Mode
Server
Server
200.
200.

Hunt Group
RAS user DialIn.
Default Short Codes
IP Office
Page 97
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
settings:
IP Office
Page 98
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Control Unit Power Up
6.4 Connecting the Manager PC

At this stage we will directly connect the Manager PC to the new IP Office control unit. For this the PC will need to be set
to a fixed IP address in the same subnet range as the IP Office control unit's default address
(192.168.42.1/255.255.255.255).
Objective - Physically connecting the Manager PC and the IP Office without needing to adjust or configure any
intervening equipment.
1. o Manager PC.
2. o LAN Cable.
o IP Office Small Office Edition, IP406 V2 and IP500 control units:
A standard RJ45-RJ45 LAN cable can be used.
o IP412 Control Unit:
A RJ45-RJ45 cross-over LAN cable is required.

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
5. In the command window that appears enter ping 192.168.42.1. The results should show a number of ping replies from
the IP Office. This confirms basic communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office.
6. If there are no ping replies
Enter ipconfig. The results should list the IP address settings of the Manager PC as required above and with no
mention of DHCP being used. Enter exit.
IP Office
Page 99
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
6.5 Receiving a Configuration (Pre 3.2)

The following is the normal procedure for receiving a copy of the IP Office configuration from a new or defaulted control
unit running pre-3.2 IP Office core software.
Objective - This process tests the communication between the Manager application and the IP Office control unit.
Procedure: Receiving the Configuration from a Pre-3.2 IP Office Control Unit
2. Click
5. The name and password request is displayed. The name must match a Manager operator and the password must
match the IP Office control unit's system password. For a defaulted IP Office with pre-3.2 IP Office software enter
Administrator and password.
The name and password used above are applicable to new control units which are supplied with a basic IP Office 2.1
level of software. Once upgraded to IP Office 3.2 the name and password required change.
With no configuration loaded the configuration tree shows just BOOTP and Operator.
IP Office
Page 100
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Receiving a Configuration (Pre 3.2)
6.6 Using Monitor

Monitor is a tool intended primarily for Avaya technicians and engineers. However it is also able to report the presence of
hardware devices that are not reported by the IP Office Manager application and is therefore an important tool during the
installation process. This process shows how System Monitor can be used to obtain information about the components
installed with the IP Office control unit.
Objective
To introduce System Monitor so that it can be used during later stages of installation to confirm the correct installation of
some components into the control unit.
Warnings
1. Running Monitor can create a high network load on the IP Office system. Therefore it should only be used when
necessary and should be closed when not needed.
1. o System IP Address - For a new or defaulted system this will still be 192.168.42.1.
Procedure: Running Monitor

1. Select Start | Programs | IP Office | Monitor.
2. If Monitor has been run before it will attempt to connect will the system which is monitored previously. If you want to
monitor a different system use the steps below.
3. Select File and then Select Unit.
4. Enter the IP Address and Password (see below) of the IP Office control unit you want to monitor.
For a new or defaulted control unit the IP address is 192.168.42.1 and the password is password.
Following installation, the IP Office control unit can be configured with a specific Monitor Password for Monitor access
to an IP Office system. If the IP Office does not have a Monitor Password set, Monitor uses the IP Office's System
Password.
5. For an IP Office system, ensure that IP Office is selected.
6. Click OK.
7. The first few lines give information about various aspects of the IP Office system. For example:
0ms PRN: Monitor Started IP=192.168.42.203 IP406 DS 3.2(8) IPOffice_1
1ms PRN: LAW=U PRI=0, BRI=0, ALOG=0, ADSL=0, VCOMP=16, MDM=0, WAN=0 MODU=0 LANM-0, CkSRC=0
VMAIL=1(VER=2 TYP=1) CALLS=0(TOT=2)
LAW = A or MU law system.
MODU = Number of external expansion modules.
PRI = PRI channels
LANM = Number of WAN3 Modules attached.
BRI = BRI channels.
CkSRC = Current Clock Source (ISDN port number - 0 = Internal Clock

Source)
ALOG = Analog Trunks

VCOMP = VCM channels.
MDM = Modem channels.
WAN = WAN Ports configured.
VMAIL = 1 if connected, 0 if not connected.

VER = Version of the voicemail server if obtainable.
TYP = Type of Voicemail Server:
0= None, 1 = PC (Voicemail Lite or Pro), 2 = Line, 3 = Embedded, 4 =
Group, 5 = Audix.
CALLS = Number of current calls
TOT = Total number of calls made to date since last IP Office reboot.
8. Close Monitor until it is need again. When restarted, Monitor will attempt to reconnect using the last settings entered.
9. For Small Office Edition control units, proceed to Fitting Trunk Cards. For all other control units proceed to Fitting VCM
Cards.
IP Office
Page 101
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
6.7 Fitting VCM Cards

VCM cards are used to provide voice compression channels for calls between IP and non-IP
devices, devices being both trunks and extensions. VCM cards with differing numbers of
voice compression channels are available.
Objective - To fit the card and confirm its presence after restarting the IP Office.
Warnings
1.o VCM Card.
Check that the correct card has been supplied. The number and maximum capacity supported varies between different
IP Office control units. All cards are supplied with 2 plastic snap-in stand off pillars.
VCM Cards
Voice Compression
Modules
(25ms echo
cancellation)
Voice Compression
Modules
(64ms echo
cancellation)
SAP Code
VCM5
700185119
VCM10
700185127
VCM20
700185135
VCM30
700293939
VCM4
700359854
VCM8
700359862
VCM16
700359870
VCM24
700359888
Number of VCM cards.

IP406 V2
IP412
30
60
Tools Required.
IP Office
Page 102
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Fitting VCM Cards

Procedure: Installing VCM Cards
1. Check that correct card has been supplied.
2. Ensure that you are wearing an anti-static wrist
strap connected to a suitable ground point.
3. Remove the 7 screws fixing the IP Office control
unit cover and slide the cover off the control unit.
4. Locate the position for the card and its jumper
block.
5. Using the card as a template locate the two holes
in the control unit circuit board. Insert the stand
off pillars into these holes. For the IP412 either
slot can be used in any order.
6. Using minimal force and checking that the pins

are correctly located, push the card onto the
jumper block and stand off pillars.
7. If other cards are being fitted, proceed to 08.
Fitting Modem Cards.
8. Slide the control unit cover back on and replace
the cover screws.
9. Reapply power to the control unit and check that
it restarts correctly.
10.Using the IP Office Monitor application, confirm
that the correct number of voice compression
channels are reported. They are shown by the
value VCOMP= at the start of the Monitor trace.
IP Office
Page 103
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
6.8 Fitting Modem Cards

Objective - To fit and verify the presence of a modem card.
Warnings
1. o Modem Card
Modem Cards
SAP Code
Internal Modem Card/Modem 12

700343452
Modem 2 Card
700185226
IP406 V2
IP412
Tools Required
IP Office
Page 104
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Fitting Modem Cards

Procedure: Installing Modem Cards
1. Check that correct card has been supplied.
2. Ensure that you are wearing a anti-static wrist strap
connected to a suitable ground point.
3. Remove the 7 screws fixing the IP Office control unit
cover and slide the cover off the unit.
4. Locate the position for the card and its jumper block.
5. Using the card as a template locate the two holes in the
control unit circuit board. Insert the stand off pillars
into these holes.
6. Using minimal force and checking that the pins are

correctly located, push the card onto the jumper block
and stand off pillars.
7. If other cards are being fitted, proceed to Fitting Trunk
Cards.
8. Slide the control unit cover back on and replace the
cover screws.
9. Reapply power to the control unit and check that it
restarts correctly.
10.Using the IP Office Monitor application, confirm that
the correct number of modem channels are now
reported. They are shown by the value MDM= when
Monitor first connects to the control unit.
IP Office
Page 105
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
6.9 Fitting Trunk Cards

All trunk cards are supplied with 2 plastic snap-in stand off pillars and a blanking plate appropriate to the cards ports.
E1R2 coaxial trunk cards include additional grounding strap, screws and bolts.
Warnings
1. o Trunk Card or Cards
IP400 Trunk Cards
IP406 V2
IP412

Quad BRI Trunk Card
WAN Port Card
Tools Required
IP Office
Page 106
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Fitting Trunk Cards

Procedure: Fitting Trunk Cards
1. Check that correct card has been supplied. Dual PRI
cards are only supported in Slot A of the IP406 V2
control unit or both slots on an IP412 control unit.
2. Ensure that you are wearing a ground wrist strap
3. Remove the 7 screws fixing the IP Office control unit
cover and slide the cover off the unit.
4. Remove the 2 screws fixing the slot blanking plate.
5. Attach the replacement blanking plate.
6. Using the card as a template locate the two holes in the
control unit circuit board. Insert the stand off pillars
into these holes.
Except where otherwise indicated, it is recommended
that Slot B is used first.
The IP406 V2 only supports dual PRI cards in Slot A.
7. Using minimal force and checking that the pins are
correctly located, push the card onto the jumper block
and stand off pillars.
8. Coaxial E1R2 Trunk Cards Only:
For these trunk cards care must be taken to ground the
connectors. See the following section for details. This
must be completed before proceeding any further.
9. Reapply power to the control unit and check that it
restarts correctly.
10.Using Manager, receive the IP Office configuration and
check that the lines are now shown.
11.If Modem and VCM cards were also fitted whilst the
control unit was open, use Monitor to check that the
VCOMP and MDM values match the cards fitted.
12.Proceed to Adding Expansion Modules.
IP Office
Page 107
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Grounding E1R2 Coaxial Connections

E1R2 coaxial trunk cards must be grounded correctly and require the IP Office control unit to be connected to a
protective ground.
Normally the ends of one connection is grounded. For example, if the exchange Tx1 is grounded, the IP Office Rx1 should
also be grounded. However this must be confirmed with the line provider to establish which ends they want grounded.
Procedure
1. Use the two jumpers supplied with the card, match the ground
selection of the line provider. For example, if the line provider
wants the IP Office Rx1 grounded, place a jumper across the
two Rx1 pins of jumper block J6.
2. Connect the ground strap spade end (B) to the spade
connection on the board.
3. Connect the other end of the ground strap (C) to the blanking
plate using the long securing screw supplied with the card.
4. Ensure that the coaxial connector ports are locked to the
blanking plate using the nuts provided.
5. Continue with trunk card installation as in Stage 9a.
IP Office
Page 108
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Fitting Trunk Cards
6.10 Rack Mounting

All IP Office control units and expansion modules except the Small Office Edition can be rack mounted. To do this
requires a separate rack mounting kit for each unit and module.
In addition to the existing environmental requirements for an IP Office system, the following additional factors must be
considered when rack mounting a unit:
1. Rack Positioning
Ensure compliance with the rack manufacturers safety instructions. For example check that the rack legs have been
lowered and fixing brackets have been used to stop toppling.
2. Elevated Operating Ambient
If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be
greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment
compatible with the maximum ambient temperature (Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
3. Reduced Air Flow
Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the
equipment is not compromised. Proper ventilation must be maintained. The side ventilation slots on the IP500 control
unit should not be covered or blocked.
4. Mechanical Loading
Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven
mechanical loading.
5. Circuit Overloading
Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading
of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. Appropriate consideration of equipment
nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern.
6. Reliable Earthing
Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention should be given to supply
connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power strips).
Rack Mounting Kit (SAP 700210800)
This kit contains all the components required for the rack mounting of a single control
unit or expansion module. This includes screws for fixing of the brackets to the module
and bolts for securing the module in the rack.
Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit (SAP 700293905)
Barrier boxes must be used for out-of-building analog phone extensions. This bracket
allows up to 8 IP Office barrier boxes to be rack mounted and simplifies the number of
connections to the protective ground point in the rack.
Must be used when more than 3 Barrier Boxes are in use.
A maximum of 16 Barrier Boxes are supported on any module.
IP Office
Page 109
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Procedure: Rack Mounting

1. Using the small screws (2), fix the main brackets (6) to the module.
2. Using the nut (5), bolt (3) and washer (4) provided, loosely fit the module into the rack system in its intended position.
3. If required, add the cable guide brackets (7) before finally tightening the nuts and bolts.
4. If required, connect the module ground points to the rack ground point. This should be done using 14AWG solid wire
with either a green sleeve (functional ground) or green and yellow sleeve (protective ground).
5. Continue installation and setup as normal.
IP Office
Page 110
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Rack Mounting
6.11 Adding Expansion Modules

External expansion modules, except the WAN3, connect to the IP Office control unit
using a blue 1 meter (3'3'') expansion interconnect cable.
Note
Expansion modules are only detected by the IP Office control unit, if the Expansion
modules are powered up and running before the control unit is started. The
control unit power on process includes a delay to ensure that if all modules in a
system are started at the same time, the expansion modules should complete
their power up before the control unit.
Each module is supplied with an expansion connect cable and a power supply unit. An appropriate locale specific power
cord for the power supply unit, and cables for the ports on the front of the module must be ordered separately.
Warnings
No cable other than an Expansion Interconnect cable should be used. Use of any alternate cable will lead to system
failure.
1. o Installation space either on or under the existing IP Office control unit.
3. o Free EXPANSION port on the rear of the control unit.
4. o Grounding Requirements
4.1.o Functional Grounding
Connection of a functional ground is:
o Recommend for all modules.
o Connection of a functional ground is mandatory for Analog Trunk module.
4.2.o Protective Grounding
Connections of a protective ground via surge protection equipment is:
o Mandatory for Analog trunk modules in the Republic of South Africa.
o Mandatory for Digital Station and Phone modules connected to out of building extensions.
o Mandatory for Digital Station V2 and Phone V2 modules.
Tools Required
1. o Manager PC.
2. o Tools for rack mounting (optional).
IP Office
Page 111
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

1. o External Expansion Module.
Each module is supplied with a suitable external power supply unit and a RJ45-RJ45 expansion interconnect cable.
2. o Power cord for the power supply unit.
3. o Rack mounting kit (optional).
4. o Cable labelling tags.
Procedure
1. Switch off power to the IP Office control unit.
2. Attach the external expansion module's power supply.
3. Connect the blue expansion interconnect cable from the module's EXPANSION port to the first free EXPANSION port on
the control unit.
4. Make careful note of the port used and include this detail on the cable label and any other system records.
5. Switch on power to the module. Wait for the center LED on the front of the module to change from red to green.
7. Once the control unit has rebooted, using Manager receive the system configuration.
8. Click on
Unit in the left-hand panel.
9. Check that the list of units shown in the right-hand panel is correct.
10.Proceed to Adding a WAN3 Module.
IP Office
Page 112
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Adding Expansion Modules
6.12 Adding a WAN3 Module

WAN3 expansion modules connect to the IP Office control unit
using a LAN cable. It is preferred that the cable is connected
directly to the IP Office control unit rather than via any other
equipment. A green 1 meter (3'3'') LAN interconnect cable is
supplied with the module for this purpose though a replacement
cross-over cable is required if connecting to an IP412 control
unit.
The WAN3 module requires its own IP address on the same
subnet as the IP Office control unit. A WAN3 module obtains
that address using DHCP so a DHCP server is required for
installation.
This module is supplied with a LAN interconnect cable and a power supply unit. An appropriate locale specific power cord
for the power supply unit, and cables for the WAN ports on the rear of the module must be ordered separately.
3. o System password.
4. o Free LAN port on the front of the control unit.
5.1.o Functional Ground - Connection of a functional ground is recommend for all modules.
Tools Required
1. o Manager PC.
2. o DHCP server (preferably the IP Office itself).
1. o WAN3 10/100 Module
Each module is supplied with a suitable external power supply unit and a RJ45-RJ45 LAN interconnect cable.
2. o For the IP412 control unit an RJ45-RJ45 LAN crossover cable is required.
3. o WAN Cables.
A V.24, V.35 or X.21 WAN cable is required for connection to each WAN port. The cable used determines the signalling
provided by that port.
6. o Cable labeling tags.
IP Office
Page 113
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Procedure: Adding a WAN3 Module

2. Connect the WAN3 module to the control unit using the LAN cable.
3. Switch on power to the WAN3 10/100 module.

4. Switch on power to the IP Office Control Unit.
5. Using Manager receive the configuration from the IP Office system.
6. Select
Control Unit. If the WAN3 10/100 module is not listed, right-click and select New. A Select WAN unit
window appears which will allows the network to be scanned for the WAN3 unit.
7. When the unit is located, select it and then OK.
8. Send the configuration back to the IP Office system.
IP Office
Page 114
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Adding a WAN3 Module
6.13 Grounding
and data networks.
WARNING
or
symbol. Ground

Tools Required
1. o M4 Cross-Head Screwdriver.
2. o Tools suitable for crimping a cable spade.
protective ground.
IP Office
Page 115
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Procedure
The ground point on IP Office control units and expansion modules are marked with a
or
symbol. Ground
IP400 Control Units

On IP406 V2 and IP412 control units, the ground point is a 4mm screw located adjacent to trunk card Slot B.
On some older units, the dedicated ground point screw is not present. In those cases, the left-hand 3mm fixing screw
on the Slot B blanking plate can be used as an alternate ground connection point. A toothed washer should be added to
ensure good contact.
Expansion Modules
On expansion modules, the ground point is a 4mm screw located towards the right on the rear of the module.
On some older modules, the dedicated ground point screw is not present. In those cases, the top-center cover fixing
screw (3mm) can be used as an alternative ground connection point. A toothed washer should be added to ensure
good contact.
IP Office
Page 116
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Grounding

those .bin file into the control unit and module within the IP Office system.
WARNINGS
WAN3 10/100 Modules
Upgrade each WAN3 10/100 module separately and only after having upgraded the control unit and any other
expansion modules.
Due to the need to adjust internal memory allocation and configuration storage, for certain upgrades some control
units need to perform a multi-stage upgrade process. The table below indicates the required upgrade paths.
Control Unit
.bin File
Unvalidated Only
Validated
IP406 V2
ip406u.bin
2.1 > 3.0 > 3.0(999) > 3.1 > 3.1(999) > 3.2 > 4.2.
IP412
ip412.bin
1.3 > 2.1
2.1 > 3.0 > 3.1 > 3.2 > 4.2.
Multiple Managers
Tools Required
1. o Manager PC - The Upgrade Wizard tool is part of the Manager application.
IP Office
Page 117
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

and the IP Office.
Right-click on the upgrade wizard and click Select Directory.
Upgrading an IP406 V2 to level 3.1 or higher:
Upgrading an IP406 V2 to level 3.2 or higher:
available the check box may have already been automatically ticked. If doing a multistage upgrade, only the control
unit is selectable for the first stage.
For systems including WAN3 modules, untick the WAN3 modules. Each WAN3 module should be upgraded separately
once the control unit and modules in the same system have been upgraded.
10.Select Upgrade.
15.Repeat the process as required. For example if doing a multi-stage control unit upgrade or if there are WAN3 modules
in the system that are being upgraded separately.
16.Proceed to Configuring Security Settings.
IP Office
Page 118
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Upgrading the Core Software
IP Office
Page 119
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

Currently the system is defaulted, including the security passwords controlling access to the system's security and
configuration settings.
You should read and understand the Security Settings section of the IP Office Manager documentation. That section
details the settings and operation of the IP Office security settings and is part of the Manager applications help file.
Objective - Make the control unit configuration settings secure from unauthorized changes by changing the default
passwords.
Procedure
name used is the control unit's MAC address.
7. Select
9. Select
Status Application.
12.Select
used for access to the configuration settings on the IP Office control unit.
Click Change and set a new password. The default password matches the name. Click OK.
15.Click OK.
IP Office
Page 120
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Configuring Security Settings
6.16 Receiving a Configuration (3.2+)

Objective - Receive a configuration from an IP Office running IP Office 3.2 or higher software.
The defaults for full configuration access are Administrator and Administrator. However these should have been
changed as part of the installation process, see 16. Configuring Security Settings.

2. Click
default name used is the control units MAC address.
Administrator.

System
Name
System Password
password
255.255.255.255
LAN1
LAN1
LAN2/WAN
IP address
192.168.42.1.
192.168.43.1
IP Mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
DHCP Mode
Server
Server
200.
200.

Hunt Group
RAS user DialIn.
IP Office
Page 121
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
6.17 Running System Status Application

Procedure
3. Click Logon.
IP Office
Page 122
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Basic Installation: Running System Status Application
IP Office
Page 123
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 7.
IP500 Basic Installation
IP Office
Page 125
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

7.1 Tools Required
The following is a general summary of the tools required. Additional tools and equipment will be
required for wall and or rack mounting and to fashion ground cable connections suitable to local
requirements.
Tools Required.
1. o 5mm Flat-blade screwdriver.
2. o Crosshead screwdriver.
4. o PC with IP Office Admin suite (Manager and System Status application) and RJ45 Ethernet
LAN port.
5. o RJ45-RJ45 Ethernet LAN Cable.
6. o Tools and materials suitable for ground cabling.
IP Office
Page 126
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: Tools Required
7.2 Read the Documentation

Ensure that you have read this manual in full before starting installation. Also include the
installation documentation for any other equipment and applications being installed as part
of the IP Office system.
IP Office Technical Bulletins

Ensure that you have obtained and read the IP Office Technical Bulletin relating to the IP Office software release which
you intend to install on the IP500 Office. This bulletin will contain important information that may not have been
included in this manual. IP Office Technical Bulletins are available from the web sites listed below.
Other IP Office Installation Manuals

The following components of IP Office are outside the range of a basic IP Office installation. They are covered by separate
installation and configuration documentation. If those components are to be part of the IP Office system installation, that
documentation should be obtained, read and understood prior to the installation.
4600/5600 Series IP Phone Installation.
Compact Contact Center (CCC) Installation.
Embedded Voicemail Installation.
Contact Store Installation.
Voicemail Lite Installation.
Compact DECT Installation.
Voicemail Pro Installation.
IP DECT Installation.
Delta Server (SMDR) Installation.
3600 Series Wireless IP Installation.
Compact Business Center (CBC) Installation.
Phone Manager Installation Manual.

SoftConsole Installation Manual.
Conference Center Installation Manual.
Information Web Sites

IP Office documentation is available from the following web sites.
Avaya Support - http://support.avaya.com
Contains documentation and other support materials for Avaya products including IP Office. Copies of the IP Office CD
images are available from this site and updated core software .bin files.
Avaya IP Office Knowledge Base - http://marketingtools.avaya.com/knowledgebase
Access to an on-line regularly updated version of the IP Office Knowledge Base. Currently this link is only available to
Avaya Business Partners while running an ARA account (Avaya Remote Access) connection.
IP Office
Page 127
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
7.3 Unpacking
Use the following procedure when unpacking any equipment supplied by
Avaya or an Avaya reseller or distributor.
Objective - To check that the correct equipment has been supplied and
that no damage has occurred during transit.
Procedure
4. o Ensure that Anti-Static Protection Measures are Observed.
circuit boards.
Ensure that you read and retain any documentation included with the equipment.
IP Office
Page 128
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: Unpacking
7.4 IP500 Card Installation

At this stage fit all the internal IP500 cards before powering up the IP500
Office control unit. These processes should be performed with no power to the
control unit and following full anti-static precautions.
1. Fitting IP500 Trunk Daughter Cards.
2. Fitting IP400 Legacy Cards.
3. Installing IP500 Cards.
Warnings
General Notes
1. Cards can be fitted in any order into any available slots.
2. It is recommended that cards are fitted from left to right.
3. There are restrictions to the number of supported cards of some types. When such a limit is exceed, the right-most
card of that type will not function.
4. Ensure that you use the labels supplied to identify the card fitted into the control unit.
IP Office
Page 129
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
1. IP500 Trunk Daughter Card Installation

IP500 trunk daughter cards can be fitted to any IP500 base card except the IP500 Legacy Card Carrier.
Objective - To fit a IP500 trunk card to an IP500 base card.
Warnings
1. Correct anti-static protection steps should be taken before handling
circuit boards.
2. During this process power to the IP Office control unit must be
switched off and disconnected.
1. o Any IP500 base card except the IP500 Legacy Card Carrier base
card.
2. o IP500 Trunk Card
3. o 5 Stand Off Pillars
These are supplied with the trunk daughter card.
With the release of the IP500 PRI-U trunk daughter card, the
design of stand off pillars supplied with all types of trunk daughter
card has changed. The original 5 plastic pillars have been replaced
by 2 metal pillars and 3 plastic pillars. The metals pillars are prefitted to the trunk daughter cards in their intended position and two
screws and washers are supplied for final attachment to the base
card.
Tools Required.
Procedure: Installing an IP500 Trunk Daughter Card
1. Check that correct cards have been supplied.
2. Ensure that you are wearing an anti-static wrist strap connected to a
suitable ground point.
3. On the base card identify the position of 3 holes for the plastic pillars
for the IP500 card. These are along the same edge as the card
connector.
4. Fit the stand off pillars to the IP500 base card.
5. If there is a clip-on metal shield over the connector block on the base
card, remove it.
6. Using minimal force and checking that the pins are correctly located,
push the IP500 trunk card onto its connector block and the stand off
pillars.
7. Check that the card connector has snapped into position.
8. Using the washers and screws provided, secure the metal stand off
pillars to the base card.
9. A set of labels are supplied with the trunk daughter card. Fit the
appropriate label to the front of the base card.
10.Prepare any other IP500 cards. Then proceed to Inserting an IP500
Card
IP Office
Page 130
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: IP500 Card Installation
2. IP400 Legacy Card Installation

An IP500 Legacy Carrier card can be used to fit IP400 trunk or VCM cards into an IP500 control unit. Up to 2 IP500
carrier cards can be inserted.
PRI T1
BRI-8 (UNI)
Dual PRI T1
PRI 30 E1 (1.4)
VCM 4
Dual PRI E1
VCM 8
PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45
VCM 16
Dual PRI E1R2 RJ45
VCM 24
Objective - To fit a IP400 card to an IP500 Legacy Card

Carrier.
Warnings
1. Correct anti-static protection steps should be taken before
handling circuit boards.
2. During this process power to the IP Office control unit must be
switched off and disconnected.
VCM 30
1. o IP500 Carrier Card.
2. o IP400 Card
The table opposite lists supported cards. Any card not listed is
not supported. Cards are supplied with 2 plastic stand off
pillars. Trunk cards are also supplied with a replacement
blanking plate which are not required with the IP500.
Tools Required
Procedure: Installing a Carrier Card
1. Check that correct cards have been supplied.
2. Ensure that you are wearing an anti-static wrist strap
3. On the carrier card identify the position of the jumper block
and stand off pillar holes for the IP400 card. The peg holes
are labeled as VCM or TRUNK.
4. If fitting an IP400 trunk card, identify which of the plastic
snap-off panels on the front of the carrier card need to be
removed to allow the trunk cable connections. Carefully
remove those panels.
5. Fit the stand off pillars to the IP500 carrier card.

6. Using minimal force and checking that the pins are correctly
located, push the IP400 card onto its jumper and the stand off
pillars.
IP Office
Page 131
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
D3. IP500 Card Installation

Having prepared each IP500 card by adding any IP400 cards or IP500 trunk daughter cards required, the base cards can
be inserted into the control unit.
Objective - To fit a IP500 base card into the IP500 control unit.
Warnings
Tools Required.
Procedure: Installing a Carrier Card
1. Switch off power to the IP500 control unit.
2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove the cover from the slot on the front of the control unit that will be used for
each card being installed. This cover is no longer required but should be retained until installation has been completed.
3. Allowing the card to rest against the bottom of the slot, begin sliding it into the control unit. When half inserted, check
that the card rails have engaged with the slot edges by trying to gently rotate it. I the card does rotate remove it and
begin inserting it again.
4. The card should slide in freely until almost fully inserted. At this point apply pressure at the base of the front of the
card to complete insertion.
5. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver secure the carrier card.
6. Reapply power to the control unit. Initially each card should show a red LED (two if a daughter card is fitted) as the
control unit restarts. After approximately 30 seconds these should change to flashing red as the card is started. These
should then change to flashing every 5 seconds if the cards have started correctly.
7. Run the IP Office System Status Application and verify that the cards have all been recognized.
8. IP Office Manager can now be used to configure the extensions and trunk lines. For any IP500 VCM base cards, VCM
Channel licenses must be added to the configuration to enable channels above the base 4.
IP Office
Page 132
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: IP500 Card Installation
7.5 Inserting the Feature Key

The IP500 uses a smart card feature key dongle. In addition to feature licensing the IP500
control unit uses this feature key dongle to determine various systems defaults such as A-Law or
Mu-Law operation, default short codes and trunk settings.
Warnings
1. The feature key is required for all IP500 control units and must be present when the system is
started and during operation. This applies even if the IP500 is not using any licensed features.
2. The feature key slot cover must remain present to protect the card and the card reader from
damage.
Parts Required
IP500 Feature Key
The correct key will depend on the locale. The listing below is typical and may not apply in all cases. Ensure that the
serial number of the key, shown on the card, is recorded.
o Mu-Law: Used in North America and Korea.
o A-Law: Used in all other locales.
Tools Required:
Procedure
1. Locate the feature key slot on the rear of the IP500 control unit. The slot is adjacent to the power input socket and is
protected by a metal cover.
2. Undo the screws on the cover until it can be rotated clear of the feature key card slot.
3. Insert the feature key. The card should be face up and inserted in the direction of the arrow on the card.
4. Rotate the slot cover back into position and tighten the screws.
IP Office
Page 133
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
7.6 Applying Power

This procedure starts a new IP Office control unit not connected to any LAN. In
this scenario the IP Office control unit will assume its default configuration
settings.
Objective - To power up the IP Office control unit to a known state with a
known set of defaults.
Warnings
1. When powering up the control unit for the first time do not connect the LAN or
WAN ports of the control unit to any network.
2. The power cord must be connected directly from the control unit to the switched
power outlet socket. The cord must not be fixed in anyway or routed through
any permanent structure.

Procedure
1. Connect the power cord from the power supply outlet to the power input socket on the rear of the control unit.
3. New IP Office 500 control units are supplied with a base software level of 4.0.0. The CPU LED on these units will flash
red until the unit is upgraded to the required level of released IP Office core software.
4. The CPU LED on units that have already been upgraded from 4.0.0 will go through a green red cycle several times and
then stay green on. During this time other LED's may flash as the unit goes through its power on self test cycle.

System
Name
System Password
password
255.255.255.255
LAN*
LAN1
LAN2/WAN
IP address
192.168.42.1.
192.168.43.1
IP Mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
DHCP Mode
Server
Server
200.
200.

Hunt Group
RAS user DialIn.
IP Office
Page 134
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: Applying Power

Default Short Codes
settings:
IP Office
Page 135
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

Objective - To install the applications necessary for the installation and maintenance of an IP
Office system.

o Feature Key Server - Not required.
The Feature Key Server should only be installed if the PC will host the parallel port or USB port Feature Key dongle for
the IP Office system.
o Manager - Install
Only install this application if no other voicemail system, for example Voicemail Pro or embedded voicemail, is being
installedVoicemail Mail Lite - Optional. Note also that IP Office Lite is not supported by IP500 systems running in IP
Office Standard Edition mode.
This application is used with IP Office 4.0 systems to show equipment and resource within the system, alarms and calls
in progress.
o Previous System Monitor - Not required.
This application is only required for supporting IP400 systems running pre-IP Office 4.0 software. It is not required for
IP500 control units.
o Call Status - Not required.
Parts Required
1.o IP Office Administrator Applications CD.
2.o Windows PC
Requirement
Minimum
Processor
600MHz Pentium or AMD Opteron, AMD Athlon64, 800MHz Pentium or AMD Opteron, AMD
AMD Athlon XP.
RAM
128MB
256MB
HD Space
1GB - 800MB for .NET2, 200MB for Manager.
1.4GB - 800MB for .NET2, 600MB for the full

IP Office Admin suite.
Display
800 x 600 - 256 Colors
Operating
System
Windows XP Professional with SP2. Windows 2000 Server with SP4. Windows 2003 Server.
Windows 2003 SBS. Note: 64-bit versions of the operating systems above are not supported.
IP Office
Recommended
Page 136
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: Installing the Admin Applications

Programs.
7. Click Install.
Net.
IP Office
Page 137
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
7.8 Connecting the Manager PC (IP500)

At this stage we will directly connect the Manager PC to the new IP Office
control unit. For this the PC will need to be set to a fixed IP address in the
same subnet range as the IP Office control unit's default address
(192.168.42.1/255.255.255.0).
Objective - Physically connecting the Manager PC and the IP Office without
needing to adjust or configure any intervening equipment.
1. o Manager PC.
2. o LAN Cable.
o IP Office Small Office Edition, IP406 V2 and IP500 control units: A
standard RJ45-RJ45 LAN cable can be used.
o IP412 Control Unit: A RJ45-RJ45 cross-over LAN cable is required.

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
5. In the command window that appears enter ping 192.168.42.1. The results should show a number of ping replies
from the IP Office. This confirms basic communication between the Manager PC and the IP Office.
6. If there are no ping replies enter ipconfig. The results should list the IP address settings of the Manager PC as
required above and with no mention of DHCP being used. Enter exit.
IP Office
Page 138
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: Connecting the Manager PC (IP500)
7.9 Start Manager

At this stage we will simple check that Manager is able to run and to see the
connected IP Office control unit.

2. If the PC has firewall software installed, you should be prompted as to whether you want to allow this program to
access the network. Select Yes or OK.
3. Click
Administrator.
IP Office
Page 139
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

New IP500 control units are supplied with a basic level of software (4.0.0). That
software is sufficient to allow LAN network connect to the control unit in order to
then upgrade it to the level of IP Office software required.
Objective - Upgrade the control unit to IP Office 4.0 software.
Tools Required
WARNINGS
Multiple Managers
and the IP Office.
4. The UpgradeWiz is started and scans for IP Office unit using the Unit/Broadcast address. Adjust this address and click
Refresh if the expected modules are not shown.
5. For each the unit found, the UpgradeWiz displays the module type, its current version of software installed in the unit
and the software version of the .bin file that Manager has available.
available the check box may have already been automatically ticked.
8. Select Upgrade.
9. The system password will be requested. Enter it and click OK.
10.The bin files required are transferred to the system and stored in temporary memory.
11.Once all the files have been transferred, the upgrade wizard will prompt whether it okay to proceed with the upgrade
12.Each module being upgraded will delete its existing core software, restart and load the new software file that was
transferred. This process may take several minutes for each unit. Do not cancel or close the upgrade wizard while this
process is running.
IP Office
Page 140
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: Upgrading the Core Software
7.11 Check the CPU LED

During normal operation, the CPU LED on the rear of the IP500 control unit
should be green.
Note
New IP Office 500 control units are supplied with a base software level of
4.0.0. The CPU LED on these units will flash red until the unit is upgraded to
the required level of released IP Office core software.
Normal Power On Sequence

When power to the control unit is switched on, the normal sequence for the
CPU LED is as follows.
1. Steady Red for 3 seconds
2. Off for 10 seconds
3. Flashing alternate red/green for 4 seconds
4. Steady Green
The LED should be steady green following successful start up. Note that the
IP500 cards on the front of the control unit may still be going through their
own start up process.
Flashing RED
A flashing red CPU LED at this stage indicates an error. The most likely
cause is a missing Feature Key card.
IP Office
Page 141
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
7.12 Check the Card LEDs

On all IP500 base cards, LED 1 is used to indicate general status. Okay status is
indicated by a flash every 5 seconds.
When a trunk daughter card is fitted, LED is used to indicate the general status of
that card. Okay status is indicated by a flash every 5 seconds.
IP500 Analog Phone Base Card

Analog Extension Ports (1-8)
LED1 only is used.
LED1 is used for card status:
Red On - Error
Red Flashing - Initializing.
Red Flash every 5 seconds - Okay.
IP500 Digital Station Base Card

Digital Station Ports (1-8)
Green On - Phone detected.
Red On - Error
IP500 VCM Base Card

LEDs 1 to 8 are unlabelled. They are used to indicate voice compression channel usage. Each LED lit represents 12.5%
of the available voice compression channel capacity in use (total card capacity rather than licensed capacity).
LED1 is used for general card status. Flash every 5 seconds = Okay.

Daughter Card Ports (9-12)
The LED's for ports 9 and 10 are used as follows:
Off: No trunk present/Analog - Idle.
Green on: BRI/PRO trunk present.
Green flashing: Trunk in use.
Red/Green Fast Flash (port 9) or Green Fast Flash (port 10):
Alarm indication signal (AIS) from the PRI trunk remote end.
Red with Green Blink (port 9) or Green Blink (port 1):
PRI Port in loopback mode (set through IP Office System Monitor).
LED 9 is also used for daughter card status. Flash every 5 seconds = Okay.
IP Office
Page 142
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: Check the Card LEDs
7.13 Receiving the Configuration

Objective - Receive a configuration from an IP Office running IP Office 3.2 or higher
software.
The defaults for full configuration access are Administrator and Administrator. However
these should have been changed as part of the installation process, see Configuring
Security Settings.

2. Click
Administrator.

System
Name
System Password
password
255.255.255.255
LAN1
LAN1
LAN2/WAN
IP address
192.168.42.1.
192.168.43.1
IP Mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
DHCP Mode
Server
Server
200.
200.

Hunt Group
RAS user DialIn.
IP Office
Page 143
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
7.14 Adding Licences

32-Character license keys strings are used to activate various IP Office features. These keys are
uniquely based on the feature being activated and the serial number of the Feature Key dongle
installed with the IP Office system.
The IP500 uses licenses in the same way as other IP Office systems. However there are some
licenses that are specific to the IP500 Office control unit and may be required during installation to
ensure the systems correct operation.
IP Office Upgrade Standard to Professional
By default the IP500 runs in IP Office Standard Edition mode. For full IP Office operation an IP
Office Upgrade Standard to Professional license must be added to the configuration.
IP500 Voice Networking
If IP trunks are required for voice networking between the IP Office and other systems, IP500
Standard Networking licenses are required. This type of license is available as a base license for
the first 4 channels and then additional licenses for any additional channels required.
VCM Channels
Each IP500 VCM base card only support 4 voice compression channels unlicensed. Any additional
channels available on the card must be licensed by adding IP500 VCM Channels licenses
Licenses can be added individually to the IP Office's configuration. However the licence key file provided by Avaya from
their license ordering web site generates a License.csv file containing all the ordered licenses. That file can be imported
into the configuration.
1. o License Keys Documentation
Ensure that the Feature Key dongle serial number used to generate the license keys matches that of the Feature Key
dongle installed and that all the licenses required have been included.
Importing a License.csv File
1. Copy the License.csv file to the Manager PC.
2. Start Manager and receive the IP Office system's configuration.
3. Select File | Import/Export | Import... .
4. Click the button next to Look In and browse to and select the folder containing the license file.
5. The file should be listed as Available along with an indication of the number of licenses it contains. Select the check box
next to the file name and then clock OK.
6. Click on
to send the configuration back to the IP Office.
7. Use Manager to receive the configuration again and check that the status of the licenses. They should now be Valid.
Manually Adding Licenses

Use this process to individually copy and paste license keys into the configuration. Cutting and pasting removes any
errors that may be caused by the incorrect typing of any license key.
2. Select
License.
3. To add a license, click
and select License. Enter the new license and click OK.
4. The Status of the new license should show Unknown and name the license as expected. If its Status is Unknown
and name Invalid, the most likely cause is incorrect entry of the license key characters.
5. Repeat the process for any other licences
6. Click on
to send the configuration back to the IP Office.
7. Use Manager to receive the configuration again and check that the status of the licenses. They should now be Valid.
IP Office
Page 144
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: Adding Licences
7.15 Adding External Expansion Modules

External expansion modules connect to the IP Office control unit using a blue 1
meter (3'3'') expansion interconnect cable supplied with the modules.
Objective - Connect the external expansion modules and then restart the
control unit so that the new modules are recognized.
Each module is supplied with an expansion connect cable and a power supply unit. An appropriate locale specific power
cord for the power supply unit, and cables for the ports on the front of the module must be ordered separately.
Warnings
1. No cable other than an Expansion Interconnect cable should be used. Use of any alternate cable will lead to system
failure.
2. External expansion modules are not supported by an IP500 control unit running in Express Edition mode.
3. o Free EXPANSION port on the rear of the control unit.
4. o The control unit must have a valid IP500 Upgrade Standard to Professional license.
5.1.o Functional Grounding
Connection of a functional ground is:
o Recommend for all modules.
o Connection of a functional ground is mandatory for Analog Trunk module.
5.2.o Protective Grounding
Connections of a protective ground via surge protection equipment is:
o Mandatory for Analog trunk modules in the Republic of South Africa.
o Mandatory for Digital Station and Phone modules connected to out of building extensions.
o Mandatory for Digital Station V2 and Phone V2 modules.
Tools Required
1. o Manager PC.
IP Office
Page 145
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

1. o External Expansion Module.
Each module is supplied with a suitable external power supply unit and a RJ45-RJ45 expansion interconnect cable.
4. o Cable labelling tags.
Procedure
2. Attach the external expansion module's power supply.
3. Connect the blue expansion interconnect cable from the module's EXPANSION port to the first free EXPANSION port on
the control unit.
4. Make careful note of the port used and include this detail on the cable label and any other system records.
5. Switch on power to the module. Wait for the center LED on the front of the module to change from red to green.
7. Once the control unit has rebooted, using Manager receive the system configuration.
8. Click on
Unit in the left-hand panel.
9. Check that the list of units shown in the right-hand panel is correct.
10.The external expansion modules should be upgraded to the same level of software as the control unit. Do this by
repeating the IP Office upgrade process (see K. Upgrading the Core Software).
IP Office
Page 146
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: Adding External Expansion Modules

Currently the system is defaulted, including the security passwords controlling access to the system's
security and configuration settings.
You should read and understand the Security Settings section of the IP Office Manager documentation.
That section details the settings and operation of the IP Office security settings and is part of the Manager
applications help file.
Objective - Make the control unit configuration settings secure from unauthorized changes by changing
the default passwords.
Procedure
default name used is the control unit's MAC address.
7. Select
9. Select
Status Application.
12.Select
used for access to the configuration settings on the IP Office control unit. Click Change and set a new password. The
default password matches the name. Click OK.
15.Click OK.
IP Office
Page 147
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
7.17 Rack Mounting

The IP500 control unit and IP500 external expansion units can be
rack mounted if required into 19-inch rack systems. This requires
an IP500 Rack Mounting Kit (SAP 700429202) for each unit.
The kit includes:
A rack mounting bracket and screws for attachment of the
bracket to the unit
Nuts and bolts for rack attachment.
Brackets and cable ties for cable tidying.
As indicated in the diagram following, the rack mounting bracket

can be used in several positions on the unit. IP400 external
expansion units used in an IP500 system can also be rack mounted
but use a separate IP400 Rack Mounting Kit.
Environmental Requirements
In addition to the existing environmental requirements for an IP Office system, the following additional factors must be
considered when rack mounting a unit:
1. Rack Positioning - Ensure compliance with the rack manufacturers safety instructions. For example check that the rack
legs have been lowered and fixing brackets have been used to stop toppling.
2. Elevated Operating Ambient - If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient temperature of
the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration should be given to installing the
equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature (Tma) specified by the
manufacturer.
o Operating Temperature: 0C (32F) to 40C (104F).
o Operating Humidity: 10% to 95% non-condensing.
3. Reduced Air Flow - Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe
operation of the equipment is not compromised. Proper ventilation must be maintained. The side ventilation slots on
the IP500 control unit should not be covered or blocked.
4. Mechanical Loading - Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved
due to uneven mechanical loading.
5. Circuit Overloading - Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the
effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. Appropriate
consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern.
6. Reliable Earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention should be
given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power strips).
7.
Only the screws (M3 x 6mm) provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit.
IP Office
Page 148
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office
Page 149
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Only the screws (M3 x 6mm) provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control
unit.
IP Office
Page 150
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
7.18 Wall Mounting

The IP500 control unit can be wall mounted. This requires an IP500 Wall
Mounting Kit (SAP 700430150) plus additional 4.5mm fixtures and
fittings suitable for the wall type. The wall mounting kit includes two
brackets, one top and one bottom.
Environmental Requirements
In addition to the existing environmental requirements for an IP Office
system, the following additional requirements apply when wall mounting
a unit:
IP Office
The wall surface must be vertical, flat and vibration free.
A minimum clearance of 500mm (19.7 inches) is required on all

sides.
The unit must be orientated as shown when mounted. That is with

the base card slots facing right when viewed from in front of the unit.
The brackets must be used as shown, with the deeper tray-like

bracket used at the bottom of the wall mounted control unit.
Only the screws (M3 x 6mm) provided with the mounting kit
should used to attach the brackets to the control unit.
Page 151
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
The brackets must be used as shown, with the deeper tray-like bracket used at the bottom of the wall mounted
control unit.
Only the screws (M3 x 6mm) provided with the mounting kit should used to attach the brackets to the control unit.
IP Office
Page 152
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: Wall Mounting
7.19 Grounding
and data networks.
WARNING
or
symbol. Ground

Tools Required
1. o M4 Cross-Head Screwdriver.
2. o Tools suitable for crimping a cable spade.
protective ground.
IP Office
Page 153
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Procedure
The ground point on IP Office control units and expansion modules are marked with a
or
symbol. Ground
IP500 Control Unit

On IP500 control units the ground point is located above the RS232 DTE port.
External Expansion Modules

On expansion modules, the ground point is a 4mm screw located towards the right on the rear of the module.
On some older modules, the dedicated ground point screw is not present. In those cases, the top-center cover fixing
screw (3mm) can be used as an alternative ground connection point. A toothed washer should be added to ensure
good contact.
IP Office
Page 154
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Basic Installation: Grounding
7.20 Running System Status Application

Procedure
3. Click Logon.
IP Office
Page 155
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office
Page 156
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 8.
Phone Installation
IP Office
Page 157
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
8. Phone Installation
This section does not cover the installation of IP and wireless phones. They are covered by the following separate
documentation:
IP Office 3600 Series Installation Manual.
IP Office 4600/5600 IP Phones Installation Manual.
IP Office Compact DECT Installation Manual.
IP DECT Installation Manual.
This section assumes that phones are being connected to IP Office within an existing RJ45 structured cabling system. If
phone connections are being made through older punchdown wiring systems then the installer is expected to be qualified
and approved for that type of installation.
Out of Building Connections

Connection to analog and digital phones not located in the same building as the IP Office is only supported with the
addition of additional protective equipment and additional installation requirements. See Out of Building Telephone
Installations.
IP Office
Page 158
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Phone Installation:
8.1 Installing 2400/5400 Series Phones

Normally, when the IP Office system is restarted and Manager is running, the system will compare the firmware loaded
on 2400/5400 Series phones against those available in the Manager directory and automatically upgrade if necessary.
There may be some rare cases where new firmware files are provided and it is necessary to force the phones to upgrade.
1. o Planning Chart.
This should indicate which extension should connect to which ports on the IP Office system. It should also include
intended extension numbers and user details.

1. o 2400/5400 Series Phone
Each phone includes a handset and handset cord. No line cord is included. A plastic-wedge is provided to change the
phone's angle for wall or desk mounting. In addition for XX10 and XX20 models an adjustable desk stand is included.
2. o Phone connection cable
These phones are not supplied with a line cord. The cable required will depend on the ports provided at each user
position.
2.1.o RJ45-to-RJ11 Cable
This type of cable will be required if an structured cabling system has been used.
2.2.o RJ11-to-RJ11 Cable
This type of cable is required if a traditional RJ11 phone socket has been provided at the user position.
3. o IP Office connection cable
Typically an RJ45-to-RJ45 cable is required for connection from the structured cabling system patch panel to the IP
Office control unit or expansion unit DS port.
4. o Wall Fixings
The phone base is designed to fit directly onto a standard US telephone jack wall plate. Outside the US, two M3 panhead screws are required, positioned 79mm apart vertically around the phones centerline.
Tools Required
1. o Manager PC
During installation each 2400/5400 series phone requests software from Manager and then loads that software before
becoming operational.
2. o Desk Mounting
No additional tools required.
3. o Wall Mounting
If not using a US telephone jack wall plate; drills, screw-drivers and measures for the installation of M3 pan-head
screws and wall fixings.
IP Office
Page 159
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Procedure: Desk Mounting

1. At the IP Office end, check that each DS port is connected to the appropriate port in the structured cabling system
patch panel.
2. Start Manager. During installation each 2400/5400 series phone requests software from Manager and then loads that
software before becoming operational.
3. Unpack the phone.
4. The phones are supplied with the plastic mounting wedge in the wall mounting position as this allows a smaller box
size.
5. Slide off the plastic wedge and reattach it in the opposite position so that the phone is now angled for use on a desk.
6. Connect the handset cord to the handset.
7. Connect the handset cord to the port labeled
HAC. This is normally located on the left-hand side of the phone.
8. Connect the line cord to the port marked with a
symbol.
9. Connect the line cord to the desk socket.

10.The phone should display Upgrading firmware, please wait and then FIRMWARE UPDATE IN PROGRESS. Once this has
completed the should briefly display New Calls: 0 and then the current users name and extension number.
11.For XX10 and XX20 models, assemble the adjustable desk stand. Attach the stand to the base of the phone.
IP Office
Page 160
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Phone Installation: Installing 2400/5400 Series Phones

Procedure: Wall Mounting
1. If a standard US telephone jack wall plate is not being used, prepare the wall fixings for the M3 pan head screws being
used to mount the phone.
2. At the IP Office end, check that each DS port is connected to the appropriate port in the structured cabling system
patch panel.
3. Start Manager. During installation each 2400/5400 series phone requests software from Manager and then loads that
software before becoming operational.
4. Unpack the phone.
5. The phones are supplied with the plastic mounting wedge in the wall mounting position as this allows a smaller box
size.
6. Slide off the plastic wedge and remove the self-taping screw that is taped inside the wedge.
7. Reattach the plastic wedge in its original position. The self-taping screw can be used to lock the plastic wedge in
position.
8. Just below the phones hook-switch is a small plastic square. Remove this and then reinsert it so that a plastic lug
projects out towards the hook-switch. This helps ensure that the handset stays in position when the phone is wall
mounted.
9. Connect the handset cord to the handset.
10.Connect the handset cord to the port labelled
HAC. This is normally located on the left-hand side of the phone.
11.Connect the line cord to the port marked with a
symbol.
12.Connect the line cord to the wall socket.

13.The phone should display Upgrading firmware, please wait and then FIRMWARE UPDATE IN PROGRESS. Once this has
completed the should briefly display New Calls: 0 and then the current users name and extension number.
14.The line cord can be run through the channel in the base of the phone to space at the center. This space can be used
to conceal excess cable.
15.Slide the phone onto the exposed heads of the wall mounting position.
IP Office
Page 161
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Additional Procedures
Procedure: Checking the Firmware on a 2410 or 5410 Phone
1. Press
Exit to ensure that the phone has exited any other usage mode.
2. Press either of the display keys next to MENU.

3. Select OPTION.
4. Select Self Test. The display should now show details of the phone's currently installed firmware.
5. The firmware loaded into the phones has a major and minor version. The Major version in the example above is shown
as FWV=2 and the minor version is shown as REL:2.00.
6. Press
Exit to exit self test mode.
Procedure: Checking the Firmware on a 2420 or 5420 Phone

1. Select OPTION.
2. Select Self Test. The display should now show details of the phone's currently installed firmware.
3. The firmware loaded into the phones has a major and minor version. The Major version in the example above is shown
as FWV=4 and the minor version is shown as REL:4.00.
4. Press
Exit to exit self test mode.
IP Office
Page 162
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Phone Installation: Installing 2400/5400 Series Phones

Procedure: Forcing a Software Upgrade
The following procedure should only be used if it has been determined that the 2400/5400 Series phones need to
be manually forced to change their firmware. During this process the phone cannot be used.
For the IP Office 4.1 Q1 2008 maintenance release and higher, using the batch file to enable the phones to upgrade
their firmware is ignored unless the No User user Source Number of ALLOW_5410_UPGRADES is added to the IP
Office configuration.
1. Locate the Manager program directory and within it the files turn_on.bat and turn_off.bat.
2. Right-click on turn_on.bat and select Edit.
3. Locate the entry <IP Address> and replace this with the IP address of the IP Office system.
4. Close the file and save the changes.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the file turn_off.bat.
6. Ensure that Manager is running. Manager acts as the TFTP server from which the phones will request firmware files.
7. Double-click on the file turn_on.bat.
8. A prompt window should appear asking you to wait and eventually if successful Press any key to continue.
9. Within Manager, select File | Advanced | Reboot and reboot the IP Office system.
10.Following the system restart, the 2400 and 5400 Series phones will display Upgrading firmware, please wait and then
FIRMWARE UPDATE IN PROGRESS.
11.Once all the phones have completed their upgrade, double-click on turn_off.bat.
IP Office
Page 163
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
8.2 Installing an EU24 Add-On

The EU24 add-on is supported on IP Office 3.0 and higher. It provides an additional 24 programmable feature keys for
the associated phone. The action provided by each of these keys is set through the IP Office configuration. The EU24BL is
supported on IP Office 3.1 or higher and provides a backlight function that matches the same facility on the 4621 phone.
A single EU24 or Eu24BL is supported on the following phones. A maximum of eight EU24 and or EU24BL per IP Office
system.
Phone
EU24
EU24BL
2420/5420
4620/5620
4621/5621
4625
Use Only the Cables Supplied

Only the cable supplied with the EU24/EU24BL should for connection to the EU24/EU24BL. This cable should only
be connected to the port marked EU24 on suitable phones. Doing otherwise will cause damage to the EU24/
EU24BL and the equipment to which it is attached.
An 1151 Power Supply Must Be Used

The EU24 and EU24BL require the phone to use an additional 1151 type power supply unit.
Procedure: Installing an EU24/EU24BL
1. Disconnect the existing phone cable from the phone socket to the phone. In the case of IP phones, this will be an
existing CAT5 cable. For other phones this will be either an RJ45-to-RJ11 cable or an RJ11-to-RJ11 cable
depending on the fixed socket type.
2. Reconnect the same cable from the phone socket to the power supply unit's LINE IN socket.
3. Connect the cable supplied with the PSU, from the power supply unit's PHONE socket to the socket marked
the phone.
on
4. Connect the cable supplied with the EU24/EU24BL from the EU24 to the port marked EU24 on the phone.
5. Connect the power supply module to the power outlet socket.
IP Office
Page 164
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Phone Installation: Installing an EU24 Add-On
8.3 BM32 Firmware Upgrade

When the BM32 needs a firmware upgrade, please follow the upgrade procedures described below.
Preparation
Place the new firmware for the BM32 modules onto the file server. The file name will be something like
GBM32_x_x_x_x.hex.
Amend the 1600 phone upgrade batch file to include the new file name. The example below shows the key lines that
need to be added or amended to match the new firmware file.
############################################################################
##
##
## AVAYA 16XX IP TELEPHONE SOFTWARE UPGRADE CONFIGURATION
##
##
##
##
*** July 10, 2008 ***
##
##
##
## This file upgrades the following telephones to the indicated releases: ##
##
##
##
GBM32 - Release 1.0.8
##
############################################################################
IF $MODEL4 SEQ 1616 goto PHONEAPP1616
goto END
############################################################################
##
Check phone application version
##
############################################################################
# PHONEAPP1616
SET BMAPPNAME GBM32_B_1_0_8.hex
goto GETSET
############################################################################
##
Get additional configuration files
##
############################################################################
# GETSET
GET 46xxsettings.txt
# END
Upgrade Procedure
Please follow the following steps to do the upgrade step by step:
1. Remove all BM32 button modules from the 1616 phones.
2. Place the firmware files and amended upgrade batch file onto the file server as detailed above.
3. Connect one BM32 button module to the the 1616 phone using the BM32 cable.
4. When the BM32 button module is booted, it will register to the 1616 phone and then start the download of new
BM32 firmware The download will will take about one minute. After download the BM32 will reboot again. When it
is rebooted successfully it will get into ready mode.
5. Repeat for other BM32 modules.
IP Office
Page 165
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
8.4 Basic Button Programming

Most Avaya phones have programmable button against which IP Office actions can be programmed. Full details of this
are covered by the IP Office Manager help. This section covers only the basic elements of button programming.
Appearance Button Requirements

Appearance Functions
The functions Call Appearance, Bridged Appearance, Coverage and Line Appearance are collectively known
as "appearance functions". The following restrictions must be observed for the correct operation of
phones.
On systems running IP Office 2.1 or 3.0DT software, the first programmable button must be set as a call
appearance button. This requirement is necessary for the correct operation of phone functions such as call
log.
For systems running IP Office 3.0 or higher (excluding 3.0DT), the first 3 programmable buttons must be set
as call appearance buttons. This requirement is necessary for the correct operation of functions such as
transfer, conference and call log.
On phones with only two physical programmable buttons both buttons must be used as call appearance
buttons.
On 1600 Series phones, all the appearance buttons must be programmed as a continuous block with no
gaps between the appearance buttons.
For IP Office 4.2+, T3 phones support Line Appearance button only and are exempt from the above
rules.
IP Office
Page 166
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Phone Installation: Basic Button Programming

Procedure
Using IP Office Manager, if only button programming changes are required, the configuration changes can be merged
back to the IP Office system without requiring a reboot.
1. Using Manager load the current configuration from the IP Office.
2. Select the
User required to display their configuration details.
3. Select Button Programming.
The number of button displayed is based on the phone associated with the user when the configuration was loaded.
This can be overridden by selecting Display All Buttons. This may be necessary for users who switch between
different phones using hot desking or have an expansion unit attached to their phone.
4. For the required button, either select the button and then click Edit or double-click the button.
5. Edit the settings as required. Use the ... button to display the menu for selecting the required button action. Select the
action and set the action data, then click OK.
6. Click OK. Repeat for any other buttons.

7. Click OK.
An alternate method for the above programming is to right-click on the various fields. To do this start with the Action
field, then Action Data and then Label if required.
IP Office
Page 167
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
8.5 Changing Extension Numbers

A new or defaulted IP Office system numbers each extension in sequence, going by module and port order, starting from
201. An extension entry is created in the configuration and also an associated user entry. A similar process occurs when
a new extension expansion module is detected.
Extension versus User

It is important with IP Office to understand that "extension number" is a user property that belongs to and moves with
the user. For example users can use hot desking to login on another phone and calls to that user's extension number
will then go to that phone (the phone temporarily assumes their extension number and settings) until the user log off.
The Base Extension value set against extensions in the IP Office configuration indicate the default associated user of
the extension, it is not the extension number of that port.
Objective - To change a user's or users' extension number.
Procedure 1: Renumbering all extensions and users

The following process allows all user extension numbers to be shift up or down by a set amount. Any settings linked to
those numbers are adjusted including extension Base Extension settings. It does not affect hunt group extension
numbers.
1.
This action alters extension settings and so requires a system reboot when the configuration is sent to the IP
Office.
2. Select Tools | Renumber Extension.
3. Enter the amount by which you want to shift the current extension numbering of extensions and users.
4. Click OK.
5. If the configuration changes are complete, send the configuration back to the IP Office and select appropriate settings
for the reboot.
IP Office
Page 168
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Phone Installation: Changing Extension Numbers

Procedure 2: Changing an Individual User's Extension Number
1. Select
User.
2. Locate and select the relevant user.

3. On the User tab, change the Extension number to the required new number.
4. Click on another field. If an error warning appears it will most likely be due to a conflict with an existing use of that
extension number.
If this an error, click Cancel to return the user to their original extension number.
If this is intended as the other entry will be corrected click OK and then edit the other entry.
When OK is clicked, Manager will automatically propagate the number change to any hunt groups, incoming call
routes, user buttons, bridged appearance buttons and call coverage appearance buttons associated with the user's
original extension number.
5. If the user has an extension with which they are associated by being the extension's Base Extension setting, that
setting is not automatically updated. If the user should still be associated with that extension by default, the extension
must be updated manually to match the user's new extension number.
Select
This part of the process requires an IP Office system reboot as it changes extension port settings.
Extension.
Change the Base Extension number to match the user extension who should now be associated with that physical
port by default.
Click OK. Manager will probably give a validation error message due to a user being associated with two extensions.
This can be ignored until all the user moves have been completed.
6. If changing several users repeat the process as required.
7. Click
to revalidate the configuration and check that no conflicts between users and associated extensions.
8. If the configuration changes are complete, send the configuration back to the IP Office and select appropriate settings
for the reboot.
IP Office
Page 169
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
8.6 Swapping Extension Users

IP Office 4.2 allows a user to log out when their extension number does not match the Base Extension setting of the
phone extension they are currently using. Once logged out the user will be automatically re-associated with the extension
whose Base Extension does match their extension number. This feature allows users to be moved between extensions
without needing to change the physical connections or rebooting the IP Office system.
Whilst the example below shows 2 users swapping extensions the method can be used to swap multiple users within the
configuration and effecting the swaps after a single merge of the configuration changes.
The process can be used on pre-4.2 IP Office systems but in that case will require the configuration changes to be sent to
the IP Office system for a reboot.
Example
User A (202) and User B (203) need to swap extensions.
1. Load the IP Office configuration and select
Extension.
2. Locate the extension with the Base Extension set to 202, ie. matching User A's extension number.
If the group pane is visible (View | Group Pane) in IP Office Manager, it shows the extension details (ID,
Module, Port and Base Extension).
3. Select that extension and change its Base Extension setting to 203, ie. to now match User B's extension
number.
If IP Office Manager is set to validate edits, it will warn that this change conflicts with the existing Base
Extension setting of another extension. Ignore the warning at this stage.
4. Click OK. Locate the other extension with the Base Extension set to 203, ie. matching User B's extension
number.
5. Select that extension and change its Base Extension setting to 202, ie. to now match User A's extension
number.
If the error pane is visible (View | Error Pane), all the warnings about extension conflicts should have
disappeared.
6. Click OK. Send the configuration back to the IP Office system.
On pre-4.2 systems the configuration changes must be sent to the IP Office using one of the reboot options.
Following the system reboot the user will be automatically associated with the appropriate extensions. The
remaining steps of this process are not applicable to pre-4.2 IP Office systems.
IP Office 4.2+ systems can do this using the merge option. They should then use the following steps to
complete the process without having to reboot the system.
7. Ask each of the users to dial the log out short code set on the IP Office system. By default this is *36.
Having logged out, users on display phones should see the extension number has changed on the phone. They
may also see NoUser until the user new associated user logs out from the phone they are currently using and
is automatically logged in.
IP Office
Page 170
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Phone Installation: Swapping Extension Users

User who do have a login code and are set to Forced Login will have to complete the process at their new
extension using the login process.
8. The user IP Office configuration settings including their extension numbers will move between the extensions.
IP Office
Page 171
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office
Page 172
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 9.
External Trunk Configuration
IP Office
Page 173
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
9. External Trunk Configuration

This section cover the basic requirements for external trunk configuration. The exactly method of physical connection and
configuration will vary with each trunk provider and so requires local telecoms experience. The topics covered here are
general guidelines.
Clock Quality
Altering which digital trunk is used to provide the IP Office with its clock signal for call synchronization.
Unused Trunks
Disabling the use of trunks and trunk channels that are not available.
Prefix Dialing
On systems where a prefix is being used for external dialing, ensuring that the same prefix is added to incoming
numbers in order to allow return calls.
9.1 Clock Quality

Any system where digital trunks are being used requires a clock signal for call synchronization between the switches at
each end of the trunk. Typically the clock signal provided by a digital trunk from the central office exchange is the best
quality and most reliable source.
The IP Office can obtain and use the clock signal from any of its digital trunks. However it will only use one trunk for its
clock signal at any time and will ignore any other possible clock sources. If no clock source is available the IP Office can
use its own internal clock if necessary.
The Clock Quality setting on each line is set to one of the following:
Network
If available, the clock signal from this trunk can be used as the IP Office's clock source.
Fallback
If available, the clock signal from this trunk can be used as the clock source only if none of the trunks set to Network
are providing a clock source.
Unsuitable
The clock source from this trunk is never used as the IP Office's clock source.
In the example below the first IP Office is set to use the public network trunk as its clock source and ignoring the possible
clock source from the QSIG trunk. However the other system is using the QSIG trunk as it clock source.
Source Priority
When multiple trunks with the same setting are providing a clock signal, the trunk used is determined in the following
order of priority.
Small Office Edition - Trunks are used in the order of ports 1 to 4.
IP400 Control Units - Trunks are used in the order Slot B ports 1 to 4, then Slot A ports 1 to 4.
IP500 Control Unit - Trunks are used in the order of slots 1 to 4 and then by port on each slot.
Viewing the Current Clock Source

The current clock source being used by an IP Office system is shown on the Resources page within the IP Office System
Status Application.
IP Office
Page 174
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
External Trunk Configuration: Clock Quality

Objective - Set a chosen digital trunk as the network clock source and set all other digital trunks as fallback or
unsuitable.
Procedure
1. Within the IP Office configuration, select
Line.
2. For each digital line, select the line and on the Line tab select whether that trunk should provide the clock source for
the network or whether the trunk is unsuitable. For E1R2 trunks the Clock Quality setting is on the Advanced tab.
3. Ensure that only one trunk is set to Network. This should preferably be a direct digital trunk to the central office
exchange.
4. One other trunk can be set a Fallback should the selected Network trunk connection be lost. If possible this should be a
trunk from a different provider since that reduces the chances of both sources failing at the same time.
5. Ensure that all other digital trunks are set as Unsuitable.
IP Office
Page 175
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
9.2 Unused Trunks

Each IP Office trunk card provides a fixed number of trunk ports. For digital trunks each trunk provides a set number of
digital channels. In cases where the number of trunks connected to the IP Office is lower or the number of channels
provided is lower, those unused trunks and channel must be disabled.
Failure to do this will cause problems with outgoing calls. For example, on a system with an ATM4 trunk card fitted
but only two analog trunks actually connected, failure to disable the other two trunks within the IP Office configuration
will cause 50% of outgoing call attempts to fail.
Objective
Remove unused trunks and channels from the IP Office configuration.
Procedure
Line.
2. For each line, set those lines or channels that are not connected or being used as out of service. The location of the
relevant setting varies for each trunk type.
Analog Trunks
Set the Trunk Type to Out of Service.
BRI, E1 PRI, S0 and QSIG Trunks

Set the channels quantities to match the actual subscribed channels.
IP Office
Page 176
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
External Trunk Configuration: Unused Trunks

T1, T1 PRI and E1R2 Trunks
Select the Channels tab. Select those channels that are not used and click Edit.
For T1 set the Type to Out of Service.

For T1 PRI set the Admin field to Out of Service.
For E1R2 trunks set the Line Signalling Type to Out of Service.
IP Office
Page 177
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
9.3 Prefix Dialing

Where a prefix has been implemented for outgoing calls, that same prefix needs to be added to trunk settings. The prefix
is then used as follows;
On incoming calls the prefix is added to any incoming ICLID received with the call. That allows the ICLID to be used by
IP Office phones and applications to make return calls.
Previously, on outgoing calls, any prefix on the digits received by the trunk to dial was removed since that prefix will
not be valid at the central office exchange. Unlike previous IP Office releases, IP Office 4.0 does not do this and so
whichever short codes are used to route a call to a trunk, they must be setup so as to remove the dialing prefix.
Objective
Ensure the correct prefix is added to incoming calls.
Procedure
Line.
2. For each line enter the prefix. The location of the relevant setting varies for each trunk type.
Analog Trunks
T1 and T1 PRI Trunks
IP Office
Page 178
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
External Trunk Configuration: Prefix Dialing

BRI, E1 PRI, S0 and QSIG Trunks
IP Office
Page 179
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office
Page 180
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 10.
Additional Processes
IP Office
Page 181
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10. Additional Processes

those .bin file into the control unit and modules within the IP Office system.
WARNINGS
WAN3 10/100 Modules
Upgrade each WAN3 10/100 module separately and only after having upgraded the control unit and any other
expansion modules.
Due to the need to adjust internal memory allocation and configuration storage, for some upgrades the control unit
may need to perform multi-stage upgrade process. The table below indicates the require upgrade paths.
Control Unit
.bin File
Unvalidated
Only
Validated
ip401ng.bin
2.0 > 2.1
2.1 > 3.0 > 3.1 > 3.2 > 3.2(999) > 4.2.
IP406 V2
ip406u.bin
2.1 > 3.0 > 3.0(999) > 3.1 > 3.1(999) > 3.2 > 4.2.
IP412
ip412.bin
1.3 > 2.1
2.1 > 3.0 > 3.1 > 3.2 > 4.2.
IP500
ip500.bin
4.0.0 > 4.2.
Multiple Managers
Other IP Office Applications
Upgrading the core software of the IP Office control unit may require upgrades to associated software. Typically IP
Office is compatible with the previous release of most IP Office applications, however for each IP Office core software
release there may be exceptions. These exceptions will be detailed in the Technical Bulletin for the IP Office core
software release.
Tools Required
IP Office
Page 182
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Additional Processes: Upgrading the Core Software

and the IP Office.
Right-click on the upgrade wizard and click Select Directory. Locate and select the directory containing the bin file for
the intermediate software level.
available the check box may have already been automatically ticked. If doing a multistage upgrade, only the control
unit is selectable for the first stage.
For systems including WAN3 modules, untick the WAN3 modules. Each WAN3 module should be upgraded separately
once the control unit and modules in the same system have been upgraded.
10.Select Upgrade.
15.Repeat the process as required. For example if doing a multi-stage control unit upgrade or if there are WAN3 modules
in the system that are being upgraded separately.
IP Office
Page 183
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.2 Creating a WAN Link

The following is a simplified process for creating a data link from Site A to Site B via the WAN ports.
At Site A on IP address 192.168.43.1.

1. Create a Normal Service
The Service name can be any text and is used to identify this particular service. The account Name and password
entered for the service are presented to the remote end, therefore must match the user name and password
configured at Site B. The Encrypted Password option can only be used if the remote end also supports CHAP.
2. Create a User
Under the Dial In tab, tick Dial In On. This User account is used to authenticate the connection from the Site B. Note
that if the Service and User have the same name these two configuration forms are automatically linked and become
an Intranet Service. The User password is displayed at the bottom of the Service tab as the Incoming Password.
3. Setup RAS
If CHAP is to be used on this link then the Encrypted Password option must be checked in the Service and in the RAS
service. The name of the RAS service must match the name of the Service at Site B. Note that if the RAS settings are
given the same name as the Service and User they are automatically linked and become a WAN Service. Ensure that
the Encrypted Password option is not checked when using a WAN Service.
4. Edit the WANPort
Note: Do not create a new WANPort, this is automatically detected. If a WANPort is not displayed, connect the WAN
cable, reboot the Control Unit and receive the configuration. The WANPort configuration form should now be added.
5. Create an IP Route
In the IP Address field enter the network address of the remote end, not the IP address of the Control Unit. Under
Destination select the Service created above.
At Site B on IP address 192.168.45.1

1. Repeat the above process but altering the details to create a route from Site B to Site A
IP Office
Page 184
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Additional Processes: Creating a WAN Link
10.3 IP500 Reset Button

The IP500 control unit includes a Reset button not found on other IP Office control unit.
Pressing the button while the control unit is starting up will pause the start up until the button is released.
The effect of pressing the button during normal operation will depend on how long the button is pressed and is indicated
by the CPU LED.
Press Duration
(seconds)
CPU LED
Action
Summary
0 to 5.
Off
None
None.
5 to 10.
Orange
Reboot When Free
Reboot when free with new incoming/outgoing call

barring. A reboot using the reset button is recorded in
the Audit Trail.
10 to 30.
Flashing orange
Erase Configuration/
Immediate Reboot
Erase the configuration, alarm log and audit trail.

Immediate reboot without waiting for active calls to end.
See Erasing the configuration for full details.
30 to 40.
Red
Erase All.
Erase configuration, alarm log and core software. See

Erasing the Operational Software for full details.
Over 40.
Flashing green
None
None.
IP Office
Page 185
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.4 Out of Building Telephone Installations

The following are the only supported scenarios in which wired extensions and devices outside the main building can be
connected to the IP Office system. In these scenarios, additional protection, in the form of protective grounding and
surge protectors, must be fitted.
The fitting of additional protection does not remove the risk of damage. It merely reduces the chances of damage.
Cabling Requirements
Cables of different types, for example trunk lines, extensions, ground and power connections, should be kept separate.
All cabling between building should be enclosed in grounded ducting. Ideally this ducting should be buried.
A Primary Protection Box must be provided at the point where the cables enter the building. This should be three point
protection (tip, ring and ground). Typically this would be gas tube protection provided by the local telephone company.
The ground wire must be thick enough to handle all the lines being affected by indirect strike at the same time.
Connection Type
Protection Device Type
Requirement
DS Phone Extensions
ITWLinx towerMAX DS/2

Supports up to 4 connections.
referred to as the Avaya 146E).
Connection from the expansion module to the

phone must be via a surge protector at each end
and via the primary protection point in each
building.
Digital Station Expansion

module DS ports only.
The IP Office expansion module and control unit

and IROB devices must be connected to the
protective ground point in their building.
Analog Phone Extensions
IP Office Barrier Box

Supports a single connection.
Phones Expansion module ( Maximum of 16 on any expansion The between building connection must be via
module.
POT or PHONE) ports only.
earthed ducting, preferable underground. The
cable must not be exposed externally at any point.
Analog Trunks
External Output Switch
ITWLinx towerMAX CO/4x4

Supports up to 4 two-wire lines.
referred to as the Avaya 146C).
For installations in the Republic of South Africa, the

fitting of surge protection on analog trunks is a
requirement.
ITWLinx towerMAX SCL/8

referred to as the Avaya 146G)
Connections from an IP Office Ext O/P port to an

external relay device must be via a surge protector.
For other locations where the risk of lightning strikes

is felt to be high, additional protection of incoming
analog trunks is recommended.
The towerMAX range of devices are supplied by ITWLinx (http://www.itwlinx.com).
IP Office
Page 186
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Additional Processes: Out of Building Telephone Installations
10.4.1 DS Phones
When digital phone extensions are required in another building, additional In-Range Out-Of-Building (IROB) protective
equipment must be used. For phones connected to IP Office DS ports, the supported device supplied by ITWLinx is a
towerMAX DS/2 module. This IROB device was previous badged by Avaya as the 146E IROB.
CAUTION
Ports on the front of the Small Office Edition, IP403 and IP406 V2 control units must not be used for extensions that
are external to the main building.
The protection device should be installed as per the instructions supplied with the device. The ground points on the IP
Office control unit and the DS modules must be connected to a protective ground using 18AWG wire with a green and
yellow sleeve.
Typically the IROB's 2 RJ45 EQUIPMENT ports are straight through connected to the 2 RJ45 LINE ports. This allows
existing RJ45 structured cabling, using pins 4 and 5, to be used without rewiring for up to two DS connection. However
each of these ports can be used to connect a second extension using pins 3 and 6.
LINE
Signal
EQUIPMENT
Not used.
Not used.
Ring II (Optional)
Ring I
Tip I
Tip II (Optional)
Not used.
Not used.
IP Office
Page 187
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.4.2 Analog Phone Barrier Box

Where analog phone extensions are required in another building, additional protective equipment must be used, in the
form of IP Office Phone Barrier Boxes and protective earth connections.
The correct IP Office specific barrier boxes must be used. These modules have been designed specifically for the
signalling voltages used by the IP Office system:
Only the IP Office Phone Barrier Box should be used with Phone V1 modules.
Only the IP Office Phone Barrier Box V2 should be used with Phone V2 modules.
No other type of analog phone barrier box should be used.
Where more than 3 barrier boxes are required in a building, they must be rack mounted using a Barrier Box rack
mounting kit.
A maximum of 16 barrier boxes can be used with any Phone module.
CAUTION: PHONE (POT) ports on the front of control units must not be used for extensions that are external to the
main building.
The Phone Barrier Box does not connect the ringing capacitor in Phone V1 modules.
Main Building
RJ11: Connect to PHONE (POT) port on the
Phone module using cable supplied with the
barrier box.
RJ45: Connect to the secondary building
barrier box via primary protection in both
buildings.
Center Screw: Connect to main building
protective ground (or ground terminal of
Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit). Use 18AWG
(minimum) wire with a green and yellow
sleeve.
Barrier Box
Secondary Building
RJ11: Connect to analog phone.
Cable not supplied.
RJ45: From main building via
primary protection in both buildings.
Center Screw: Connect to main

building protective ground. Use
18AWG (minimum) wire with a green
and yellow sleeve.
Right-Hand Screw: Not used.
Right-Hand Screw: Connect to ground point

on Phone module using ground cable supplied
with barrier box.
IP Office
Page 188
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
1. The following wires must be kept apart, that is not routed in the same bundle:
Earth leads from the barrier box to the IP400 Phone modules.
Internal wires, for example extension leads going directly to the IP400 Phone modules.
Wires from external telephone going directly to the barrier boxes.
IP Office Barrier Boxes
IP Office
SAP Code
IP400 Phone Barrier Box (81V)
Use with Phone V1 module. Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable and a
functional earth lead.
700293897
IP400 Phone Barrier Box V2 (101V)

Use with Phone V2 module. Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable and a
functional earth lead.
700385495
Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit
700293905
Page 189
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.4.3 Rack Mounting Barrier Boxes

Where more than 3 Phone Barrier Boxes are used they must be rack mounted. The Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit (SAP
Code 700293905) supports up to 8 Phone Barrier Boxes.
1. Unscrew the two screws arranged diagonally at the front of each barrier box and use these same screws to reattach
the barrier box to the rack mounting strip.
2. Each barrier box is supplied with a solid green ground wire connected to its functional ground screw. Remove and
discard this wire. Connect a green/yellow ground wire to the protective earth screw in the center of the Point on the
back of the Barrier Box.
3. The rack mounting strip has threaded M4 earthing pillars. Connect the other end of the barrier box ground wire, using
M4 washers and nuts, to the earthing pillar on that side of the rack mounting strip.
4. Using 14AWG wire with green and yellow sleeve, connect one of the earthing pillars to the buildings protective earth.
5. Using 14AWG wire with green and yellow sleeve, connect the other earthing pillar to the Phone module.
6. Ensure that the following wires are not routed together in the same bundle:
Earth lead from the barrier box to the IP400 Phone 8/16/32.
Internal wires, e.g. wires going directly to the IP400 Phone 8/16/32.
Wires from external telephone going directly to the barrier boxes.
IP Office
Page 190
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.5 Using the External Output Port

All the IP Office control units are equipped with a EXT O/P port. The port is marked as EXT O/P and is located on the back
of the control unit adjacent to the power supply input socket.
The port can be used to control up to two external devices such as door entry relay switches. The usual application for
these switches is to activate relays on door entry systems. However, as long as the criteria for maximum current, voltage
and if necessary protection are met, the switches can be used for other applications.
The switches can be switched closed, open or pulsed (closed for 5 seconds and then open). This can be done in a number
of ways:
Using IP Office short codes.
Through the Door tab in Phone Manager Pro.
Through the Door Release option in IP Office SoftConsole.
Via the Open Door action in Voicemail Pro.
Default Short Codes

The following are the default short codes in the IP Office configuration for external output switch operation. They use the
short code features Relay On (closed), Relay Off (open) and Relay Pulse.
State
Switch 1
Switch 2
Closed
*39
*42
Open
*40
*43
Pulse
*41
*44
10.5.1 Port Connection

These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units. They are used for connection to external switching relays.
The port uses a standard 3.5mm stereo jack plug for connection.
The IP Office is able to open (high resistance), close (low resistance) or pulse (close for 5 seconds and then open) two
switches within the port. Either switch can be operated separately. These switches are intended for activation of external
relays in systems such as door opening systems.
CAUTION: In installations where this port is connected to a device external to the building, connection must be via a
towerMAX SCL/8 Surge Protector and a protective ground connection must be provided on the IP Office control unit.
EXT O/P
Pin
Description
Switch 1.
Switch 2.
0 Volts (Ground/Chassis)
Switching Capacity: 0.7A.

Maximum Voltage: 55V d.c.
On state resistance: 0.7 ohms.
Short circuit current: 1A.
Reverse circuit current capacity: 1.4A.
Ensure that pins 1 and 2 are always at a positive voltage with respect to pin 3.
3.5mm stereo audio jack plugs are frequently sold as pre-wired sealed modules. It may be necessary to use a multimeter to determine the wiring connections from an available plug. Typically 3 (common to both relays) is the cable
screen.
IP Office
Page 191
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.6 Licensing
10.6.1 License Keys
Various IP Office features and applications require entry of license keys into the system's configuration. The license keys
are unique 32-character codes based on the feature being activated and the serial number of the IP Office system's
Feature Key dongle.
Example 1: Enabling Software Features

In the example above, the IP Office system has a valid Phone Manager Pro license. In this case the license is for 20
instances. That means that up to 20 IP Office users can be configured to use Phone Manager Pro simultaneously. Their
previously license free Phone Manager Lite software will automatically change to display Phone Manager Pro features.
Example 2: Enabling Software and Features
The example above the IP Office also a license for Voicemail Pro. This initial Voicemail Pro license provide for 4 ports
between the IP Office system and the Voicemail Pro PC. Additional Voicemail Pro (ports) licenses can be added to
cumulative increase the number of port up to the limit supported by the particular type of IP Office control unit.
When a license key is entered into the IP Office configuration, the following information is shown.
Status
The status, which is Unknown until the configuration file is sent back to the IP Office system.
License
The name of the licensed feature. This may differ from the ordered RFA name.
Instances
Depending on the license, this may be the number of ports enabled or number of simultaneous users of the licensed
feature. Sometime the number of instances is specified in the license name.
Expires
Most purchased licenses have no expiry setting. For some features, trial licenses may be available which will have an
expiry date.
IP Office
Page 192
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Additional Processes: Licensing
10.6.2 Feature Key Dongles

Various IP Office features and applications require entry of a licence key or keys into the system's configuration. Each
licence key is a unique 32-character number based on the feature being activated and the serial number of a Feature Key
dongle installed somewhere with the IP Office system.
PC-Less Licensing
Uses a feature key dongle inserted or attached to the rear of the control unit. This method can be used with any of the
IP Office control units supported by IP Office 4.0 and is mandatory with the IP500 control unit.
PC-Base Licensing
This method uses a dongle attached to a PC running the IP Office Feature Key server application. This PC must be on
the same LAN segment as the IP Office control unit. Typically the dongle and IP Office Feature Key server application
are installed on the same PC as the IP Office Voicemail Lite or Voicemail Pro application if present.
There are three type of Feature Key dongle available. The serial number is printed either directly onto the dongle or onto
a label on the dongle.
Feature Key Type
Description
Smart
Card
Inserts into a dedicated slot on the rear of the

IP500 control unit. This card is required on IP500
systems even if not using any IP Office licenses.
MU-Law
700417470
Serial
Plugs directly into the DTE serial port on the rear of

the control unit allowing PC-less operation.
700293095
Parallel
Plugs into the appropriate port on a PC running the

IP Office Feature Key server application. This PC
must on the same LAN segment as the IP Office
control unit.
700185234
USB
IP Office
SOE IP406
V2
IP412 IP50 SAP Code

0
A-Law
700417488
700261506
Page 193
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.6.3 Installation Requirements

Software
The IP Office Administration CD contains the Feature Key Server software. This is required for use with USB and
parallel port licence keys.
Feature Key
Ensure that the serial number on the Feature Key dongle is noted and recorded in a safe location. The number is
printed on the Feature Key dongle and prefixed with SN.
Feature Key Server PC

Only required if using a Parallel Port or USB Feature Key. Not applicable if using a Serial Port Feature Key dongle.
Windows 2000, 2003 or XP are strongly recommended as the Feature Key Server is then able to install as a service,
giving greater reliability.
The server PC should be located in a secure area. The Feature Key device is fundamental to the correct operation of
many features, so a record of its location and serial number must be kept.
Parallel Port Feature Key:
A 25-pin Parallel port 1, set to bidirectional operation in the PC's BIOS.
Bidirectional parallel port operation is the normal default on most PCs.
WARNING: Do not connect a printer to the parallel port Feature Key dongle. Poorly wired printer cables or printers
that have not been earthed correctly can cause the parallel port Feature Key to stop working.
USB Feature Key:
USB 1.1 or 2.0. Type A connector.
IP Office 1.4 Admin suite or later.
Network
The PC should be configured and tested for TCP/IP networking.
It should be on the same network segment as the IP Office. That is data traffic between the IP Office and the Feature
Key Server PC should not require routing.
The PC should have a fixed IP address. Whilst PC's in a DHCP network usually retain the same IP address between
reboots this is not guaranteed.
If the IP Office is acting as a DHCP server, then in default it uses addresses 192.168.42.2 to 192.168.42.201 for
DHCP clients. This leaves addresses between 192.168.42.202 and 192.168.42.254 free for devices that require fixed
IP addresses.
IP Office
Page 194
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.6.4 Serial Port Feature Key Installation

1. Plug the serial port Feature Key dongle into the serial port on the IP Office control unit (IP Office Small Office Edition,
IP406 V2 and IP412 control units).
3. Select
System.
4. On the System tab, the License Server IP Address field is used to set the location of the feature key. For a serial
port license key, set the License Server IP Address to be blank.
5. Click OK.
6. Select
License.
7. To add a license, click
and select License. Enter the new license click OK.
8. The Status of the new license should show Unknown and name the license as expected. If its Status is Unknown and
name Invalid, the most likely cause is incorrect entry of the license key characters.
9. Click on
required.
to send the configuration back to the IP Office. The menu that appears will indicate whether a reboot is
10.Use Manager to receive the configuration again and check that the status of the license. It should now be Valid.
IP Office
Page 195
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.6.5 Parallel / USB Port Feature Key Installation

1. Plug the Feature Key dongle into the PC's parallel or USB port.
2. Insert the IP Office Administrator Applications CD and let the installation wizard auto-start.
3. If some IP Office administrator application have been previously installed, select Modify when the Modify, Repair or
Remove option menu appears.
4. In the Select Features menu, ensure that Feature Key Server is selected. Do not change any other options as this will
trigger their removal if already installed.
5. Having installed the software, the system will reboot.
The Feature Key Server installs itself as a service. It appears as Key Server in the Services Panel.
In the Add/Remove Programs panel, an entry Sentinel System Driver appears. This is part of the Feature Key
Server.
6. Following installation and reboot, the Feature Key Server appears as an icon
in the Windows System Tray.
Right-click on the icon and select About to display the server software version and the Feature Key device number.
If the icon appears as a white block with a red cross through it, then there is some error. The most likely error is
that the Feature Key is missing from the parallel or USB port.
8. Select
System.
9. On the System tab, the License Server IP Address field is used to set the location of the feature key. The default is
a 255.255.255.255 broadcast address. This is okay for many sites, but it is recommend that the IP address of the PC
running the Feature Key Server is entered.
10.Click OK.
11.Select
License.
12.To add a license, click
and select License. Enter the new license click OK.
13.The Status of the new license should show Unknown and name the license as expected. If its Status is Unknown
and name Invalid, the most likely cause is incorrect entry of the license key characters.
14.Click on
required.
to send the configuration back to the IP Office. The menu that appears will indicate whether a reboot is
15.Use Manager to receive the configuration again and check that the status of the license. It should now be Valid.
IP Office
Page 196
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.7 So8 BRI Module

10.7.1 Example 1: ISDN Terminal
In this example, calls on DID 123456 are routed to the first port of the So8 expansion module. That port has been
configured as Line Group ID 701.
1. Configure an Incoming Call Routing
The destination is a short code that directs the call to the line group ID that contains the So lines. The Bearer
Capability has been set to Any, to allow data and voice via this route.
Line Group ID: 0
Incoming Number: 123456
Destination: 123456
Bearer Capability: Any
2.Create a System Short Code:
This is the destination used in the Incoming Call Route.
Short Code: 123456
Telephone Number: 123456
Line Group ID: 701
Feature: Dial
3. Send the configuration to the Control Unit.
Any call coming into the main system on DID 123456 will now be passed directly to the first port.
If you wish to assign DID's from your main pool to individual ports and avoid network charges when dialing between
them, try variations on the following:
1. You have DID ranges, for example: 7325551000 to 7325551099. You wish to assign 7325551000-19 to port 1 and
7325551020-20 to port 2 etc.
2. Configure Incoming Call Route:
The # is used here instead of "n" to avoid problems with "Main". The minus sign means the number is processed from
the left and so will wait for the whole number.
Line Group ID: 701
Incoming Number: -100x
Destination: #
3. Repeat for Line Group ID 702 etc.
4. Create Short codes, for example:
Short Code: 100x
Telephone Number: .
Line Group ID: 701
Feature: Dial
S0 calls dialed without the area code are handled locally without network charges. Calls with area calls will go via the
network.
IP Office
Page 197
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.7.2 Example 2: Video Conference

In this example, calls are routed to a Polycom Viewstation module connected to a S0 port of the IP Office system.
The following settings were used on 4 incoming data channels of a PRI line:
Line Number: 5
Incoming Line Group: 95
Channel Allocation: 23 -> 1
Outgoing Line Group: 95
Switch Type: 5ESS
Direction: Bothway
Line Sub Type: PRI
Bearer: Data
Provider: AT&T
Service: Accunet (this is a important)
Channels: 1-4
Admin: In Service
To route an incoming video call on the PRI lines configured above to an SO8 module requires the following:
1. Create a dial short code that has the SO port as its destination Line Group. For this example the following was used:
Short Code: 1500
Number: .
Feature: Dial
Line Group: 601 (the SO8 port number)
2. Create an Incoming Call Routing that routes the appropriate calls to that short code. For this example the following was
used:
Line Group: 95 (identifies calls using the PRI lines configured above)
Destination: 1500 (the short code created above)
Bearer: Any
To allow the video device on the S0 port to make outgoing calls to the PRI lines also requires a short code.
1. For this example the following was used:
Code: 91N;
Number: N
Feature: Dial
Line Group: 95
IP Office
Page 198
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Additional Processes: So8 BRI Module

Polycom Video Module Settings
The Polycom modules used in the previous example were the Viewstation 128, Viewstation 256 and Viewstation MP.
The Polycom module must have software that supports 'Standard ETSI ISDN' (European ISDN) and have its ISDN Switch
Protocol setting set to 'Standard ETSI Euro-ISDN'
The following were the settings used during testing:
Characteristics
Admin/Software and Hardware/Software
Polycom View Station 512 MP.
Software: 7.0.1.
NTSC UIS Interface.
Network Interface: S/T Interface.
View Station PVS 1419.
ISDN Version: IEUS v18:a00320
Admin/General Setup
Admin/Video Network/ISDN Video Network
Country: USA
Country Code: 1
Language: English (USA)
Area Code: 732
Auto Answer: Yes
Number A: blank
AllowDial: Yes
Number B: blank
Allow User Setup: Yes
ISDN Switch Protocol: Standard ETSI Euro-ISDN.
Maximum Time on Call: 480.

User Setup
Admin/Video Network/IMUX
Auto Answer: Yes
Numbers: blank
PIP: Auto
SPID: blank
Far Control of Near Camera: Yes
Audio Quality: 168KB/s
MP Mode: Auto
Advanced Dialing: Dial Channels in Parallel
System Information
Admin/Software and Hardware/Hardware
Release: 7.0.1
Camera: NTSC
Model: VS: 512
Video Comm Interface: ISDN_Quad_BRI

Network Interface Type: S/T Interface
Admin/Video Network
Admin/Video Network/Call Preference
MultiPoint Setup: Auto
ISDN Video Calls (H:320): Yes
IP Office
Page 199
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.8 SNMP
10.8.1 SNMP Introduction
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a standard network protocol that allows the monitoring and
management of data devices across a network.
An SNMP agent can be built into network devices such as routers and hubs. An SNMP manager application (for example
CastleRock or HP OpenView) can then communicate with those devices.
This communication can be:
Polling: Supported by IP Office 2.0 and above
Some SNMP manager applications send out polling messages to the network. They then record the responds of any
SNMP enabled devices (agents). This allows the manager to create a network map and to raise an alarm when devices
previously present do not respond.
Most SNMP manager applications can also do simple IP address polling to locate non-SNMP enabled devices.
However this method of polling does not identify the device type or other information.
SNMP polling including details about the responding device. For example an IP Office control unit's response includes
the control unit type, level of software, routing table information, up time, etc.
Traps: Supported by IP Office 2.0 and above
When certain events occur, a devices SNMP agent can send details of the event to the SNMP manager. This is called an
SNMP 'trap'. These appear in the event log of the SNMP manager. Most SNMP manager's can be configured to give
additional alerts in response to particular traps.
Management: Not supported by IP Office 2.0 and above
Some SNMP agents support device management and configuration changes through the SNMP manager interface.
IP Office 2.0 and above allows IP Office Control Units to act as read-only SNMP v1 agents. It can include the sending of
events traps to up to two different SNMP manager addresses.
IP Office 3.2 supports the use of SMTP to email SNMP alarms. This allows the IP Office's SNMP alarms to be used
without having to setup an SNMP manager application.
IP Office SNMP operation has been tested against Castle Rock SNMPc-EE 5.1.6c and HP OpenView Network Node Manager
6.41.
A MIB file exists for the SNMP monitoring of Avaya 4600 and 5600 Series IP phones. The MIB file can be obtained from
the Avaya support website (http://support.avaya.com).
The Avaya IP DECT system can also be monitored using SNMP. Refer to the IP DECT Installation manual.
IP Office
Page 200
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Additional Processes: SNMP
10.8.2 Installing the IP Office MIB Files

To allow full communication between an SNMP agent and an SNMP manager, the SNMP manager must load MIB files
(Management Information Base) specific to the SNMP agent device and the features it supports. These MIB files contain
details of the information the agent can provide and the traps that it can send. Full details of the structure of the IP Office
MIB files, MIB groups within those files and event traps can be found in the "IP Office Installation Manual".
The MIB files for IP Office operation are included on the IP Office Admin CD in the folder C:\smnp_mibs. The actual files
required and the method of loading depend on the SNMP manager application being used. The details below cover the
two SNMP manager applications tested.
HP Open View Network Node Manager

1. Copy the following MIB files to the applications MIBs folder.
MIB File
Source
a.
rfc2737-entity-mib.mib
snmp_mibs\standard folder on OpenView Install CD.
b.
avayagen-mib.mib
snmp_mibs\IPOffice folder on IP Office Admin CD.
c.
ipo-prod-mib.mib
d.
ipo-mib.mib
e.
inet-address-mib.mib
snmp_mibs\Standard folder on IP Office Admin CD.
f.
rfc2213-integrated-services-mib.mib
snmp_mibs\standard folder on OpenView Install CD.
g.
diffserv-dscp-tc.mib
h.
diffserv-mib-hpov.mib
i.
ipo-phones-mib.mib
2. Start the OpenView Network Node Manager console.

3. Select Options and then Load/Unload MIBs: SNMP.
4. Select Load and select all the MIB files listed above.
5. Select Compile.
IP Office
Page 201
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
CastleRock SNMPc 5.1.6c and earlier

1. Copy the following MIB files to the applications MIBs folder, normally C:\Program Files\SNMPc Network
Manager\mibfiles.
MIB file
Source
a.
ENTITY-MIB
snmp_mibs\Standard on IP Office Admin CD.
b.
AVAYAGEN-MIB.mib
snmp_mibs\IPOffice on IP Office Admin CD.
c.
IPO-PROD-MIB.mib
d.
IPO-MIB.mib
e.
INET-ADDRESS-MIB.mib
f.
INTEGRATED-SERVICES-MIB
g.
DIFFSERV-DSCP-TC.mib
h.
DIFFSERV-MIB.mib
i.
IPO-PHONES-MIB.mib
2. In SMNPc select Config | MIB Database.

3. Select Add and select the MIB files listed above in the order listed.
CastleRock SNMPc V5.0.1

The MIB installation instructions provided above are correct for CastleRock SNMPc V5.0.8 and later. For V5.0.1 of
CastleRock SNMPc the following must be carried out:
1. Copy all of the IP Office MIBs and standard MIBs from the IP Office Administrator Applications CD to the SNMPc
mibfiles directory.
2. In the SNMPc mibfiles directory open the files STANDARD.mib and SNMPv2-SMI.mib in Notepad.
3. In the SNMPv2-SMI.mib file find the definition of zeroDotZero and copy this to the clipboard.
4. In the STANDARD.MIB file find the SNMPv2-SMI section and paste in the definition of zeroDotZero from the clipboard
before the end of this section (just before the END statement).
5. Save the modified STANDARD.MIB file.
6. Add the MIB file SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB.mib to the MIB database using the instructions provided in the IP Office
installation guide.
7. Add all the MIB files listed in the instructions provided in the IP Office installation guide in the order given.
8. Compile the MIBs ready for use.
The reason for this is: The IPO-PHONES-MIB.mib relies upon the DIFFSERV-MIB.mib for the definition of the textual
convention of IndexInteger. The DIFFSERV-MIB needs the definition of the textual convention zeroDotZero which is
normally defined in SNMPv2-SMI.mib. However including SNMPv2-SMI.mib in the MIB file compilation list results in errors
due to conflicts with what appear to be internal definitions within SNMPc and the SNMPv2-SMI section in its STANDARD.
mib file. Therefore to resolve the issue the required definition of zeroDotZero must be placed in the SNMPv2-SMI section
in SNMPc's STANDARD.mib file.
IP Office
Page 202
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.8.3 Enabling SNMP and Polling Support

In order for the IP Office control unit to be discovered and polled by an SNMP manager, its SNMP agent must be enabled
and placed in the same read community as the SNMP manager.
To enable the SNMP agent:
1. In Manager, receive the control unit's configuration.
2. Double-click System from the Configuration Tree panel and select the SNMP tab.
3. Tick SNMP Enabled.
4. In SNMP Port, enter the UDP port number used by the IP Office SNMP agent to listen for and respond to SNMP traffic.
The normal default is 161.
5. In Community (Read-only), enter the community to which the device belongs for read access. This community name
must match that used by the SNMP manager application when sending requests to the device. The community public is
frequently used to establish communication and then changed (at both the SNMP agent and manager ends) for
security.
6. Click OK.
7. Send the configuration back to the IP Office and select reboot.
8. Following the IP Office reboot, the SNMP manager should be able to discover the control unit.
9. The control unit's response will include details of the control unit type and the current level of core software.
10.8.4 Enabling SNMP Trap Sending

In Manager, receive the control unit's configuration.
1. Double-click System from the Configuration Tree panel and select the SNMP tab.
2. Ensure that SNMP Enabled is ticked.
3. Using either Trap Destination 1 or Trap Destination 2, enter the following information:
Enter the IP Address of the PC running the SNMP manager application.
Enter the Port on which the traps messages should be sent. This is the UDP port on which the IP Office sends SNMP
trap messages. The default is 162.
Set the Community that will be used by the agent and the SNMP manager. The community public is frequently used to
establish communication and then changed (at both the SNMP agent and manager ends) for security.
Select the Events which should be sent:
Generic:
Events such as soft reboot (warm start), hard reboot (cold start), links up/down (transition in the status of a PPP or
frame relay interface) or SNMP community mismatch.
Entity:
Failures, errors and changes of state in IP Office modules and trunk interfaces. Note: Does not include WAN3,
Modem2 and ATM4.
Licence:
Changes of state in the communication with the Feature Key Server.
Phone Change:
Changes to the type of DS or IP phone connected to a port.
4. Click on OK.
5. Send the configuration back to the IP Office and select reboot.
IP Office
Page 203
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.8.5 Trap Generation

RFC1215 Generic SNMP Traps
Trap
Cause
warmStart
Soft reboot.
coldStart
Unexpected reboot such as a power outage.
linkDown
Transition of an interface (PPP or Frame-Relay) from the up operational state into the down
operational state.
linkUp
Transition of an interface (PPP or Frame-Relay) from the down operational state into the up
operational state.
authenticationFailure
SNMP request with mismatched community for the type of operation.
IPO-MIB
Trap
Cause
ipoGenEntityFailureEvent
A physical entity has fails in its operation
ipoGenEntityOperationalEvent
A physical entity becomes operational again after having failed. .
ipoGenEntityErrorEvent
A transitory error is detected for a physical entity.
ipoGenEntityChangeEvent
A non-error change event is detected for a physical entity.
ipoGenLKSCommsFailureEvent
Loss of communication with a configured License Key Server.
ipoGenLKSCommsOperationalEvent Communication with the configured License Key Server established or reestablished.
ipoGenLKSCommsErrorEvent
Currently not used.
ipoGenLKSCommsChangeEvent
Currently not used.
ipoGenVMSCommsFailureEvent
Loss of communication to the voicemail system.
ipoGenVMSCommsOperationalEven Link to the voicemail system established or reestablished.

t
ipoGenVMSCommsErrorEvent
Currently not used.
ipoGenVMSCommsChangeEvent
Currently not used.
ipoGenDSCommsFailureEvent
Loss of communication to the delta server.
ipoGenDSCommsOperationalEvent Communication to the delta server established or reestablished.

ipoGenDSCommsErrorEvent
Currently not used.
ipoGenDSCommsChangeEvent
Currently not used.
The traps above are generated for the physical entities as follows:
Expansion Modules
Trap
Phone
Digital
Station
Analog
Trunk
S08
WAN3
ipoGenEntityErrorEvent
ipoGenEntityChangeEvent
Where:
ipoGenEntityFailureEvent and ipoGenEntityOperationalEvent traps are issued in relation to connecting cable
disconnection and reconnection or power changes.
IP Office
Page 204
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

ipoGenEntityErrorEvent trap is issued for transitory communication errors across the cabling to an expansion module.
ipoGenEntityChangeEvent trap is issued for mismatch(es) in expansion modules discovered at controller start up and
those present in the system configuration.
Trunk Interfaces
Trap
Analog
BRI
E1
E1R2
T1 PRI
Where ipoGenEntityFailureEvent and ipoGenEntityOperationalEvent traps are issued in relation to link status changes.
Integral Modules
Trap
Modem
Voice
Compressor
Where ipoGenEntityFailureEvent and ipoGenEntityOperationalEvent traps are issued for voice compressor modules in
relation to data access problems that result in code reload
Other Plug-In Modules

The ipoGenEntityChangeEvent trap is issued for changes to the PCMCIA card slot population on the IP Office Small
Office Edition control unit.
IPO-PHONES-MIB:
Trap
Cause
ipoPhonesChangeEvent
Upon change of a DS or IP extension phone type after normal start-up. No traps are
issued for PHONE (POT) extensions as the presence or absence of such phones cannot
be established hence the ipoPhonesType for such extensions is always potPhone.
IP Office
Page 205
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.9 DTE Port Maintenance

10.9.1 DTE Port Overview
The DTE port on the back of IP Office control units is not normally used when configuring an IP Office system. However,
in extreme cases, the DTE port can be used to default the system's configuration or to erase it core software if
necessary.
WARNING
Due to the drastic nature of these actions, they should only be performed if absolutely necessary to return a system
back to working order. In both cases, you must make every effort to ensure that you have a backup copy of the
system configuration.
The DTE ports on IP Office expansion modules are not used for any maintenance or diagnostics except under instruction
from Avaya.
10.9.2 DTE Port Settings

These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units and external expansion modules. The DTE ports on
external expansion modules are not used.
The RS232 DTE ports on the control units can be used for system maintenance and connection of serial terminal
adaptors. On IP400 control units the port can also be used for connection of the IP Office serial port licence key dongle.
An asynchronous terminal program such as HyperTerminal is also required. Configure this for operation via a PC serial
port, as follows:
Bits per second 38,400
Data bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None

Settings | Emulation TTY
DTE Cables
These cables are used for system maintenance and diagnostics under Avaya guidance. They can also be used for
connection of RS232 serial terminal adaptor equipment to the IP Office control unit.
The cable required depends on the IP Office control unit. This cable is a "Straight through DB9 female to DB9 male serial
cable".
IP Office 9-Way RS232 Signal

DTE Port
IP Office
PC/Terminal
Adaptor
Receive data
Transmit Data
RTS (Request To Send)
CTS (Clear To Send)
DSR (Data Set Ready)
Ground
DCD (Data Carrier Detect)
DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
RI (Ring Indicator)
Page 206
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Additional Processes: DTE Port Maintenance
10.9.3 Erasing the Configuration

The following processes erases the configuration held in the IP Office control unit's memory. That include both the current
configuration in RAM memory and the backup configuration stored in non-volatile Flash memory. Following this the IP
Office will restart with a default configuration.
This process should be performed from a PC with a fixed IP address, directly connected to the IP Office control unit and
with the IP Office system disconnected from any network. Following this process, the control unit's IP address will default
to 192.168.42.1.
Do not perform any of these processes unless absolutely necessary. The IP Office's configuration settings can be
default through Manager using the File | Advanced | Erase Configuration command.
Procedure: Erasing the Configuration via Debug

This process erases the IP Office's configuration settings but does not alter its security settings. It is easier to use than
the boot loader method.
1.
WARNING: Ensure that you have a backup copy of the IP Office's configuration before performing this
action.
2. Attach the serial cable between the PC and the DTE port on the IP Office control unit.
3. Start the terminal program on your PC. Ensure that it has been setup as listed in DTE Port Settings. Within a
HyperTerminal session, the current settings are summarized across the base of the screen.
4. Enter AT (note upper case). The control unit should respond OK.
5. Enter AT-DEBUG. The control unit should response with the time and date and then Hello> to show it is ready to
accept commands.
6. To erase the current configuration in RAM memory enter eraseconfig. The Hello> command prompt reappears
when the action is completed.
7. To erase the backup configuration stored in non-volatile Flash memory enter erasenvconfig. The Hello>
command prompt reappears when the action is completed.
8. To reboot the IP Office enter reboot. The IP Office will reboot and restart with a defaulted configuration.
9. Close the terminal program session.
10.Manager can now be used to alter and then upload an old configuration file or receive and edit the control unit's
now defaulted configuration.
Procedure: Erasing the Configuration and Security Settings via the Boot Loader
This process defaults the IP Office security settings and its configurations settings.
1.
WARNING: Ensure that you have a backup copy of the IP Office's configuration before performing this action.
6. Power on the control unit while repeatedly pressing the escape key until you get a Loader message. Below is an
example. It may be necessary to repeat this several times until you successfully get the loader message.
P12 Loader 2.4
CPU Revision 0x0900
To erase the alarm log enter AT-X1.
To erase the current configuration in RAM memory enter AT-X3. A typical response is Sector Erases
(Config) followed by a series of OK responses.
To erase the backup configuration stored in non-volatile Flash memory enter AT-X2. A typical response if
Sector 2 Erase (NV Config) followed by OK.
IP Office 403 only: If running an IP Office 403 control unit, enter AT-X4.
8. Switch power to the control unit off and then back on. Within the terminal program you should see various
messages as the control unit performs various start up tasks.
IP Office
Page 207
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.Manager can now be used to alter and then upload an old configuration file or receive and edit the control unit's
now defaulted configuration.

System
Name
System Password
password
255.255.255.255
LAN*
LAN1
LAN2/WAN
IP address
192.168.42.1.
192.168.43.1
IP Mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
DHCP Mode
Server
Server
200.
200.

Hunt Group
RAS user DialIn.
Default Short Codes
settings:
IP Office
Page 208
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.9.4 Defaulting Security Settings

The following processes can be used to default the security settings of an IP Office system running IP Office 3.2 or
higher.
Procedure: Defaulting Security Settings

This process defaults the IP Office's security settings but does not alter its configuration settings.
4. Enter AT-SECURITYRESETALL.
5. You will be prompted to confirm the control unit's MAC address before continuing. Enter the address.
6. The control unit will respond OK when the action has been completed.
8. Manager can now be used to receive and edit the control unit's now defaulted security settings.
Procedure: Defaulting the Configuration and Security Settings via the Boot Loader
This process defaults the IP Office security settings and its configurations settings.
1.
WARNING: Ensure that you have a backup copy of the IP Office's configuration before performing this action.
6. Power on the control unit while repeatedly pressing the escape key until you get a Loader message. Below is an
example.
P12 Loader 2.4
CPU Revision 0x0900
8. To erase the current configuration in RAM memory enter AT-X3. A typical response is Sector Erases (Config) followed
by a series of OK responses.
9. To erase the backup configuration stored in non-volatile Flash memory enter AT-X2. A typical response if Sector 2
Erase (NV Config) followed by OK.
IP Office 403 only: If running an IP Office 403 control unit, enter AT-X4.
10.Switch power to the control unit off and then back on. Within the terminal program you should see various messages
as the control unit performs various start up tasks.
11.Close the terminal program session.
12.Manager can now be used to alter and then upload an old configuration file or receive and edit the control unit's now
defaulted configuration.
IP Office
Page 209
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
10.9.5 Erasing the Operational Software

This process should be performed from a PC with a fixed IP address, directly connected to the IP Office control unit and
with the IP Office system disconnected from any network. During the process, the control unit's IP address may default
to a value in the 192.168.42.1 to 192.168.42.10 range. If this occurs it may be necessary to amend the BOOTP entry in
Manager to match the address the system is using.
Do not perform any of the following processes unless absolutely necessary. The IP Office software can normally be
upgraded through Manager using the File | Advanced | Upgrade command.
This process erases the operational software. Before attempting this process you must know the MAC and IP
addresses of the system, plus have a backup copy of its configuration and the correct .bin file for the control unit type
and level of software.
The presence of any firewall blocking TFTP and or BOOTP will cause this process to fail.
Procedure: Erasing the Core Software via Debug

1. Run Manager. In the BOOTP entries, check that there is an entry that matches the MAC Address, IP Address and .bin
file used by the system (the first two details can be found in the Module settings in the system's configuration file).
2. If an entry is not present, create a new entry. Then close and restart Manager.
3. Under File | Preferences ensure that Manager is set to 255.255.255.255. Also check that Enable BootP Server is
checked.
4. Select View | TFTPLog.
5. Check that the required .bin file is present in Manager's working directory.
8. Arrange the program windows so that the Terminal program and Manager TFTP Log are visible at the same time.
10.Enter AT-DEBUG. The control unit should response with the time and date and then Hello> to show it is ready to
accept commands.
11.To erase the current configuration in RAM memory enter upgrade.
12.The IP Office will erase its current software and then send out a BootP request on the network for new software.
Manager will respond and start transferring the software using TFTP.
IP Office
Page 210
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

Procedure: Erasing the Core Software via the Boot Loader
1. Run Manager. In the BOOTP entries, check that there is an entry that matches the MAC Address, IP Address and .bin
file used by the system (the first two details can be found in the Module settings in the system's configuration file).
2. If an entry is not present, create a new entry. Then close and restart Manager.
3. Under File | Preferences ensure that Manager is set to 255.255.255.255. Also check that Enable BootP Server is
checked.
4. Select View | TFTPLog.
5. Check that the required .bin file is present in Manager's working directory.
8. Arrange the program windows so that the Terminal program and Manager TFTP Log are visible at the same time.
10.Power on the control unit and press the escape key every second until you get a Loader message. Below is an
example.
P12 Loader 2.4
CPU Revision 0x0900
11.Enter AT (note upper case). The control unit should respond OK.
12.Enter AT-X. The control unit should respond Multi-Sector Erase.
13.The control unit will now request the .bin file it requires from Manager. This process appears in the TFTPLog.
14.If the file transfers does not appear to be taking place, check that the IP address shown in the TFTPLog matches the
BOOTP entry. Adjust the BOOTP entry if necessary.
15.When completed the system will reboot.
IP Office
Page 211
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office
Page 212
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 11.
System Components
IP Office
Page 213
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11. System Components

11.1 Control Units
11.1.1 IP500
The slots are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right. They can be used in any order. However if the capacity for a particular
type of card is exceeded, the card in the rightmost slot will be disabled. The unit must not be used with uncovered slots.
Feature
Capacity
Maximum
Extensions
32 using base cards and 32 maximum in IP Office Standard Edition mode.

272 using expansion modules and IP phones in IP Office Profession Edition mode.
Conference
Parties
64. Silence suppression is applied to conferences with more than 10 parties.
Trunks Cards
4. Any combination of IP500 trunk daughter cards and up to 2 IP400 trunk cards.
VCM Card Slots
4. Up to a maximum of 128 channels using 2 IP500 VCM cards and or 2 IP400 VCM cards.
Voicemail
Channels
Maximum 30 usable for Voicemail Pro/TAPI WAV connection sessions (subject to available licenses).
Locales
Supported in all IP Office locales.
Software Level
IP Office core software level 4.0 minimum.

Bin file = ip500.bin.
Power Supply
Internal power supply unit.
Mounting
Free-standing, rack mounted (requires IP500 Rack Mounting Kit) or wall mounted (requires IP500
Wall Mounting Kit).
Dimensions
Width: 445mm/17.5". Depth: 365mm/14.4". Height: 73mm/2.9"/2U.

Clearance: 90mm minimum all sides, 220m at front. 500mm all side when wall mounted.
Memory
Maximum configuration file size: 1024KB.
IP Office
Page 214
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: Control Units
Ports
Description
AUDIO
3.5mm Stereo jack socket. Used for external music on hold source input.
INPUT
DC power input port.
RS232
9-Way D-Type socket. Used for system maintenance.
EXPANSION RJ45 socket. Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion Interconnect
cable supplied with the expansion module.
EXT O/P
3.5mm Stereo jack socket. Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry controls. The
port contains two independent switches controlled by the IP Office.
LAN
RJ45 sockets. These ports form a managed layer 3 Ethernet switch. The ports are full-duplex
10/100Mbps auto-sensing, MDI crossover ports.
WAN
Used for connection of a function or protective ground. Use of a ground for all systems is recommended
and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement.
Name
Description
IPO 500 Base Unit
IP Office 500 Base Unit
700417207
Smart Card Feature Key
Smart Card Feature Key (MU-Law)
700417470
Smart Card feature Key (A-Law)
700417488
CEE7/7
Europe
700289762
BS1363
United Kingdom
700289747
NEMA5-15P
America
700289770
China
China
700261977
IEC60320 C13 Earthed Power Cord
Country
SAP Code
700429202
IP500 Wall Mounting Kit
700430150
IP500 Blanking Plate Kit
700429194
IP Office
Page 215
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.1.2 IP412
The IP412 control unit supports up to 12 Expansion modules. Its LAN ports act as a managed layer 3 Ethernet switch
with optional internal firewall for traffic between the two ports.
Feature
Capacity
Maximum Extensions
360 of various types in combination. Analog only: 360. DS only: 360. IP only: 360.
Conference Parties
128 (2 banks of 64. Conferences cannot combine resources from both banks. When a
conference is started, the bank with the most free resource is used).
Trunks Cards
2 Trunk card slots. All types supported.
VCM Card Slots
2 up to maximum voice compression channels capacity of 60 channels.
Voicemail Channels
30 usable for Voicemail Pro/TAPI WAV connection sessions (subject to available licenses).
Locales
Software Level

Power Supply
The unit is supplied with an earthed 3-Pin, 60W external power supply unit. The PSU has
an integral power cord for connection to the unit's DC I/P socket. A locale specific
IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the
unit.
Older units were supplied with a 2-Pin, 40W external power supply unit which used a
locale specific locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord not supplied with the unit.
Mounting
The unit is designed as a free-standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP
Office modules. The unit can be rack mounted in a 19" rack system using the optional
IP400 Rack Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
Unboxed: 3.0Kg/6.7lbs. Boxed: 4.3Kg/9.6lbs.
Memory
IP Office
Page 216
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Ports
Description
AUDIO
DC I/P
DC power input port. Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya earthed 60W external
power supply unit supplied with the control unit.
DTE
9-Way D-Type socket. Used for system maintenance. Suitable for direct connection of IP Office Serial
Port Feature Key dongle.
EXPANSION
RJ45 socket. Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion
Interconnect cable supplied with the expansion module.
EXT O/P
3.5mm Stereo jack socket. Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry controls. The
port contains two independent switches controlled by the IP Office.
LAN
RJ45 socket. These ports form a managed layer 3 Ethernet switch. The ports are half-duplex
10/100Mbps auto-sensing, MDI crossover ports.
SLOT A
SLOT B
Used for trunk cards of all types except WAN port trunk card. Normally Slot B should be used first.
Trunks cards are supplied with replacement external blanking plates suitable for the trunk card port
connections.
WAN
37-Way D-Type socket. Used for the connection of V.24, V.35 or X.21 WAN service.
Used for connection of a function or protective ground. Use of a ground for all systems is
recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement. On older modules where this
screw is not present, the left-hand fixing screw of Slot B can be used.
All control units are available in either North America or Rest of World variants. The choice controls various default
settings of the unit. For E911 support a North American variant control unit must be used. The companding can be
changed once a unit is installed. Control units are supplied with an external power supply unit but not a locale specific
power cord.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
IP412 Office
A-Law
Rest of World
700234479
U-Law
North America
700350408
CEE7/7
Europe
700289762
BS1363
United Kingdom
700289747
NEMA5-15P
America
700289770
China
China
700261977
All
700210800
IEC60320 C13 Power Cord
IP Office
Page 217
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.1.3 IP406 V2
The IP406 V2 includes 8 digital station (DS) and 2 analog phone (PHONE) ports. It includes an eight port Ethernet LAN
switch (unmanaged Layer 2) and Compact Flash card slot for an optional embedded voicemail memory card. It supports
up to 6 external expansion modules plus IP extensions controlled through its LAN interface.
The IP406 V2 also includes automatic gain control (AGC) on its conference chip and performs IPSec tunneling through
hardware rather than software.
Feature
Capacity
Maximum Extensions
Conference Parties
64. Conference chip includes automatic gain control (AGC).
Trunks Cards
2 Trunk card slots. All types supported. Dual PRI trunk cards in Slot A only.
VCM Card Slots
Voicemail Channels
Maximum 20 usable for Voicemail Pro/TAPI WAV connection sessions (subject to available
licenses).
Locales
Software Level
IP Office core software level 2.1(27) minimum.

Bin file = ip406u.bin.
Power Supply
The unit is supplied with an earthed 3-Pin, 60W external power supply unit. The PSU has an
integral power cord for connection to the unit's DC I/P socket. A locale specific IEC60320
C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit.
Mounting
The unit is designed as a free-standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP
Office modules. The unit can be rack mounted in a 19" rack system using the optional
IP400 Rack Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
Memory
IP Office
Page 218
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Ports
Description
AUDIO
C/F TII
Type 2 Compact Flash socket. Used for optional embedded voicemail card.
DC I/P
DC power input port. Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya un-earthed 45W external
power supply unit supplied with the control unit.
DS
RJ45 socket. Digital Station port. Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones. Not suitable
for out-of-building connections.
DTE
9-Way D-Type socket. Used for system maintenance. Suitable for direct connection of IP Office
Serial Port Feature Key dongle.
EXPANSION
RJ45 socket. Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion
Interconnect cable supplied with the expansion module.
EXT O/P
3.5mm Stereo jack socket. Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry controls.
The port contains two independent switches controlled by the IP Office.
LAN
These ports form an unmanaged layer 2 Ethernet switch. The ports are full-duplex 10/100Mbps
auto-sensing, auto-MDI/MDIX.
PHONE
Used for connection of analog phones. Not suitable for out-of-building connections. Four-wire analog
phones should be connected via a master socket containing ringing capacitors.
SLOT A
SLOT B
Used for trunk cards of all types except WAN port trunk card. Normally Slot B should be used first.
Dual PRI trunk cards supported in Slot A only. Trunks cards are supplied with replacement external
blanking plates suitable for the trunk card port connections.
WAN
Used for connection of a function or protective ground. Use of a ground for all systems is
recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement.
changed once a unit is installed.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
IP406 V2 Office DS.
A-Law
Rest of World
700343536
U-Law
North America
700359946
CEE7/7
Europe
700289762
BS1363
United Kingdom
700289747
NEMA5-15P
America
700289770
China
China
700261977
All
700210800
Control units are supplied with an external power supply unit but not a locale specific power cord.
IP Office
Page 219
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.1.4 IP406 V1
This section is included for maintainer information only. This unit is not supported on IP Office 4.0 and higher.
IP406 Office control unit supports up to 180 extensions by using up to 6 Expansion modules. It includes an eight port
10/100Mbps Ethernet LAN hub. The IP406 V1 has been superseded by the IP406 V2 control unit.
Feature
Capacity
Maximum Extensions 180 of various types in combination. Analog only: 180. DS only: 180. IP only: 180.
Conference Parties
64.
Trunks Cards
2 Trunk card slots. All types supported except Dual PRI trunk cards.
VCM Card Slots
Data Channels
24 of which 20 usable for Voicemail Pro/TAPI WAV connection sessions (subject to available
Voicemail Pro Port and TAPI WAV licenses).
Locales
Software Level
IP Office core software level 2.1(27) minimum to 3.2 maximum.

Power Supply
The unit is supplied with a 2-Pin, 40W external power supply unit. The PSU has an integral
power cord for connection to the unit's DC I/P socket. A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord
for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit.
Mounting
The unit is designed as a free-standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office
modules. The unit can be rack mounted in a 19" rack system using the optional Rack Mounting
Kit.
Dimensions
Width: 445mm/17.5". Depth: 245mm/9.7". Height: 71mm/2.8".
Weight
Maximum
Configuration Size
192KB.
IP Office
Page 220
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP406 V1 Connections
Ports
Description
AUDIO
DC I/P
DC power input port. Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya earthed 60W external power
supply unit supplied with the control unit.
DTE
9-Way D-Type socket. Used for system maintenance. Suitable for direct connection of IP Office Serial Port
Feature Key dongle.
EXPANSI RJ45 Socket. Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion Interconnect
ON
EXT O/P
3.5mm Stereo jack socket. Used for switching external relay systems such as door entry controls. The port
contains two independent switches controlled by the IP Office.
LAN
These ports form an Ethernet hub. The ports are half-duplex 10/100Mbps auto-sensing. Port 8 can be
switched from MDIX standard LAN to MDI crossover operation using the UPLINK button on the control unit (In
= MDIX, Out = MDI).
SLOT A
SLOT B
WAN
Used for trunk cards of all types except Dual PRI trunk cards. Normally Slot B should be used first. Trunks
cards are supplied with replacement external blanking plates suitable for the trunk card port connections.
Used for connection of a function or protective ground. Use of a ground for all systems is recommended and
for some locales may be a regulatory requirement. On older modules where this screw is not present, the
left-hand fixing screw of Slot B can be used.
Item
IP406 V1 Office
Rack Mounting Kit
IP Office
Variant
Country
SAP Code
A-Law
Rest of World
700234461
U-Law
North America
700210776
CEE7/16
Europe
700213382
BS1363
United Kingdom
700213374
NEMA1-15
America
700213390
Korea
Korea
700254519
China
China
700314172
All
700210800
Page 221
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.1.5 IP403
This section is included for maintainer information only. This unit is not supported on IP Office 4.0 and higher.
The front panel of the IP403 control unit includes eight digital extension (DS) ports, two analog phone (POT) ports and an
eight port 10/100Mbps Ethernet LAN hub. The IP403 has been superseded by the IP406 V2 control unit. IP403 control
units with integral DT rather than DS ports are also supported up to 3.2, however use of devices on those ports is not
supported.
Feature
Capacity
Maximum Extensions 100 of various types in combination. Analog only: 92. DS only: 98. IP only: 100.
Conference Parties
64.
Trunks Cards
2 Trunk card slots. All types supported except Dual PRI trunk cards.
VCM Card Slots
Data Channels
20 of which 10 usable for Voicemail Pro/TAPI WAV connection sessions (subject to available
Voicemail Pro Port and TAPI WAV licenses).
Locales
Software Level

DT Port Support: IP Office 3.0 and higher software does not support the use of DT ports.
IP403 DT modules are supported on IP Office 3.0 but use of the integral DT ports is not
supported.
Power Supply
The unit is supplied with a 2-Pin, 40W external power supply unit. The PSU has an integral
power cord for connection to the unit's DC I/P socket. A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power
cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit.
Mounting
The unit is designed as a free-standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office
modules. The unit can be rack mounted in a 19" rack system using the optional Rack Mounting
Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
Maximum
Configuration Size
192KB.
IP Office
Page 222
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP403 Connections
Ports
Description
AUDIO
DC I/P
DS
RJ45 Socket. Digital Station port. Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones. Not suitable for
out-of-building connections.
DTE
Feature Key dongle.
EXPANSI RJ45 Socket. Used for direct connection to external expansion modules using the Expansion Interconnect
ON
EXT O/P
LAN
These ports form an Ethernet hub. The ports are half-duplex 10/100Mbps auto-sensing. Port 8 can be
switched from MDIX standard LAN to MDI crossover operation using the UPLINK button on the control unit
(In = MDIX, Out = MDI).
POT
Used for connection of analog phones. Not suitable for out-of-building connections.
SLOT A
SLOT B
Used for trunk cards of all types except Dual PRI trunk cards. Normally Slot B should be used first. Trunks
cards are supplied with replacement external blanking plates suitable for the trunk card port connections.
USB
Not used.
WAN
Used for connection of a function or protective ground. Use of a ground for all systems is recommended and
for some locales may be a regulatory requirement. On older modules where this screw is not present, the
left-hand fixing screw of Slot B can be used.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
A-Law
Rest of World
700234453
U-Law
North America
700350390
CEE7/16
Europe
700213382
BS1363
United Kingdom
700213374
NEMA1-15
America
700213390
Korea
Korea
700254519
China
China
700314172
All
700210800
IP403 Office DS
Rack Mounting Kit
IP Office
Page 223
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office
Page 224
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.1.6 Small Office Edition (SOE)

The IP Office Small Office Edition control unit shares many of the features of the other IP Office control units, however it
does not support any expansion modules. Small Office Edition control units include various numbers of integral DS,
PHONE (POT) and Analog ports.
Small Office Edition Model
Analog
Trunks
Analog
Extensions
Digital
Stations
Voice Compression
Channels
2T+4A (3 VoIP)
4T+8A (3 VoIP)
4T+4A+8DS (3 VoIP)
4T+4A+8DS (16 VoIP)
16
These models are still supported but are no longer available from Avaya. Previous models that included integral DT ports
are not supported on IP Office 3.0 or higher.
Feature
Capacity
Maximum Extensions
Conference Parties
21 with a maximum of 8 parties in any particular conference.
Trunks Cards
1 Trunk card slot for ATM4, Quad BRI, Single T1 PRI or single WAN port trunk cards.
Sections of the rear panel are removable to provide cable connection to the installed
trunk card. For the WAN port card a complete replacement back panel is provided.
VCM Card Slots
None. Either 3 or 16 voice compression channels are pre-built into the module.
Voicemail Channels
Maximum 10 usable for Voicemail Pro/TAPI WAV connection sessions (subject to

licenses).
Locales
Software Level

Bin file = ip401ng.bin.
Power Supply
The unit is supplied with a 3-Pin 45W external power supply unit. The PSU has an
integral power cord for connection to the module's DC I/P socket. A locale specific
IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the
unit.
Mounting
The unit is designed as a free-standing module that can also be wall mounted via fixing
brackets in the base.
Dimensions
Weight
Memory
IP Office
Page 225
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Ports
Description
AUDIO
ANALOG
Used for connection of external analog trunks. Loop-start only.
DC I/P
DS
Digital Station port. Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones. Not suitable for out-of-building
extensions.
DTE
Feature Key dongle.
EXT O/P
LAN
RJ45 socket. These ports form an unmanaged layer 2 Ethernet switch. The ports are full-duplex
10/100Mbps auto-sensing, auto-MDI/MDIX ports.
PCMCIA
Dual PCMCIA card slot. Used for optional Embedded Voicemail card and wireless access point card. Cards
are not hot-swappable and order of slot usage is not significant.
PHONE
RJ45 socket. Used for connection of analog phones. Intended for two-wire analog phones. For connection to
4-wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors. During power
failure, PHONE port 1 is directly connected to ANALOG trunk port 2. Not suitable for out-of-building
connections.
On some older Small Office Edition control units, these ports are labeled as POT rather than PHONE.
WAN
RJ45 socket. 10/100Mbps Ethernet LAN port. Acts as LAN2 within the configuration.
3.5mm Jack socket. Function ground point. Used for connection of a function or protective ground. Use of a
ground for all systems is recommended and for some locales may be a regulatory requirement.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
Small Office Edition 4T+4A+8DS

(3 VoIP)
A-Law
Rest of World
700280209
U-Law
North America
700350424
Small Office Edition 4T+4A+8DS

(16 VoIP)
A-Law
Rest of World
700280217
U-Law
North America
700350432
CEE7/7
Europe
700289762
BS1363
United Kingdom
700289747
NEMA5-15P
America
700289770
China
China
700261977
All
700210800
Rack Mounting Kit
IP Office
Page 226
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.2 Internal Cards

11.2.1 Modem Cards
A modem card allows the IP Office to answer incoming modem calls up to V.90. There are two variants of modem card
available:
Variants
Countr SOE
y
IP4 IP4 IP50 SAP Code

06 12
0
V2
Modem 2 Card
Provides 2 modem channels. Supported from
IP Office 1.0 onwards.
All
70018522
6
Internal Modem Card

Provides 12 modem channels except on the
IP403 where it only provides 4. Supported
from IP Office 2.1(27) onwards.
All
70034345
2
The cards are supplied with 2 plastic stand off pillars for installation.
The first analog trunk on Small Office Edition control units and on modules fitted with an ATM4 or ATM4U trunk card,
can be set to answer V.32 analog modem calls. Whilst in this mode, the trunk cannot be used for voice calls.
11.2.2 Wireless Card

This card is supported by the Small Office Edition control unit only and allows the unit to act as an 802.11b wireless
access point. The card can be inserted into either of the control units two PCMCIA slots.
These cards are not hot swappable. Removal of the card while the IP Office control unit is powered is not
recommended.
Wireless Card
Country SOE
Small Office Edition Wireless Card
All
IP406
V2
IP412 IP500 SAP Code
700289739
Use of the card requires entry of

a Small Office WiFi license
(IP400 WiFi Access Point RFA)
into the IP Office configuration.
IP Office
Page 227
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.2.3 Embedded Voicemail Memory Cards

These cards are supported on the Small Office Edition and the IP406 V2 control units. They are specially formatted
Compact Flash cards that provide embedded voicemail operation and can also be configured for basic auto-attendant
support.
Use of these cards for voicemail does not require a license.
These cards are not hot swappable. Removal of the cards while the IP Office control unit is powered may cause
lose or corruption of messages and prompts.
Variant
Countr SOE IP40 IP41 IP50 SAP

y
6
2
0 Code
V2
Uses a 64MB Compact Flash cards fitted into a PCMCIA
slot caddy. The card provides up to 10 hours storage
for compressed prompts, greetings and messages.
Operation of the card uses the one of the Small Office's
voice compression channels for each call.
All
7002897
21
IP406 V2
Uses a 512MB Compact Flash card. This card provides
up to 15 hours storage for uncompressed prompts,
greetings and messages. Operation of this card does
not require voice compression channels.
All
7003434
60
From IP Office 3.0 onwards, the prompt files for the following languages are pre-installed on the Avaya memory cards.
Danish
Finnish
Portuguese
German
French
Portuguese-Brazilian
English-UK
French-Canadian
Russian
English-US
Italian
Swedish
Spanish
Korean
Chinese - Mandarin
Spanish-Mexico
Dutch
Spanish-Argentina
Norwegian
Chinese- Cantonese (IP Office 4.2

+)
For full details of embedded voicemail setup and configuration, refer to the Embedded Voicemail Installation manual.
Memory cards in these slots can also be used for storage of files normally obtained via TFTP transfer. For example the
music-on-hold wav file and supported 4600 Series/5600 Series software files. This will however reduce storage space
for prompt and message files if embedded voicemail is being used. Non-Avaya memory cards can be used for this
function.
IP Office
Page 228
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: Internal Cards
11.2.4 Voice Compression Modules

VCM's are optional cards that can be installed inside all IP Office system control units except the Small Office Edition.
Each VCM provides a number of voice compression channels, indicated by a number suffix. For example, a VCM 8 has 8
voice compression channels.
Small Office Edition control units have either 3 or 16 built in voice compression channels with 40mms echo
cancellation.
VCM Cards
25ms echo cancellation.
64ms echo cancellation.
SAP Code
VCM5*
700185119
VCM10*
700185127
VCM20*
700185135
VCM30
700293939
VCM4
700359854
VCM8
700359862
VCM16
700359870
VCM24
700359888
Number of VCM cards.

Small Office
Edition
IP406 V2
IP412
IP500
3/16
30
60
128
Support for VCM 20 on IP403 was added at IP Office 1.3

*These modules are still supported on some systems but are no longer available from Avaya.
For the IP500 control unit an IP500 Carrier Card is required, up to a maximum of 2 carrier cards. Channels can also be
added using up to 2 IP500 VCM base cards with VCM licenses.
IP Office
Page 229
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.3 IP400 Trunks Cards

11.3.1 Analog Trunk Card Uni (ATM4U)
This card supersedes the previous Analog Trunk cards and is referred to as the "ATM4U". It can be identified by a label
on the base of the card.
The card is supported on IP Office software 2.1(36) and higher. Unlike the previous ATM4 card, the same ATM4U card
variant can be used in all locales.
For systems running IP Office software 3.1 or higher, the echo cancellation used on each trunk can be switched off or on
(16ms).
The card provides 4 RJ45 sockets for analog trunk connections. The card only supports loop-start trunks. For groundstart trunks an Analog Trunk expansion module should be used.
Power Failure Operation
There are no power failure extension connections provided for the analog trunk card. If this is a requirement, the
ATM16 expansion module should be used.
WARNING
In all IP Office installations, any module or control unit using analog trunk connections must be connected to a
functional earth.
WARNING
Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk, any module or control unit using analog trunk
connections must be connected to a protective ground and to surge protection equipment.
ATM4U Trunk Card
ATM4 Uni (Loop-Start)
Country
SAP Code
All
700359938
SOE
IP406 IP412
V2
IP500
The card include two plastic stand off pillars for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of IP400
control units.
For the IP500 control unit an IP500 Carrier Card is required, up to a maximum of 2 carrier cards.
IP Office
Page 230
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: IP400 Trunks Cards
11.3.2 Analog Trunk Cards (ATM4)

The Analog Trunk card is also referred to as the "ATM4". It provides 4 RJ45 sockets for analog trunk connections. The
card only supports loop-start trunks.
The card is available in a number of locale specific variants as detailed below.
Power Failure Operation
There are no power failure extension connections provided for the analog trunk card.
WARNING
In all IP Office installations, any module or control unit using analog trunk connections must be connected to a
functional earth.
WARNING
Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk, any module or control unit using analog trunk
connections must be connected to a protective ground and to surge protection equipment.
ATM4 Trunk Cards
Country
SAP Code
IP400 Analog 4 (LoopStart)
North and South

America
700185192
IP400 Analog 4 EU
(Loop-Start)
Europe
700241672
IP400 Analog 4 NZ
(Loop-Start)
New Zealand
700241706
SOE
IP406 IP412 IP500

V2
These cards include two plastic stand off pillars for installation and a replacement blanking plate for the rear of IP400
control units.
11.3.3 BRI Trunk Cards

The BRI trunk card is also referred to as the "Quad BRI". It provides 4 RJ45 sockets for ETSI BRI trunk connections, with
each trunk supporting 2B+D channels.
The trunk card ports include 100 ohm termination.
Variant
Country
IP400 BRI
All
IP400 BRI 8 (UNI)
All except China
SAP Code
SOE
IP406
V2
IP412
IP500
700185168
700262017
control units.
IP Office
Page 231
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.3.4 T1 PRI Trunk Cards

These trunk cards support 23B+D primary rate (US PRI) trunks and 24B T1 robbed-bit trunks. The mode of operation is
selected within the IP Office configuration.
The T1 PRI card includes an integral CSU/DSU that can be activated through the IP Office Monitor application.
PRI Trunk Cards
Country
SAP Code
IP400 PRI 24 T1
North America
700185200
IP400 PRI 48 T1
North America
700185218
SOE
IP406
V2
IP412
IP500
control units.
For dual port cards the IP406 V2 only supports a single dual card in Slot A.
11.3.5 E1 PRI Trunk Cards

These cards support primary rate trunks providing 30B+D channels.
E1 PRI trunk Cards
Country
SAP Code
IP400 PRI 30 E1 (1.4) All except China and

CALA.
700272461
IP400 PRI 60 E1
700185184
All except China and

CALA.
SOE
IP406
V2
IP412
IP500
control units.
IP Office
Page 232
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: IP400 Trunks Cards
11.3.6 WAN Trunk Card

This trunk card provides a single 37-way D-type WAN port.
WAN Cards
IP400 WAN Expansion
Country
SAP Code
All
700289713
SOE
IP406
V2
IP412
IP500
The card is supplied with two plastic stand off pillars for installation and a replacement rear panel for the Small Office
Edition control unit.
11.3.7 E1R2 PRI Trunk Cards

These cards support E1 trunks with R2 signalling. Each trunk provides up to 30B+D channels.
E1R2 PRI trunk cards are available with either RJ45 or coaxial cable connectors.
E1R2PRI trunk Cards
IP400 PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45
Country
SAP Code
CALA, Korea, China
700241631
IP400 PRI 30 E1R2 COAX
SOE
IP406 IP412 IP500

V2
700241649
CALA
700241656
700241664
control units.
For E1R2 coaxial card, a ground-jumper cable and coaxial connector locking rings are included.
E1R2 coax trunk cards must be grounded correctly and require the IP Office control unit to be connected to a protective
ground. Normally the ends of one connection is grounded. For example, if the exchange Tx1 is grounded, the IP Office
Rx1 should also be grounded. However this must be confirmed with the line provider to establish which ends they want
grounded.
1. Connect the ground strap spade end (B) supplied with the card to the spade connection on the card and the other end
(C) to the chassis with the long securing screw also supplied with the card.
2. Use the two jumpers supplied with the card, match the ground selection of the line provider. For example, if the line
provider has grounded their Tx1, place a jumper across the two Rx1 pins of jumper block J6.
IP Office
Page 233
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.4 IP500 Base Cards

11.4.1 Legacy Card Carrier
The IP500 Legacy Card Carrier base card can be used to fit IP Office IP400 cards into the IP500 control unit. This can
include IP400 trunk and IP400 VCM cards. Up to 2 Legacy Card Carrier cards are supported in an IP500 control unit.
Maximum per IP500 Control Unit: 2.
IP500 Daughter Card Support:
IP400 Card Support:

PRI T1
BRI-8 (UNI)
Dual PRI T1
PRI 30 E1 (1.4)
VCM 4
Dual PRI E1
VCM 8
PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45
VCM 16
Dual PRI E1R2 RJ45
VCM 24
VCM 30
Cards not listed are not supported.

Name
Description
SAP Code
IPO 500 Carrier Card
IP Office 500 Carrier Card
700417215
Panels on the front of the carrier card can be snapped off to match the
port connects when fitting an IP500 trunk card.
IP Office
Page 234
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: IP500 Base Cards
11.4.2 VCM
This type of card is used to add voice compression channels to the IP500 control unit. Those channels are used for VoIP
calls including IP extensions and or IP trunks.
The IP500 VCM card is available in two variants; 32 channels and 64 channels. Each card provides 4 unlicensed VCM
channels. Additional channels are enabled through the use of IP500 VCM licenses.
The IP500 control unit supports up to 128 voice compression channels, using IP500 VCM cards and or IP400 VCM cards
on an IP500 carrier card.
Both cards have 4 RJ45 ports for that are used for connections when an IP500 daughter card is fitted.
Codecs: G.711, G729a and G.723 with 64ms echo cancellation.
1.
The maximum number of simultaneous channels useable on an

IP500 VCM base card is affected by the codec being used. The
following table assumes that all calls using the VCM use the same
codec.
Codec
IP500 VCM32
IP500 VCM64
G.711
32
64
G.729a
30
60
G.723
22
44
LEDs 1 to 8 are unlabelled. They are used to indicate voice compression channel usage. Each LED lit represents 12.5%
of the available voice compression channel capacity in use (total card capacity rather than licensed capacity).
LED1 is used for general card status. Flash every 5 seconds = Okay.
LED use depends daughter card type:
IP500 Analog Trunk Card.
IP500 BRI Trunk Card.
IP500 PRI Trunk Card.
Name
Description
SAP Code
IPO 500 MC VCM 32
IP Office 500 Media Card Voice Coding Module 32
700417389
IPO 500 MC VCM 64
IP Office 500 Media Card Voice Coding Module 64
700417397
IPO LIC IP500 VCM LIC 4 CH
IP500 Addition VCM Channels License: 4 Channels
202961
202962
202963
202964
202965
IP Office
Page 235
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.4.3 Digital Station

This card is used to add digital station (DS) extension ports to the IP500 control unit. It provides 8 RJ45 DS extension
ports for use with Avaya digital phones not including IP phones. A further 4 RJ45 ports are provided for trunk connections
when an IP500 trunk card is fitted to this card.
Provides 8 DS ports for digital stations supported (except 4406D,
4412D and 4424D).
Digital Station Ports (1-8)
1.

Green On - Phone detected.
Red On - Error
LED 9 is also used for daughter card

status. Flash every 5 seconds =
Okay.
Name
Description
SAP Code
IPO 500 Extn Card Dgtl Sta 8
IP Office 500 Extension Card Digital Station 8
700417330
IP Office
Page 236
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: IP500 Base Cards
11.4.4 Analog Phone

This card is used to add analog phone extension ports to the IP500 control unit. It is available in two variants, providing
either 2 or 8 analog extension ports.
The cards have 8 RJ45 extension ports for use with analog phone devices. A further 4 RJ45 ports are provided for trunk
connections when an IP500 trunk card is fitted to this card.
Provides either 8 or 2 analog phone ports depending on card variant:
Supports ICLID modes DTMFA, DTMFC, DTMFD, FSK and UK20.
REN 2 (1 for external bell device).
Off-Hook current: 25mA
Ring Voltage: 40V.
1.
The Analog Phone 8 provides a power fail port when fitted with an
IP500 Analog Trunk daughter card. During power failure extension
port 8 is connected to the analog trunk port 12.
Intended for connection to two-wire analog phones, the ports do not
include a ringing capacitor. For connection to 4-wire analog phones,
connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors.
Analog Extension Ports (1-8)

LED1 only is used.
Red On - Error
LED 9 is also used for daughter card

status. Flash every 5 seconds =
Okay.
Name
Description
SAP Code
IPO 500 Extn Card Phone 2
IP Office 500 Extension Card Phone 2
700431778
700417231
IP Office
Page 237
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.5 IP500 Daughter Cards

11.5.1 Analog Trunk Card
This card can be added to an IP500 base card to provide that card with support for 4 loop-start analog trunks. This card
can be fitted to any IP500 base card except the IP500 Carrier base card.
Ports/Channels
4 Loop-start analog trunk ports. Connections via the host IP500 base card.
DTMF, ICLID, Busy tone detection.
Over-voltage and lightning protection (may still require additional
protection equipment see Lightning Protection/Out-of-Building
Connections.
DTMF and LD dialing.
Adjustable echo cancellation (default 16ms). Selectable to Off, 8, 16, 32,
64 and 128 milliseconds.
Power Fail Port when fitted to an IP500 Analog Phone 8 base card.
During power failure extension port 8 is connected to the analog trunk
port 12.
License: No license required. Supported by IP Office Standard and IP Office
Professional Edition modes.
IP Office Software Level: 4.0+.

The LED's for ports 9 to 12 of the IP500 base card are used as follows::
Green on: Card fitted.
Name
Description
SAP Code
IPO 500 Trnk Anlg 4 Uni
IP Office 500 Trunk Card Analog 4 Universal
700417405
IP Office
Page 238
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: IP500 Daughter Cards
11.5.2 BRI Trunk Cards

This card can be added to an IP500 base card to provide that card with support for BRI-To trunks. This card can be fitted
to any IP500 base card except the IP500 Carrier base card.
The card is available in 8 channel (4 physical trunks) or 4 channel (2 physical trunks) variants.
Ports/Channels
2 or 4 BRI trunk ports. Connections via ports 9 to 12 of the host IP500
base card.
Each trunk port supports 2B+D channels.
ETSI or AusTS013 basic rate protocol set through the IP Office
configuration.
License: No license required. Supported by IP Office Standard and IP Office
Professional Edition modes.
IP Office Software Level: 4.0+.
S-Bus Connection: On IP Office 4.2+ systems, the card can be switched
from To trunk mode to So mode. This mode requires additional terminating
resistors and an ISDN crossover cable connection, see BRI Port (So).
This card is approved for use in the following countries:
Brazil.
New Zealand.
China.
Russia.
India.
South Africa.
Argentina.
United Arab Emirates (UAE).
Australia.
European Union (EU).

The LED's for ports 9 to 12 of the IP500 base card are used as follows:
Off: No trunk present.
Green on: Trunk present.
Name
Description
SAP Code
IPO 500 Trnk BRI 4 Uni
IP Office 500 Trunk Card Basic Rate 4 Universal
700417413
IP Office 500 Trunk Card Basic Rate 8 Universal
700417421
IP0 IP500 BRI S0 CONVTR IP500 BRI So Converter Cable

CBL
IP Office
700458649
Page 239
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.5.3 PRI Trunk Cards

This card can be added to an IP500 base card to provide that card with support for PRI trunks. This card can be fitted to
any IP500 base card except the IP500 Carrier base card. The card is available in single port or dual port variants.
Ports/Channels
1 or 2 PRI trunk ports. Each port supports the following PRI line types. On
dual port cards both ports will be the same line type. The line type
selection can be changed using IP Office Manager.
E1 PRI (30B+D channels per port).
E1R2 PRI (30B channels per port).
T1 robbed bit (24B channels per port) or T1 PRI (23B+D channels
per port).
When installed in IP500 with a U-Law Feature Key dongle, the card will
default T1 PRI mode. When installed in an IP500 with an A-Law
Feature Key dongle the card will default to E1 PRI mode. The required
mode can be selected within IP Office Manager by right-clicking on the
line icon and selecting Change Universal PRI Card Line Type and
then selecting the required line type.
Physical trunk connection is via ports 9 and 10 of the host IP500 base
card.
Port 11 and 12 can be used as test points for connection of test and
monitoring equipment for the adjacent port.
Licenses
The IP Office system supports 8 unlicensed B-channels on each IP500 PRIU port fitted. Additional B-channels, up to the capacity of ports installed
and PRI mode selected require IP500 Universal PRI (Additional
Channels) licenses added to the configuration. These additional channels
consume the licenses based on which additional channels are configured as
in-service from port 9 of slot 1 upwards. D-channels are not affected by
licensing.
Software Level: 4.1+.

The LED's for ports 9 to 12 of the IP500 base card are used as follows:
Off: No trunk present.
Green on: Trunk present.
Red/Green Fast Flash (port 9) or Green Fast Flash (port 10):
Alarm indication signal (AIS) from the trunk remote end.
Red with Green Blink (port 9) or Green Blink (port 10):
Port in loopback mode (set through IP Office System Monitor).
Name
Description
SAP Code
IPO 500 TRNK PRI 1 UNI
IP Office 500 Trunk Card Primary Rate 1 Universal
700417439
IPO 500 TRNK PRI 2 UNI
IP Office 500 Trunk Card Primary Rate 2 Universal
700417462
IP Office
Page 240
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: IP500 Daughter Cards
11.6 IP400 Expansion Modules

11.6.1 Analog Trunk 16
The IP400 Analog Trunk module (also known as the ATM16) is used to add 16 additional analog trunks to an IP Office
system. The module supports both loop-start and, with suitable grounding, ground-start trunks.
IMPORTANT
In all IP Office installations, any module being used for analog trunk connections must be connected to a functional
earth.
WARNING
Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk, any module using analog trunk connections must
be connected to a protective ground and to surge protection equipment.
Feature
Details
Supported on
All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition. Use on the IP Office 500 control unit
requires the unit to be configured with an IP500 Upgrade Standard to Professional license.
Locales
Specific variants are provided for different IP Office locales, see below.
Software Level
IP Office core software level 1.0 minimum. Bin file = naatm16.bin.
Included
Power supply unit (see below) and Expansion Interconnect cable.
Power Supply
The module is supplied with a 2-pin, 40W external power supply unit. The PSU has an integral
power cord for connection to the module's DC I/P socket. A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power
cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module.
Mounting
The module is designed as a free-standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP
Office modules. The module can be rack mounted in a 19" rack system using the optional IP400
Rack Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
IP Office
Page 241
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Ports
Description
ANALOG
RJ45 socket. Used for connection to analog trunks. Ports can be configured as either loop-start or
ground-start trunks through the IP Office configuration.
In the event of power failure, Analog ports 1 and 2 are directly connected to analog extension ports
PF1 and PF2 respectively. If used the connected phones must be clearly labeled as power failure
devices. This is only supported for loop-start analog trunks.
DC I/P
DC power input port. Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 40W external power
supply unit supplied with the expansion module. A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the
external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module.
DTE
25-Way D-Type socket. For Avaya use only.
EXPANSION
RJ45 Socket. Used for direct connection to an Expansion port on an IP Office control unit using the
Expansion Interconnect cable supplied with the module.
PF
RJ45 socket. Power failure analog extension ports. See Analog section above.
Ground point. Used for connection of a protective or functional ground if required. On older modules
where this screw is not present, the top-center cover screw should be used instead.
IMPORTANT
In all IP Office installations, any module being used for analog trunk connections must be
connected to a functional earth.
WARNING
Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk, any module using analog
trunk connections must be connected to a protective ground and to surge protection equipment.
All expansion modules are supplied with a base software level and should be upgraded to match the core software of the
control unit in the IP Office system.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
IP400 Analog Trunk 16
America
America
700211360
Europe
Europe
700241680
New Zealand
New Zealand
700241698
CEE7/16
Europe
700213382
BS1363
United Kingdom
700213374
NEMA1-15
America
700213390
Korea
Korea
700254519
China
China
700314172
All
700210800
Expansion modules include an external power supply unit (PSU) and an appropriate interconnect cable. They do not
include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables.
IP Office
Page 242
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: IP400 Expansion Modules
11.6.2 Digital Station V2

The IP400 Digital Station V2 (also known as DS V2) is used to add additional DS ports to an IP Office system. The DS V2
is available in 16 and 30 port variants, referred to as DS16 V2 and DS30 V2 respectively.
The DS V2 supersedes the original IP400 Digital Station, now referred to as a DS V1. The module version is indicated by
labels both the base and the rear of the module. Key changes are:
The DS ports have been rotated 180 to allow easier connection access.
The port status LED's have been moved and grouped adjacent to the ports.
The DTE serial port on the rear of the module has been changed to a 9-pin D-type socket.
The DS V2 uses an earthed 3-pin 60W external power supply unit.
Feature
Details
Supported on
Locales
Software Level
IP Office core software level 2.1(31) minimum. Bin file = nadcpV2.bin.
Included
Power Supply
The module is supplied with a Earthed 3-Pin, 60W external power supply module. The PSU has an
integral power cord for connection to the module's DC I/P socket. A locale specific IEC60320 C13
power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module.
Mounting
The module is designed as a free-standing module that can be stacked on or under other IP Office
modules. The module can be rack mounted in a 19" rack system using the optional IP400 Rack
Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
Unboxed: 3.5Kg/7.8lbs. Boxed: 4.8Kg/10.8lbs. (Based on DS30 V2)
IP Office
Page 243
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Ports
Description
DC I/P
power supply unit supplied with the expansion module. A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for
the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the module.
DS
RJ45 socket. Digital Station port. Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones.
If connected to an out-of-building extension, the connection must be made via additional IROB barrier
devices in addition to the buildings primary protection. The module must also be connected to a
protective ground.
DTE
EXPANSION
Protective Ground point. Use of a protective ground is required for all installations, see Grounding
(Earthing). Where the module is connected to analog extensions in another building, an IP Office Phone
Barrier Box V2 (101V) is required at both ends, see Lightning Protection/Out-of-Building Connections.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
IP400 Digital Station V2
16 Ports
All
700359839
30 Ports
700359847
CEE7/7
Europe
700289762
BS1363
United Kingdom
700289747
NEMA5-15P
America
700289770
China
China
700261977
All
700210800
IP Office
Page 244
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

The IP400 Digital Station module (also known as DS module) is used to add additional DS ports to an IP Office system.
The DS module is available in 16 and 30 port variants, referred to as DS16 and DS30 modules respectively. The IP400
Digital Station Module has been superseded by the IP400 Digital Station Module V2.
Feature
Details
Supported on
All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition. Use on the IP Office 500 control unit requires
the unit to be configured with an IP500 Upgrade Standard to Professional license.
Locales
Software Level
IP Office core software level 1.0 minimum. Bin file = nadcp-16.bin.
Included
Power Supply
Mounting
Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
Unboxed: 3.5Kg/7.8lbs. Boxed: 4.8Kg/10.8lbs. (Based on DS30).
IP Office
Page 245
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Digital Station Module Connections
Ports
Description
DC I/P
DS
Digital Station port. Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones.

If connected to an out-of-building extension, the connection must be made via additional IROB
barrier devices in addition to the buildings primary protection. The module must also be connected to
a protective ground.
DTE
EXPANSION
Must be connected if any out-of-building extensions are connected to this module.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
IP400 Digital Station
16 Ports
All
700184807
30 Ports
700184880
CEE7/16
Europe
700213382
BS1363
United Kingdom
700213374
NEMA1-15
America
700213390
Korea
Korea
700254519
China
China
700314172
All
700210800
IP Office
Page 246
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.6.4 Phone V2
The IP400 Phone V2 module (also known as the Phone V2 module) is used to add additional PHONE ports to an IP Office
system. PHONE ports are used for analog phones.
The Phone V2 module is available in 8, 16 and 30 port variants, referred to as the Phone 8, Phone 16 and Phone 30
respectively.
The Phone V2 module supersedes the original IP400 Phone module, now referred to as the Phone V1. The module version
is indicated by labels on both the base and the rear of the module. Key changes are:
The Phone V2 uses an earthed 3-pin 60W external power supply unit.
With IP Office 3.1, the message waiting indication (MWI) on each port can be configured for None, On, 51V Stepped,
81V, Line Reversal A or Line Reversal B. On uses the default determined by the system locale. Ports on a Phone V2
module can additionally be configured for 101V operation.
These ports do not include a ringing capacitor. Therefore for connection to 4-wire analog phones where this is a
requirement (typically the United Kingdom and New Zealand), connection should be via a Master socket containing
ringing capacitors.
The DTE serial port on the rear of the module has been changed to a 9-pin D-type socket.
Feature
Details
Supported on
Locales
Software Level
IP Office core software level 2.1(36) minimum. Bin file = dvpots.bin.
Included
Power Supply
The module is supplied with a Earthed 3-Pin, 60W external power supply unit. The PSU has an
Mounting
Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
Unboxed: 3.1Kg/6.94lbs. Boxed: 4.4Kg/9.7lbs. (Based on Phone 30 V2)
IP Office
Page 247
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Phone Module V2 Connections
Ports
Description
DC I/P
DTE
EXPANSION
PHONE
RJ45 socket. Used for connection of analog phones. Intended for two-wire analog phones. For connection
to 4-wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors.
If connected to an out-of-building extension, the connection must be made via additional IP Office
Barrier Boxes in addition to the buildings primary protection. The module must also be connected to a
protective ground.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
IP400 Phone V2
8 Ports
All
700359896
16 Ports
700359904
30 Ports
700359912
CEE7/7
Europe
700289762
BS1363
United Kingdom
700289747
NEMA5-15P
America
700289770
China
China
700261977
All
700210800
IP Office
Page 248
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.6.5 Phone
The IP400 Phone module (also known as the Phone V1 module) is used to add additional POT ports to an IP Office
system. POT ports are used for analog phones.
The Phone module is available in 8, 16 and 30 port variants, referred to as the Phone 8, Phone 16 and Phone 30
respectively. The IP400 Phone Module has been superseded by the Phone Module V2.
With IP Office 3.1 and higher, the message waiting indication (MWI) on each POT port can be configured for None, On,
51V Stepped, 81V, Line Reversal A or Line Reversal B. On uses the default determined by the system locale. POT ports
on a Phone V2 module can additionally be configured for 101V operation.
Feature
Details
Supported on
Locales
Software Level
IP Office core software level 1.0 minimum. Bin file = napots16.bin (earlier units, not supported on
IP500) or avpots16.bin (later units).
Included
Power Supply
Mounting
Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
Unboxed: 3.1Kg/6.94lbs. Boxed: 4.4Kg/9.7lbs. (Based on Phone 30 V2).
IP Office
Page 249
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Phone V1 Module Connections
Ports
Description
DC I/P
DTE
EXPANSION
POT
RJ45 socket. Used for connection of analog phones.

Barrier Box devices in addition to the buildings primary protection. The module must also be
connected to a protective ground.
Function ground point. Used for connection of a protective or functional ground if required. On older
modules where this screw is not present, the top-center cover screw should be used instead.
Must be connected if any out-of-building extensions are connected to this module.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
IP400 Phone V1
8 Ports
All
700184773
16 Ports
700184781
30 Ports
700184799
CEE7/16
Europe
700213382
BS1363
United Kingdom
700213374
NEMA1-15
America
700213390
Korea
Korea
700254519
China
China
700314172
All
700210800
IP Office
Page 250
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.6.6 So8
The So8 module is used to add ETSI BRI S0-interface ports to the IP Office system. These ports can then be used for the
connection of ISDN devices.
Feature
Details
Supported on
Locales
Software Level
IP Office core software level 1.0 minimum. Bin file = nas0-16.bin.
Included
Power Supply
integral power cord for connection to the unit's DC I/P socket. A locale specific IEC60320 C13
power cord for the external PSU is required but is not supplied with the unit.
Older units were supplied with a 2-Pin, 40W external power supply unit which used a locale
specific locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord.
Mounting
Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
IP Office
Page 251
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
So8 Module Connections
Ports
Description
BRI
RJ45 socket. Used for connection of ISDN terminal devices.

Note: These ports appear a lines within the IP Office configuration. However they cannot be used for
connection to external BRI lines.
DC I/P
DC power input port. Used for connection of the power lead from an Avaya 60W external power supply
unit supplied with the expansion module. A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power cord for the external
PSU is required but is not supplied with the module.
DTE
EXPANSION
control unit in the IP Office system. Expansion modules include an external power supply unit (PSU) and an appropriate
interconnect cable. They do not include a locale specific power cord for the external PSU or any phone extension cables.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
All
700185077
CEE7/7
Europe
700289762
BS1363
United Kingdom
700289747
NEMA5-15P
America
700289770
China
China
700261977
All
700210800
IP400 So8
IP Office
Page 252
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.6.7 WAN3 10/100

The IP400 WAN3 10/100 module can be used to add an additional 3 WAN ports to an IP Office system. These ports are
used for V.24, V.35 and X.21 WAN services.
Unlike other external expansion modules the WAN3 10/100 module connects to the IP Office control unit via LAN ports. It
has its own IP address, which is obtained by DHCP.
The WAN3 exists in two variants. The original WAN3 only supported a 10Mbps LAN connection and is not supported on IP
Office 3.2 and higher. The WAN3 has been superseded by the WAN3 10/100 which supports a 10Mbps/100Mbps LAN
connection.
Feature
Details
Supported on
All IP400 control units except Small Office Edition and IP500.
Locales
Software Level
WAN3 10/100: IP Office core software level 1.4 minimum. Bin file = ipwan3.bin.
Included
Power supply unit (see below) and LAN Interconnect cable.
Power Supply
Older units were supplied with a 2-Pin, 40W external power supply unit which used a locale
specific locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord.
Mounting
Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
IP Office
Page 253
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
WAN3 Module Connections
Ports
Description
DC I/P
DTE
EXPANSION
LAN
RJ45 socket. Used for direct connection to a LAN port on the IP Office control unit. A LAN Interconnect
cable is supplied with the module for that purpose. When connecting to an IP412 control unit a LAN
crossover cable should be used.
WAN
These ports support a single synchronous data connection, which can be X.21, V.35 or V.24/V.28. The
selection of the required interface is automatically determined from the pin-out of the cable plugged
into the WAN port. This cable must be connected before power is applied for auto detection to work.
Connection to a Digital Leased Circuit is made by connecting the WAN port on the rear of the module to
the existing Network Terminating Module (NTU) via the appropriate X.21, V.35 or V.24 cable. These
WAN ports are identical to those on the IP406 V2 and IP412 control units.
These WAN ports must be clocked externally, the IP Office does not provide a clock signal. The clock
signal is usually provided by the service provider but under some circumstances (for example laser,
microwave or baseband modems) extra provision must be made by the installer.
Item
Variant
IP400 WAN3
Country
SAP Code
All
700185028
IP400 WAN3 10/100

IP Office
700262009
CEE7/16
Europe
700289762
BS1363
United Kingdom
700289747
NEMA5-15P
America
700289770
China
China
700261977
All
700210800
Page 254
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.7 IP500 Expansion Modules

11.7.1 Analog Trunk 16
The IP500 Analog Trunk module can be used to add 16 additional analog trunks to an IP Office system. The module
supports both loop-start and, with suitable grounding, ground-start trunks. This module is currently only supported in the
US locale.
IMPORTANT
earth.
WARNING
Within areas of high lightning risk, any module using analog trunk connections must be connected to a protective
ground and to surge protection equipment (an Avaya 146G Surge Protector).
Feature
Details
Supported on
Locales
Specific variants are provided for different IP Office locales, see below.
Software Level
IP Office core software level 1.0 minimum. Bin file = naatm16.bin.
Included
Power Supply
Mounting
Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
IP Office
Page 255
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IPO 500 Analog Trunk Module Connections
Ports
Description
ANALOG
RJ45 socket. Used for connection to analog trunks. Ports can be configured as either loop-start or
ground-start trunks through the IP Office configuration.
In the event of power failure, Analog ports 1 and 2 are directly connected to analog extension ports PF1
and PF2 respectively. If used the connected phones must be clearly labeled as power failure devices.
This is only supported for loop-start analog trunks.
DC I/P
unit supplied with the expansion module. A locale specific IEC60320 C7 power cord for the external PSU
is required but is not supplied with the module.
DTE
EXPANSION
PF
RJ45 socket. Power failure analog extension ports. See Analog section above.
IMPORTANT
In all IP Office installations, any module being used for analog trunk connections must be connected
to a functional earth.
WARNING
Within areas of high lightning risk, any module using analog trunk connections must be connected to
a protective ground and to surge protection equipment.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
IPO 500 Analog Trunk 16
America
America
700449473
NEMA1-15
America
700213390
All
700429202
IP Office
Page 256
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.7.2 BRI SO8

The So8 module can be used to add ETSI BRI S0-interface ports to the IP Office system. These ports can then be used
for the connection of ISDN devices.
Feature
Details
Supported on
Locales
Software Level
IP Office core software level 1.0 minimum. Bin file = nas0-16.bin.
Included
Power Supply
Mounting
Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
IP Office
Page 257
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IPO 500 So8 Module Connections
Ports
Description
BRI
RJ45 socket. Used for connection of ISDN terminal devices.

Note: These ports appear a lines within the IP Office configuration. However they cannot be used for
connection to external BRI lines.
DC I/P
DTE
EXPANSION
Item
Variant
IPO 500 BRI So8

IP Office
Country
SAP Code
All
700449515
CEE7/7
Europe
700289762
BS1363
United Kingdom
700289747
NEMA5-15P
America
700289770
China
China
700261977
All
700429202
Page 258
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

IPO 500 Digital Station modules can be used to add additional DS ports to an IP Office system. Note that this requires
the IP Office 500 control unit to be configured with an IP500 Upgrade Standard to Professional license.
The module is available in 16 and 30 port variants, referred to as the IPO 500 Digital Station 16 and IPO 500 Digital
Station 30 respectively.
Feature
Details
Supported on All IP Office control units except Small Office Edition. Use on the IP Office 500 control unit requires the
unit to be configured with an IP500 Upgrade Standard to Professional license.
Locales
Software
Level
IP Office core software level 2.1(31) minimum. Bin file = nadcpV2.bin.
Included
Power Supply The module is supplied with a Earthed 3-Pin, 60W external power supply module. The PSU has an
integral power cord for connection to the module's DC I/P socket. A locale specific IEC60320 C13 power
Mounting
modules. The module can be rack mounted in a 19" rack system using the optional IP500 Rack Mounting
Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
Unboxed: 3.5Kg/7.8lbs. Boxed: 4.8Kg/10.8lbs. (Based on DS30 V2)
IP Office
Page 259
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IPO 500 Digital Station Connections
Ports
Description
DC I/P
DS
RJ45 socket. Digital Station port. Used for connection of IP Office supported DS phones.
If connected to an out-of-building extension, the connection must be made via additional IROB
barrier devices in addition to the buildings primary protection. The module must also be connected to
a protective ground.
DTE
EXPANSION
(Earthing). Where the module is connected to analog extensions in another building, an IP Office
Phone Barrier Box V2 (101V) is required at both ends, see Lightning Protection/Out-of-Building
Connections.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
IPO 500 Digital Station
16 Ports
All
700449499
30 Ports
700426216
CEE7/7
Europe
700289762
BS1363
United Kingdom
700289747
NEMA5-15P
America
700289770
China
China
700261977
All
700429202
IP Office
Page 260
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.7.4 Phone
IPO 500 Phone modules can be used to add additional PHONE ports to an IP Office system. Note that this requires the IP
Office 500 control unit to be configured with an IP500 Upgrade Standard to Professional license.
The module is available in 16 and 30 port variants, referred to as the IPO 500 Phone 16 and IPO 500 Phone 30
respectively.
Feature
Details
Supported on
Locales
Software Level
IP Office core software level 2.1(36) minimum. Bin file = dvpots.bin.
Included
Power Supply
The module is supplied with a Earthed 3-Pin, 60W external power supply unit. The PSU has an
Mounting
Mounting Kit.
Dimensions
Weight
Unboxed: 3.1Kg/6.94lbs. Boxed: 4.4Kg/9.7lbs. (Based on Phone 30 V2)
IP Office
Page 261
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IPO 500 Phone Connections
Ports
Description
DC I/P
DTE
EXPANSION
PHONE
RJ45 socket. Used for connection of analog phones. Intended for two-wire analog phones. For
connection to 4-wire analog phones connection should be via a master socket with ringing capacitors.
Barrier Boxes in addition to the buildings primary protection. The module must also be connected to a
protective ground.
Item
Variant
Country
SAP Code
IPO 500 Phone
16 Ports
All
700449507
30 Ports
All
700426224
CEE7/7
Europe
700289762
BS1363
United Kingdom
700289747
NEMA5-15P
America
700289770
China
China
700261977
All
700429202
IP Office
Page 262
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8 Phones
IP Office 4.2 supports the following phones and phone add-ons. Availability may be subject to local restrictions.
Digital stations connect to the IP Office via DS ports.
Series
IP Office Supported Digital Station (DS) Phones
Region
2400
2402, 2410, 2420.
Global
4400
4406D, 4412D+, 4424D+.

Not supported on the IP500 Digital Station card.
North America
5400
5402, 5410, 5420.
Global
6400
6408D, 6416D+M, 6424D+M.
Global
T3 (Upn)
T3 Compact, T3 Classic, T3 Comfort.
Europe, Middle East

and Africa
3810 Wireless phone.
North America
H323 IP Phones connect to the IP Office system via the RJ45 LAN or WAN.
Series
IP Office Supported H323 IP Phones
Region
1600
1603, 1608, 1616
Global
3600
3616, 3620, 3626, 3641, 3645 (Connect via AVPP add-on module).
4600
4601, 4602, 4602SW, 4610, 4610SW, 4620, 4620SW, 4621SW,

4625.
5600
5601, 5602, 5602SW, 5610, 5620, 5621.
Softphone
Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone application (requires Phone

Manager Pro and Phone Manager IP Audio licenses).
T3 (IP)
T3 IP Compact, T3 IP Classic, T3 IP Comfort.
Others
Other IP softphones and hardphones require entry of an IP

Endpoints license. Functionality beyond making and answering calls
is not guaranteed by Avaya.
Europe, Middle East

and Africa
Analog phones and devices connect to PHONE ports with the IP Office system. However due to the variety of analog
phones and device available no guarantee of operation is given. It is the responsibility of the IP Office installer and
maintainer to test and verify the operation of proposed analog equipment.
Series
IP Office Recommended Analog Phones
Region
6200 Series
6211, 6219, 6221.
North America
Interquartz Gemini 9330-AV, 9335-AV, 9281-AV.
Europe, Middle
East, Africa, AsiaPacific
Series
IP Office Supported DECT Phones
Region
IP DECT
3701, 3711 - Connection via IP DECT base stations.
Global
IP Office
Page 263
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.1 1603
This phone is supported with IP Office 4.2 and higher.
1603
Feature
1603
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
4.2 Q4 2008+
Programmable Buttons
Headset Socket
Handsfree Speaker/
Microphone
Message Waiting Lamp

PoE Class/Typical Idle
Power Consumption
Class 2 (4.3W)
Display
2 x 16 backlit.
Supported Add-Ons
None
Upgradeable Firmware
PC Pass-Through Port/
with Voice Priority
Fixed Telephony Function Keys

SPEAKER
MESSAGE
DROP
IP Office
HEADSET
HOLD
REDIAL
MUTE
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
VOLUME UP
VOLUME DOWN
CONTACTS
CALL LOG
MENU
Page 264
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: Phones
Item
SAP Code
1603 IP PHONE
700415540
Accessories
CAT5 Ethernet Cable (14 FT)
700383326
CAT5 Ethernet Cable (1FT)
700436710
1603 PLASTIC LABEL COVERS (10) - REPLACEMENT
700419831
1603 WEDGE STAND - REPLACEMENT
700415615
1600 SERIES HANDSET - REPLACEMENT
700427495
1600 SERIES 9' HANDSET CORD - REPLACEMENT (BLACK)
700429707
9600/1600 SERIES 25' HANDSET CORD (GREY)
700383821
Power Supply
1603 PoE adapter
700415607
Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V US
700451230
Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V UK
700451248
Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V EU
700451255
Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V Argentina
700451263
Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V Korea
700451271
Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V China
700451289
Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V Australia
700451297
Power Adapter for 1600 IP Phones 5V (3 Prong) Israel
700459795
Paper Labels
1603 PAPER DESI LABELS - PACKAGE OF 50 LABELS (8.5" x 11")
700415706
1603 PAPER DESI LABELS - PACKAGE OF 50 LABELS (A4)
700434210
IP Office
Page 265
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.2 1608
1608
Feature
1608
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
4.2 Q4 2008+
Headset Socket
Handsfree Speaker/
Microphone

PoE Class/Typical Idle
Power Consumption
Class 2 (4.7W)
Display
3 x 24 backlit.
Supported Add-Ons
None.
PC Pass-Through Port/with
Voice Priority
Fixed Function Keys

SPEAKER
MESSAGE
DROP
IP Office
HEADSET
HOLD
REDIAL
MUTE
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
VOLUME UP
CONTACTS
VOLUME DOWN
CALL LOG
MENU
Page 266
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Item
SAP Code
1608 IP PHONE
700415557
Accessories
700383326
700436710
1608 Wall Mount Kit (Includes 1ft ethernet cable)
700415623
700415664
1608 FLIP STAND - REPLACEMENT
700415714
700427495
700429707
700383821
Power Supply
1603 PoE adapter
700415607
700451230
700451248
700451255
700451263
700451271
700451289
700451297
700459795
Paper Labels
700415649
700434228
IP Office
Page 267
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.3 1616
1616
Feature
1616
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
4.2 Q4 2008+
16
Headset Socket
Handsfree Speaker/Microphone

PoE Class/Typical Idle Power
Consumption
Class 2
Display
4 x 24 Backlit.
Supported Add-Ons
BM32 x 1.
PC Pass-Through Port/with
Voice Priority
Fixed Function Keys

SPEAKER
MESSAGE
DROP
IP Office
HEADSET
HOLD
REDIAL
MUTE
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
VOLUME UP
CONTACTS
VOLUME DOWN
CALL LOG
MENU
Page 268
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Item
SAP Code
1616 IP PHONE
700415565
Accessories
700383326
700436710
700415631
1616/BM32 PLASTIC LABEL COVERS (20) REPLACEMENT
700415672
700415722
700427495
700429707
700383821
Power Supply
1603 PoE adapter
700415607
700451230
700451248
700451255
700451263
700451271
700451289
700451297
700459795
Paper Labels
1616/BM32 PAPER DESI LABELS - PACKAGE OF 50 LABELS (8.5" x 11")
700415656
1616/BM32 PAPER DESI LABELS - PACKAGE OF 50 LABELS (A4)
700434236
IP Office
Page 269
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.4 2402
In addition to the two physical programmable buttons, the
addition 12 programmable slots.
FEATURE key plus 0-9, * and # can be used to access an
On IP Office, the 2402D display is not used.

2402D
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
3.0+
Headset Socket

Display
Not used.
Supported Add-Ons
None.
Upgradable Firmware
Standard DCP Phone Keys

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
DROP
HEADSET
HOLD
REDIAL
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
IP Office
VOLUME UP
MUTE
SAP Code
2402D
Multi-Grey
700381973
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Noisy Location Handset
Dark Grey
700229743
Push to Talk Handset
Dark Grey
700229727
Page 270
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.5 2410
2410D
Feature
2410
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
3.0+
12.
(6 buttons x 2 pages).
Headset Socket

Display
29 characters x 5 lines.
(168 x 80 pixels).
Supported Add-Ons
None.
Upgradable Firmware

HEADSET
SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HOLD
DROP
REDIAL
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
IP Office
VOLUME UP
MUTE
SAP Code
2410
Multi-Grey
700381999
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
Page 271
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.6 2420
2420D
Feature
Details
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
1.4+
24 (8 buttons x 3 pages)
Headset Socket

Display
Supported Add-Ons
EU24*, 201B.
Upgradable Firmware

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HEADSET
MUTE
HOLD
DROP
TRANSFER
VOLUME UP
VOLUME DOWN
CONFERENCE
REDIAL
Variant
SAP Code
2420
Multi-Grey
700381585
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
201B Recorder Interface Module
700381635
20B Stand
700381650
EU24*
Multi-Grey
700381817
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
1151D2 Power Supply with battery

backup.
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
1151D1/1151D2 Power Cord
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
Australia/New Zealand
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
*When used with an EU24 unit, a 1151 type power supply unit must be used to power the phone.
IP Office
Page 272
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.7 3616
This is an 802.11b WiFi phone. It connects to the IP Office via a wireless access point and Avaya Voice Priority Processor
(AVPP).
3616
Feature
Detail
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
2.0+
6.
Headset Socket
Upgradable Firmware
IP Office
Variant
SAP Code
3616 Wireless Phone
700413040
Additional battery pack for 3616
700277387
Desktop charger for 3616.
700412901
Clip for 3616
700413057
3616/3626 Configuration Cradle
700375934
Page 273
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.8 3620
This is an 802.11b WiFi phone. It connects to the IP Office via a wireless access point and Avaya Voice Priority Processor
(AVPP).
The 3620 is similar to the 3616 but has been designed for use in healthcare environments. It is waterproof and has a
back lit display.
3616
Feature
Detail
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
3.2+
6.
Headset Socket
Upgradable Firmware
IP Office
Variant
SAP Code
3620 Wireless Phone
700413065
Additional battery pack.
700277387
Desktop charger.
700412901
Clip
700413057
Configuration Cradle
700375934
Page 274
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.9 3626
This phones is similar to the 3616 in functionality. However the 3626 has a ruggedized construction. This is an 802.11b
WiFi phone. It connects to the IP Office via a wireless access point and Avaya Voice Priority Processor (AVPP).
3626
Feature
Detail
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
2.0+
6.
Headset Socket
Upgradable Firmware
Variant
SAP Code
3626 Wireless Phone
700413024
700277395
Desktop charger for 3626
700412919
3626 Gang changer
700412927
Clip for 3626
700413131
3626 Vinyl case with keypad cover
700412984
3626 Carry case
Yellow
700289309
3626 Carry case with keypad cover
Black
700289317
Yellow
700289325
IP Office
700375934
Page 275
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.10 3641
The Avaya 3641 IP Wireless Telephone is a WiFi telephone that runs using H.323.
The 3641 supports the following features:

Lightweight innovative design .
Simple to use.
802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g standard-compatible.
Transmission type Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS).
FCC certification Part 15.247.
Management of telephones via DHCP and TFTP.
Voice encoding G711.
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) - 40bit and 128 bit. WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK.
5x16 character alphanumeric, plus status indicators.
4 hours talk time and 80 hours standby. Extendable with optional battery packs to 8 hours talk time and 160 hours
standby.
IP Office
Page 276
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.11 3645
The Avaya 3645 IP Wireless Telephone is a WiFi telephone that runs using H.323.
The 3645 supports the following features:

Lightweight innovative design .
Simple to use.
802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g standard-compatible.
Transmission type Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS).
FCC certification Part 15.247.
Management of telephones via DHCP and TFTP.
Voice encoding G711.
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) - 40bit and 128 bit. WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK.
5x16 character alphanumeric, plus status indicators.
4 hours talk time and 80 hours standby. Extendable with optional battery packs to 8 hours talk time and 160 hours
standby.
Can be enabled for Push-to-talk (walkie-talkie) feature for broadcast between employees.
IP Office
Page 277
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.12 3701
The 3701 is an Avaya DECT handset supported on IP Office when using Avaya IP DECT base stations.
3701
Feature
Detail
Connects via
IP network
IP Office Release
3.1+
Headset Socket

Upgradable Firmware
Variant
SAP Code
3701
700346802
Belt Clip
700346885
Phone Charger
700346828
Power Adaptor for Charger
European
700346836
UK
700346844
Australia
700378318
8-Phone Gang Charger

Power Adaptor for Rack Mount Charger
IP Office
700346851
Global
700346869
Page 278
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.13 3711
The 3711 is an Avaya DECT handset supported on IP Office when using Avaya IP DECT base stations.
3711
Feature
Detail
Connects via
IP network
IP Office Release
3.1+
Headset Socket
Upgradable Firmware
Variant
SAP Code
3711
700346810
Belt Clip
700346885
Phone Charger
700346828
European
700346836
UK
700346844
Australia
700378318
8-Phone Gang Charger

Power Adapator for Rack Mount
Charger
IP Office
700346851
Global
700346869
Page 279
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.14 3810
The phone uses a wireless 900MHz digital protocol to connect to its base station. The base station connects to an IP
Office DS port. The base station also requires a power outlet socket. Additional power outlet sockets are required for the
phone charger.
Depending on coverage overlap, between three and five 3810's can be connected to the same IP Office.
This phone is supported in North America only.
3810
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
2.1+
4.
Headset Socket

Upgradable Firmware
Item
SAP Code
3810 Set - Includes phone, base station, charger, belt clip and power supply units for charger and base
station.
700305105
IP Office
Page 280
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.15 4406
This phone is supported in North America only (A-Law only). Not supported on the IP500 Digital Station card.
4406D+
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
1.0+
Headset Socket

Display
Supported Add-Ons
None.
Upgradable Firmware

HEADSET
SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HOLD
DROP
IP Office
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
TRANSFER
VOLUME DOWN
CONFERENCE
Item
SAP Code
4406D+ (Black)
108199027
4406D+ (White)
108199019
Small 4400 Series Stand (Black)
108541194
Stand 4400 Series Stand (White)
108541202
Page 281
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.16 4412
Note: A maximum of twenty-seven 4412D telephones are supported on the IP500 DS30 expansion modules and on
IP400 DS30 (version 2) expansion module at PCS level 5. Earlier IP400 DS30 expansion modules will only support
sixteen of these telephones.
4412D+
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
1.0+
24 (12
).
/12
Headset Socket
Handsfree Speaker/
Microphone

Display
Supported Add-Ons
4450 x 2.
Upgradable Firmware

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
DROP
HEADSET
HOLD
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Item
4412D+
Large 4400 Series Stand for 4412D+/4424D+
IP Office
VOLUME DOWN
SAP Code
Black
108199050
White
108199043
Black
108541269
White
108541277
Page 282
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.17 4424
Note: A maximum of twenty-seven 4424D telephones are supported on the IP500 DS30 expansion modules and on
IP400 DS30 (version 2) expansion module at PCS level 5. Earlier IP400 DS30 expansion modules will only support
sixteen of these telephones.
4424D+
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS ports.
IP Office Release
1.0+
24
Headset Socket

Display
Supported Add-Ons
4450 x 2.

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
DROP
HEADSET
HOLD
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Item
4424D+
Large 4400 Series Stand for 4412D+/4424D+
4450 DSS Add-On
Small 4400 Series Stand for 4450.
Power Supply for 4450
IP Office
VOLUME DOWN
SAP Code
Black
108199084
White
108199076
Black
108541269
White
108541277
Black
108199696
White
108199407
Black
108541194
White
108541202
108596412
Page 283
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.18 4601
This phone requires a separate power supply, using either a Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and power cord
or an 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE) source. For RoHS compliance the 4601 has been replaced by the 4601+,
however the two phones are functionally the same.
4601+
Feature
Detail
Connects via
IP Network.
IP Office Release
3.0+
Headset Socket

PoE Class/Typical Idle Power Consumption
3.5W (Class 2)
Display
None.
Supported Add-Ons
None.
PC Pass-Through Port/with Voice Priority

HEADSET
SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HOLD
DROP
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
SAP Code
4601+
Multi-Grey
700381890
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
1151D2 Power Supply with battery backup.
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
Australia and New Zealand
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
IP Office
Page 284
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.19 4602
These phones are similar in physical appearance and functions. However the 4602SW+ includes a PC data pass-through
port which gives priority to phone traffic. The 4602IP is no longer available from Avaya.
The 4602SW+ is the RoHS compliant replacement for the 4602SW which is no longer available.
or a 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE) source.
4602/4602SW
Feature
4602IP
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
1.3+
4602SW+
Headset Socket

3.5W (Class 2)
Display
Supported Add-Ons
None.
Upgradable Firmware

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
DROP
HEADSET
VOLUME UP
MUTE
HOLD
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
REDIAL
Variant
SAP Code
4602IP
Multi-Grey
700221260
4602SW+
Multi-Grey
700381916
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
IP Office
Page 285
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.20 4610
4610SW
Feature
Detail
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
3.0+
24 (6 buttons x 4pages).
Headset Socket

4.0W (Class 2)
Display
29 characters x 5 lines
(168 x 80 pixels)
Supported Add-Ons
None.
Upgradable Firmware

HEADSET
SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HOLD
DROP
VOLUME UP
MUTE
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
REDIAL
Variant
SAP Code
4610SW
Multi-Grey
700381957
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
1151D1/1151D2 Power Cord.
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
IP Office
Page 286
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.21 4620
These phones are similar in physical appearance and functions. However the 4620SW's PC data pass-through port gives
priority to phone traffic.
4620IP/4620SW
Feature
4620IP
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
2.0+
4620SW
24 (12 buttons x 2 pages).
Headset Socket

PoE Class/Typical Idle Power
Consumption
4W (Class 3)
5.9W (Class 3)
Display
(168 x 132 pixels)
Supported Add-Ons
EU24*, EU24BL*.

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HEADSET
HOLD
DROP
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
SAP Code
4620IP
Multi-Grey
700212186
4620SW
Multi-Grey
700259674
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
EU24
Multi-Grey
700381817
EU24BL
Multi-Grey
700381544
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
*When used with an EU24 or EU24BL unit, a 1151 type power supply unit must be used to power the phone.
IP Office
Page 287
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.22 4621
The 4621 is similar in physical appearance and function to the 4620SW. However the 4621SW includes a backlight
function for the screen.
4621SW
Feature
4621SW
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
3.0(577)+
Headset Socket

5.75W (Class 2)
Display
(168 x 132 pixels)
Supported Add-Ons
EU24*, EU24BL*.

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HEADSET
MUTE
HOLD
DROP
TRANSFER
VOLUME UP
VOLUME DOWN
CONFERENCE
REDIAL
Variant
SAP Code
4621SW
Multi-Grey
700345192
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
EU24*
Multi-Grey
700381817
EU24BL*
Multi-Grey
700381544
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
1151D2 Power Supply with

battery backup.
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 288
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.23 4625
The 4625 is similar in physical appearance and function to the 4621SW. However the 4625SW includes a color display.
4625SW
Feature
4625SW
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
3.2+
Headset Socket

PoE Class/Typical Idle Power Consumption 6.45W (Class 3)
Display
(168 x 132 pixels)
Supported Add-Ons
EU24*, EU24BL*.

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HEADSET
HOLD
DROP
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
SAP Code
4625SW
Multi-Grey
700381551
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
EU24*
Multi-Grey
700381817
EU24BL*
Multi-Grey
700381544
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 289
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.24 5402
This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 2402D. However the 5402 phone is only supported on
IP Office.
In addition to the two physical programmable buttons, the
addition 12 programmable slots.
5402
FEATURE key plus 0-9, * and # can be used to access an
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
3.0+.
Headset Socket

Display
24 characters
x 2 lines.
Supported Add-Ons
None.
Upgradable Firmware

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
DROP
HEADSET
HOLD
REDIAL
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
IP Office
VOLUME UP
MUTE
SAP Code
5402
Multi-Grey
700345309
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
Page 290
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.25 5410
This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 2410. However the 5410 phone is only supported on IP
Office.
5410
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
3.0+
Headset Socket

Display
(168 x 80 pixels).
Supported Add-Ons
None.
Upgradable Firmware

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
DROP
HEADSET
HOLD
REDIAL
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
IP Office
VOLUME UP
MUTE
SAP Code
5410
Multi-Grey
700345291
5410 (RoHS compliant)
Multi-Grey
700382005
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
Page 291
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.26 5420
This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 2420. However the 5420 is only supported on IP Office.
5420D
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
3.0+
24 (8 buttons x 3 pages)
Headset Socket

Display
Supported Add-Ons
EU24*, 201B.
Upgradable Firmware

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HEADSET
HOLD
DROP
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
SAP Code
5420D
Multi-Grey
700339823
5420D (RoHS compliant)
Multi-Grey
700381627
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
700381635
20B Stand
700381650
EU24*
Multi-Grey
700381817
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
Australia/New
Zealand
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
*When used with an EU24 unit, a 1151 type power supply unit must be used to power the phone.
IP Office
Page 292
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.27 5601
This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 4601. However the 5601 phone is only supported on IP
Office. The 5601+ is the RoHS compliant version that has replaced the previous 5601 IP model but is otherwise the
same.
5601
Feature
Detail
Connects via
IP Network.
IP Office Release
3.0+
Headset Socket

3.5W (Class 2)
Display
None.
Supported Add-Ons
None.

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HEADSET
HOLD
DROP
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
SAP Code
5601IP
Multi-Grey
700345366
5601+ (RoHS compliant)
Multi-Grey
700381908
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 293
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.28 5602
The 5602IP and 5602SW phones are similar in physical appearance and functions. However the 5602SW includes a PC
data pass-through port which gives priority to phone traffic. The 5602IP is no longer available from Avaya. The 5602SW+
is the RoHS compliant version that has replaced the previous 5602SW model but is otherwise the same.
5602IP/5602SW
Feature
5602IP
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
3.0+
5602SW
Headset Socket

4.1W (Class 2)
Display
Supported Add-Ons
None.
Upgradable Firmware

HEADSET
SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HOLD
DROP
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
SAP Code
5602IP
Multi-Grey
700345341
5602SW
Multi-Grey
700381825
5602SW+ (RoHS compliant)
Multi-Grey
700381932
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
EU24
Multi-Grey
700381817
EU24BL
Multi-Grey
700381544
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 294
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.29 5610
5610
Feature
Detail
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
3.0+
24 (6 buttons x 4
pages).
Headset Socket

PoE Class/Typical Idle Power Consumption 5W (Class 2)
Display
(168 x 80 pixels)
Supported Add-Ons
None.
Upgradable Firmware

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HEADSET
HOLD
DROP
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
SAP Code
5610SW
Multi-Grey
700345333
5610SW (RoHS compliant)
Multi-Grey
700381965
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
EU24
Multi-Grey
700381817
EU24BL
Multi-Grey
700381544
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 295
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.30 5620
This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 4620SW. It is no longer available from Avaya, having
been replaced by the 5621.
5620
Feature
5620IP
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
3.0+
Headset Socket

5.9W (Class 3)
Display
(168 x 132 pixels)
Supported Add-Ons
EU24*, EU24BL*.

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
DROP
HEADSET
MUTE
HOLD
TRANSFER
VOLUME UP
VOLUME DOWN
CONFERENCE
REDIAL
Variant
SAP Code
5620IP
Multi-Grey
700339815
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
EU24*
Multi-Grey
700381817
EU24BL*
Multi-Grey
700381544
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 296
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.31 5621
This phone is similar in physical appearance and functions to the 4621SW.
5621
Feature
5620IP
Connects via
IP network.
IP Office Release
3.2+
Headset Socket

5.9W (Class 3)
Display
(168 x 132 pixels)
Supported Add-Ons
EU24*, EU24BL*.

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
DROP
HEADSET
HOLD
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
SAP Code
5621SW
Multi-Grey
700345982
5621SW (RoHS compliant)
Multi-Grey
700385982
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
EU24*
Multi-Grey
700381817
EU24BL*
Multi-Grey
700381544
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 297
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.32 6408D
These phones no longer available from Avaya.
6408D
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
1.0+.
Headset Socket

Display
Supported Add-Ons
None.
Upgradable Firmware

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
DROP
IP Office
HEADSET
HOLD
REDIAL
MUTE
TRANSFER
VOLUME UP
VOLUME DOWN
CONFERENCE
Item
SAP Code
6408D+ (Grey)
70020100
6408D+ (White)
70020092
6408 Stand (Grey)
108933169
6408 Stand (White)
108933177
Page 298
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.33 6416D
These phones no longer available from Avaya. An additional 24 programmable buttons can be added using an XM24 and
power supply unit.
6416D
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
1.0+.
16
Headset Socket

Display
Supported Add-Ons
XM24
Upgradable Firmware

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
HEADSET
HOLD
DROP
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
6416D+M
SAP Code
Grey
108807611
White
108807603
Grey
848219127
White
848219119
Grey
700406523
White
700406515
Grey
108272378
White
108272386
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
6416/6424D+M Stand
XM24
XM24 Stand
IP Office
Page 299
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.34 6424D
An additional 24 programmable buttons can be added using an XM24 and power supply unit.
6424D
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
1.0+.
24
Headset Socket

Display
Supported Add-Ons
XM24

SPEAKER
MESSAGES
DROP
HEADSET
HOLD
REDIAL
VOLUME UP
MUTE
VOLUME DOWN
TRANSFER
CONFERENCE
Variant
6424D+M
6416/6424D+M Stand
XM24
XM24 Stand
SAP Code
Grey
108807595
White
108807587
Grey
848219127
White
848219119
Grey
700406523
White
700406515
Grey
108272378
White
108272386
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700345447
With CAT5 cable.
700345454
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 300
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.35 T3 Classic
This phone is supported in Europe only (U-Law only). The T3 Classic has 2 Link ports for optional add-on T3 Headset and
or T3 DSS units (up to 2 further T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T3 DSS).
The IP Office supports T3 UPN and IP phones. It does not support T3 IPN phones. Previous restrictions against using T3
phones on systems with other types of digital stations no longer apply.
T3 Classic
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DS port.
IP Office Release
3.1+.
[Not Small
Office Edition]
4.
Headset Socket*

*Using optional T3 Headset Link unit.
Variant
Colour
SAP Code
T3 UPN Classic
Black
700380272
White
700380306
Black
700414733
White
700414725
Black
700380322
White
700380330
Black
700380348
White
700380355
T3 IP Classic
T3 DSS Unit
T3 DSS Expansion Unit
IP Office
T3 IP Power Supply Unit
700414766
AEI/Headset Link for T3 IP
700414774
Power Supply for T3 IP DSS
700414790
Headset Link for T3 UPN
700380363
Page 301
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.36 T3 Comfort
This phone is supported in Europe only (U-Law only). The T3 Classic has 2 Link ports for optional add-on T3 Headset and
or T3 DSS units (up to 2 further T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T3 DSS).
T3 Comfort
Feature
T3 Comfort
Connects via
DS ports.
IP Office Release
3.1+
[Not Small Office
Edition]
10.
Headset Socket*

Variant
Colour
SAP Code
T3 UPN Comfort
Black
700380280
White
700380314
Black
700414758
White
700414741
Black
700380322
White
700380330
Black
700380348
White
700380355
T3 IP Comfort
T3 DSS Unit
IP Office
700414766
700414774
700414790
700380363
Page 302
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.8.37 T3 Compact
This phone is supported in Europe only (U-Law only). The T3 Classic has 1 Link port for optional add-on T3 Headset or T3
DSS units (up to 2 further T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T3 DSS).
T3 Compact
Feature
T3 Compact
Connects via
DS ports.
IP Office Release
3.1+
[Not Small Office
Edition]
10.
Headset Socket

Variant
Colour
SAP Code
T3 UPN Compact
Black
700380264
White
700380298
Black
700414717
White
700414709
Black
700380322
White
700380330
Black
700380348
White
700380355
T3 IP Compact
T3 DSS Unit
IP Office
700414766
700414774
700414790
700380363
Page 303
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.9 Phone Add-Ons

11.9.1 4450
The DSS4450 works in association with the 4412D and 4424D telephones, each of which can support up to two DSS4450
adjuncts.
Each DSS4450 provides an additional 60 programmable keys with single red lamps except for the bottom two rows which
have green lamps. The DSS4450 requires an auxiliary Avaya power supply unit and must be used with the cables
supplied.
IP Office supports a maximum two 4450 units on each Digital Station expansion module, including the IP406 V2 control
unit.
This phone is not supported on the IP500 DS8 Extension Card. For the IP500 it will work on external Digital Station
Expansion Modules.
4450
IP Office
Feature
Detail
Connects via
DSS port on phone.
Supported by
4424D+
Maximum per phone
2.
Maximum per IP Office
2.
Additional requirements
4450 power supply unit on phone.
IP Office Release
1.0+
60
(50x
Item
SAP Code
4450 (Black)
108199696
4450 (White)
108199407
Small 4400 Series Stand (Black)
108541194
Small 4400 Series Stand (White)
108541202
108596412
/10x
).
Page 304
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: Phone Add-Ons
11.9.2 BM32
This add on provides an additional 32 twin-LED programmable buttons for 1616 phones. The BM32 does not require its
own power supply connection, instead it draws power from the phone to which it is connected.
Up to 1 BM32 units can be connected in a chain from a single 1616.
To support a BM32 the phone must be powered by an individual 1600 Series Power Adapter.
Up to a maximum of 16 BM32 units are supported on the whole IP Office system.
The BM32 buttons cannot be used for appearance functions such as call and line appearances.
Item
SAP Code
BM32 BUTTON MODULE
700415573
Accessories
1600 SERIES BM32 CABLE - REPLACEMENT
700415581
1600 SERIES BM32 BOND BRIDGE - REPLACEMENT
700415599
700415672
1600 SERIES BM32 FLIP STAND - REPLACEMENT
700432800
Paper Labels
700415656
700434236
IP Office
Page 305
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.9.3 EU24
Provides an additional 24 programmable buttons.
be connected to the port marked EU24 on suitable phones. Doing otherwise will cause damage to the EU24/EU24BL
and the equipment to which it is attached.
EU24
Feature
Detail
Connects via
EU24 port on phone.
Supported by
2420, 4620, 4621, 4625, 5420, 5620, 5621.
Maximum per phone
1.
8.
Additional Requirements
A 1151 Type power supply unit must be used to

power the phone.
IP Office Release
3.0+
24.
Item
SAP Code
EU24 1XU-A Expansion Module
Multi-Grey
700381817
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 306
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.9.4 EU24BL
Provides an additional 24 programmable buttons. The EU24BL is physically similar to the EU24 but includes a backlight
function that matches 4621 phone.
be connected to the port marked EU24 on suitable phones. Doing otherwise will cause damage to the EU24/EU24BL
and the equipment to which it is attached.
EU24BL
Feature
Detail
Connects via
EU24 port on phone.
Supported by
4620, 4621, 4625, 5620, 5621.
Maximum per phone
1.
8.
A 1151 Type power supply unit must be used

to power the phone.
IP Office release
3.1+.
24.
Item
SAP Code
EU24BL 2XU-A Backlighted Expansion Module
Multi-Grey
700381544
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 307
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.9.5 T3 DSS
The T3 DSS provides an additional 36 programmable keys for phones in the supported T3 series. The T3 DSS is moulded
and designed to be attached to the associated phone. Signalling is achieved by cable connection to the Link port on the
T3 phone. A further two T3 DSS units can be chained from the first T3 DSS.
Feature
Detail
Connects via
Link port on phone.
Supported by
T3 Compact, T3 Classic, T3 Comfort
Maximum per phone
3.
Maximum per DS module
-.
None.
IP Office release
3.1+.
Item
Colour
SAP Code
T3 DSS Unit
Black
700380322
White
700380330
Black
700380348
White
700380355
IP Office
36.
Page 308
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.9.6 201B RIM

The 201B Recorder Interface Module (RIM) is supported for use with 2420 and 5420 phones. It provides the phone with
a 3.5mm mini-RCA jack socket for connection of recording devices. It also provides two headset sockets which can be
used in place of the phones existing headset socket (the phone and the RIM sockets can not be used at the same time).
The 201B is the RoHS compliant replacement for the 201A. The 20B stand is the RoHS complaint replacement for the
20A stand.
To install the 201B, the phones existing stand must be removed and be replace by a 20B stand (also called the 20B
Module Adapter Base). This is an expanded stand that includes two slots, into one of which the 201B can be inserted.
However only one 201B is supported per phone.
Use of the 20B and therefore the 201B requires the phone to be powered by a 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit. Full
installation instructions are included with the 20B Stand.
Item
SAP Code
700381635
20B Stand
700381650
EU24
Multi-Grey
700381817
1151D1 Power Supply
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 309
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.9.7 XM24
Connects to the XM24 port on the base of 6416 and 6424 phones. Requires the phone to have a separate power supply
using an Avaya 1151D1 or 1151D2 power supply unit and a power outlet socket are required.
XM24
Feature
XM24
Connects via
XM24 port on phone.
Supported by
6416+, 6424+
Maximum per phone
1.
2.
1151D1 or 1151D2 PSU for phone.
IP Office Release
1.0+.
24.
Item
XM24
XM24 Stand
SAP Code
Grey
700406523
White
700406515
Grey
108272378
White
108272386
1151D1 Power Supply.
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
IP Office
Page 310
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10 Applications
This section outline the requirements for various IP Office applications. These are just outlines, for full details refer to the
specific installation manuals indicated and to the IP Office Technical Bulletins.
IP Office
Page 311
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.1 Call Status

This is a simple application that shows current calls in progress on the IP Office system. It is intended for use by IP Office
installers and maintainers. It has been replaced by the System Status Application and is included in the IP Office Admin
suite to assist with maintenance of pre-4.0 IP Office systems.
Details
CD
IP Office 4.2 User and Admin CD Set (700459332)
DVD
IP Office 4.2 Applications DVD (700459340)
IP500
Call status is not supported with IP Office 4.0 and therefore not supported on IP500 systems.
License
No license required.
PC Requirements
Minimum PC Requirements
Operating System Support
RAM
64MB
Server OS:
Hard Disk Free Space
50MB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
PIII 800MHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Celeron 3 800Mhz
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon B 65-0MHz
2000 Professional
XP Professional
Vista Business/Enterprise
Vista Ultimate
Ports
Component
Location - %ProgramFiles%\Avaya\IP Office\
Ports
Call Status
CallStatus\callstatus.exe
UDP 50798.
IP Office
Page 312
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: Applications
11.10.2 Compact Business Center (CBC)

This is a licensed application. It receives data from the IP Office Delta Server application. The CBC is able to show details
of calls handled by up to 3 selected hunt groups. It can also display details of IP Office trunk usage. The CBC retains calls
details for 31 days.
Details
CD
DVD
Compact Contact Center 5.2 DVD (700451545)
IP500
IP Office Standard Edition,
License
Compact Business Center (IP400 CBC - 171993)
IP Office Professional Edition.
PC Requirements
RAM
256MB
Server OS:
10GB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
PIII 800Mhz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Celeron 3 800Mhz
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon B 650Mhz
2000 Professional
Additional Apps:
- Delta Server
XP Professional
Required on same PC or subnet.
Vista Ultimate
Ports
Component
CBC
CCC\CBC\CBC.exe
IP Office
Ports
Page 313
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.3 Compact Contact Center (CCC)

CCC is a reporting application designed for use in call centers. It provides a range of both real-time and historical
reporting options. CCC consists of CCC Server applications that receive call information from the IP Office Delta Server,
and a number of client applications for the display of that information. CCC and its clients are controlled by a range of
licenses entered into the IP Office configuration.
The CCC server applications are listed below. Typically they are installed onto the same PC:
CCC Archiver
The Archiver manages the collection and storage of call activity information.
Wallboard Server
Wallboards provide current information on the number of calls waiting, response times and service levels.
Wallboard Manager provides the ability to control both physical wallboards and PC wallboards. The Wallboard
server must be installed on the same PC as the Delta Server.
The CCC clients are:

Call Center View (CCV):
Provides a realtime information about call center activity.
Alarm Reporter:
Provides real-time and past 7-days information on alarms that have occurred within the call center.
PC Wallboard:
The PC Wallboard allows call center agents and supervisors to display real-time call center performance
information on their Windows PC screen.
Report Manager:
Provides in depth historical reporting on calls, agents and groups.
Workforce Management:
This application allows CCC to share information with a third-party agent scheduling application - Blue Pumpkin.
Details
CD
DVD
Compact Contact Center 5.2 DVD (700451545)
IP500
License
Licensed application. See below.
Additional
IP Office
Delta Server installed.
Page 314
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
PC Requirements
Variant
RAM
XP
Pro
HD
Pentium
Celeron
AMD
CCC Server 512MB
10GB
Pentium 4
2.8GHz
1.7GHz
Athlon XP
3000+
All Athlon64
chips.
" plus VMPro 512MB
30GB*
Pentium 4
2.8GHz.
Not tested. Athlon XP 3000

+
All Athlon 64
Wallboard
Server
128MB
10GB
Pentium 3
800Mhz
Celeron 3
800Mhz
Athlon B
650MHz
Wallboard
Client
128MB*
10GB
PIII
800MHz
Celeron 3
800MHz
Athlon B
650Mhz
Vista 2000 2000

2003
Pro
Server Server
PC
Wallboard
Call Center
View (CCV)
CCC
Reporter
Any PC with Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher.
If VM Pro and CCC are run on the same server, CCC is limited to up to a maximum of 25 agents, 8 ports of VM Pro
and on Windows server operating systems only.
*For all voicemail servers, also allow 1MB per minute for messages and greeting storage.
*For Windows XP minimum RAM 256MB.
The Wallboard Server MUST reside on the same PC as the Delta Server. Any Dual Core CPU of 1.8Ghz and higher
is supported.
IP Office
Page 315
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Ports
Component
Ports
Ports
Archiver
CCC\Archiver\ArchiverSQL.exe
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
CCV
CCC\CallCentreView\CallCentreView.exe
CCC Alarm Reporter
CCC\CCVAlarmReporter\CCVAlarmReporter.exe
Wallboard DBMGR
CCC\DBMgr\DBMgr.exe
PC Wallboard
CCC\PCWallboard\PCWallboard.exe
CCC Reporter Admin
CCC\Reporting\Admin.exe
CCC Reporter
CCC\Reporting\bin\CCCReporter.exe
CCC User Access
CCC\User Access\CCCUserAccess.exe
Wallboard Server
CCC\WBServer\WbServer32.exe
IP Office
8081.
8082.
8083.
8084.
8085.
8086.
8087.
8088.
8089.
8081.
8082.
8083.
8084.
8085.
8086.
8087.
8088.
8089.
TCP 2127.
UDP 2127.
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
8081.
8082.
8083.
8084.
8085.
8086.
8087.
8088.
8089.
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
8081.
8082.
8083.
8084.
8085.
8086.
8087.
8088.
8089.
50800.
TCP 2127.
UDP 2127.
Page 316
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Licenses
License
Description
RFA Name
SAP
CCC Server Enables the CCC Server applications (Archiver and Wallboard Manager) with CCC SVR
support for 1 supervisor, reporting on 5 agents, and one PC Wallboard.
171994
This license is a pre-requisite for all the following CCC licensing.

CCC Agents Enables various numbers of additional agents (5, 10, 20, 50) for CCC
reporting.
CCC AGT
CCC
Enables additional supervisors (1, 5, 10, 20) up to the maximum of 21
Supervisors supported supervisors. Each supervisor also allows reporting on 5 agents
and one instance of a PC Wallboard.
CCC PC
Wallboards
Enables additional CCC PC Wallboards for 5, 10, 20, 50 agents.
171995
10
174469
20
174470
50
174471
CCC SUP
171996
"5
184730
" 10
10
184731
" 20
20
184732
CCC PCW
172786
" 10
10
174472
" 20
20
174473
" 50
50
174474
CCC
Spectrum
Wallboards
Enables the operation of between 4 Spectrum wallboards (not Ferrograph).

Licenses are cumulative up to a maximum of 16 wallboards.
CCC Wallboard 4
176196
Report
Viewer
Allows additional users (5, 10, 20) access to historic reports.
CCC Report
184726
10
184727
20
184728
CCC Agent
Rostering
Enables the Agent Rostering Interface for CCC which provides connection to
a 3rd party Agent Rostering package (Blue Pumpkin).
CCC
Designer
(users)
Enables CCC Report Designer, which permits a supervisor to design and

CCC Designer
customize their own reports. One license per user. Note: requires the user to
have Crystal Report Writer software.
IP Office
CCC Rostering
171997
171999
Page 317
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.4 Conference Center

This is a server application that is accessed via web browser. It allows users with a conference center password to book
conferences. Details of the people to invite to a conference can be entered and those people set to receive either an
email invite or, using IP Office Voicemail Pro, a call asking them to join the conference.
Access to the conference center for configuration and conference booking is via web browser.
Details
CD
IP Office Conference Center 4.0 (700428576)
DVD
IP500
License
Conferencing Center (IP400 Conferencing Center RFA - 182302)
Languages
English, French, German, Italian, Latin Spanish, Swedish.
PC Requirements
RAM
512MB
Server OS:
80GB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
P4 2.8GHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Not tested.
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon XP 3000+, Athlon64
2000 Professional*
Additional Apps:
- Web Browser
XP Professional
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher.
Vista Ultimate
Client PC: For conference booking and web conference access any Windows PC running Internet Explorer 6.0 or
higher.
For conversion of files to .MHT format, Microsoft Office is required on the client PC.
When IP Office Conferencing Center is installed, 5 conference slots are reserved by the IP Office control unit for its
own use (call recording, etc) and are not available to IP Office Conferencing Center or for general conference
usage.
Windows XP Professional, 2000 Professional can be used but would typically support a maximum of 10 web clients.
To support more than 10 clients a server with IIS will be required. Any Dual Core CPU of 2.4Ghz and higher is
supported.
Ports
Component
Ports
Conference Center
ECSConference\ConferenceService.exe
ALL 50801.
ALL 8089.
UDP 50791.
UDP 50795.
IP Office
Page 318
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.5 ContactStore
The Voicemail Pro can be used for manual and automatic call recording. Normally those recordings are placed into the
mailbox specified for the user or hunt group whose call is being recorded and are then treated as normal messages.
Contact Store allows those recordings to be redirected into a database on the ContactStore PC. This allows recordings to
be archived and searched separately from user messages. This application requires entry of a license into the IP Office
configuration.
User access to the Contact Store is via web browser. Internet 6.0 or higher is supported.
Details
CD
IP Office Voicemail Pro 4.2 CD's (700459357) (2nd CD contains ContactStore)
DVD
IP500
License
VMPro Recordings Administrators (IP400 ContactStore for IPO RFA - 187166)
PC Requirements
RAM
512MB
Server OS:
10GB*
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
P4 2.4GHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Not tested.
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon XP 3000+, Athlon64
2000 Professional
Additional Apps:
- Web Browser
XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
If run on the same PC as the Voicemail Pro, apart from meeting the requirements of Voicemail Pro:
ContactStore must use a separate disk partition from Voicemail Pro.
Minimum hard disk free space increases to 20GB* and Pentium processor to P4 2.8GHz minimum.
*1: For all voicemail servers, also allow 1MB per minute for messages and greeting storage.
*2: Also allow 7.2MB per hour for recordings in the Contact Store disk partition.
Recordings and data are stored in an MSDE database. This is created during installation of the Contact Store
software.
Ports
Component
Ports
Contact Store
Witness\tomcat5024\bin\tomcat5.exe
TCP 8888.
UDP 50791.
UDP 50795.
IP Office
Page 319
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.6 Delta Server

Applications such as CCC and CBC do not communicate directly with the IP Office system. They communicate across the
LAN with a PC running the IP Office Delta Server application. This application receives call information from the IP Office
systems which it then shares with other applications. The Delta Server does not require a license in the IP Office
configuration. Only one Delta Server can be used with each IP Office system.
Delta Server installs as a Windows service. Access to the application is through web browser on the PC to the address
http://localhost:8080.
Delta Server SMDR Output
The Delta server can be configured to output a call log of all calls made and received by the IP Office system. This is
called a SMDR call log. The Delta sever send these records to an SMDR file stored on the PC and which can then be
accessed by 3rd-party call logging applications. The Delta Server can also send SMDR records to a remote IP address.
Note that IP Office 4.2+ systems can send SMDR direct from the IP Office control unit to an IP address without
requiring the Delta Server application.
Details
CD
DVD
IP500
License
Languages
Brazilian Portuguese, English (UK), English (US), Dutch, French, French Canadian, Italian, Latin
Spanish, Spanish.
PC Requirements
RAM
256MB
Server OS:
10GB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
PIII 800MHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Any 1.7GHz
Client OS:
- AMD
Any 1.4GHz
2000 Professional
Additional Apps:
- Web Browser
XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
Ports
Component
Delta Server PWA
CCC\DeltaServer\DeltaServerHTTPPasswordAssistant.
exe
SMDR CR
CCC\DeltaServer\SMDRClientResponse.exe
SMDR SR
CCC\DeltaServer\SMDRServerResponse.exe
Delta Server Service V5
CCC\DeltaServer\DeltaServerService.exe
Delta Server Service Management Assistant

V5
CCC\DeltaServer\DeltaServerManagementAssistant.
exe
IP Office
Ports
TCP 8080.
UDP 50800.
Page 320
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.7 Feature Key Server

This application is required for IP Office systems where licenses are being validated against a parallel or USB port Feature
Key dongle. It must be installed on the same PC as the dongle. The application installs as a service and appears as an
icon in the PC's system tray. It has no configuration settings.
Feature key server is not required for IP Office systems with a serial port dongle attached directly to the IP Office control
unit or for IP500 systems.
Details
CD
DVD
IP500
This application is no required for the IP500.
License
PC Requirements
RAM
256MB
Server OS:
1MB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
PIII 800MHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Celeron 3 800Mhz
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon B 650MHz
2000 Professional
Additional Apps:
XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
Ports
Component
Ports
Feature Key Server
KeyServe\keyserve.exe
UDP 50800.
IP Office
Page 321
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.8 Manager
This tool is used to access all parts of the IP Office configuration. Different levels of access can be defined to control
which parts of the configuration the Manager user can view and alter. Manager is also used to upgrade the software files
used by an IP Office system. When running is also acts as a TFTP server from which some Avaya phones can request new
software.
Note that IP Office Manager's software level is always two higher than the IP Office core software with which it is release.
For example IP Office 4.0 core software is release with IP Office Manager 6.0.
IP Office Manager 6.2 is backwards compatible and can be used to manage IP Office systems running software from IP
Office 2.1 upwards.
Details
CD
DVD
IP500
Languages
English, Brazilian, Dutch, French, German, Italian, Spanish (Mexican).
License
PC Requirements
RAM
256MB
Server OS:
1GB*
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
PIII 800MHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Celeron 3 800Mhz
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon Opteron, Athlon64/XP
2000 Professional
Additional Apps:
- .NET2
XP Professional
Installed with Manager if not
already present.
Vista Ultimate
*Includes disk space required for .NET2 component.
Ports
Component
Ports
IP Office Manager
Manager\manager.exe
TCP Port 50802.

TCP Port 50804.
TCP Port 50812.
UDP Port 50798.
IP Office Upgrade Wizard
Manager\upgradewiz.exe
UDP Port 50798.
IP Office
Page 322
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.9 Monitor
Monitor (also know as System Monitor) is a tool that can show all activity on the IP Office system in great detail. As a
consequence, interpretation of Monitor traces requires a high-level of data and telephony protocol knowledge. However,
all IP Office installers and maintainers must understand how to run Monitor when necessary as Avaya may request copies
of Monitor traces to resolve support issues.
For IP Office 4.0 and higher, the System Status Application has been added to provide more easily interpreted
information than is provided by Monitor.
Two versions of Monitor are included in the IP Office Admin applications suite, one for IP Office 4.0 systems and one
for pre-4.0 IP Office systems. Care should be taken to ensure that the correct version is used when monitoring an IP
Office system.
Details
CD
DVD
IP500
Languages
English only.
License
PC Requirements
RAM
128MB
Server OS:
10GB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
PIII 800MHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Celeron 3 800Mhz
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon B 650MHz
2000 Professional
Additional Apps:
XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
Ports
Component
Ports
System Monitor
Monitor\sysmonitor.exe
UDP 50794.
IP Office
Page 323
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.10 MS-CRM
The Avaya IP Office MS-CRM component allows the IP Office system to be used to make and receive calls for users using
the Microsoft MS-CRM application.
Details
CD
DVD
Languages
English.
IP500
License
License application. See below.
PC Requirements: Server
RAM
128MB
Server OS:
10GB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
P4 2.4Ghz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Not tested.
Client OS:
- AMD
Not tested.
2000 Professional
Additional Apps:
XP Professional
- MS Dynamics CRM3.0
- IIS 5.0+.
Vista Ultimate
PC Requirements: Client
RAM
512MB
Server OS:
10GB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
P4 1.4Mhz
Client OS:
- Celeron
Not tested.
2000 Professional
- AMD
Not tested.
XP Professional
Additional Apps:
- .NET2
- IP Office TAPI 2.1
Installed by IP Office MS-CRM
software if not detected.
Vista Ultimate
Licenses
License
Description
RFA Name
SAP
MS-CRM
Enables IP Office support for MS-CRM.
IP400 Microsoft CRM Intgr
180588
IP Office
Page 324
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.11 Phone Manager

Phone Manager is an application that allows the user to control and monitor their own phone through their PC. For Avaya
phone's that support handsfree operation, Phone Manager can be used to make and answer calls. During usage, the
Phone Manager records details of calls made, answered and missed. It can also be configured to show the status of other
users on the system. Phone Manager also allows the user to access and change many of the setting stored in the IP
Office configuration that relate to their own phone operation, for example their forwarding destination numbers.
Though installed as a single set of software, that same software can operate in several modes:
Phone Manager Lite
The default mode of Phone Manager. Requires no license, this application can be installed for any IP Office user.
Phone Manager Pro
Users configured for Professional Edition mode are able to access a range of additional features. Phone manager Pro
requires entry of licenses into the IP Office system. The licenses also control the number of simultaneous Phone
Manager Pro users. The user's Phone Manager software then automatically changes from Lite mode to Professional
Edition mode.
Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone (formerly called Phone Manager iPro)
This is a PC softphone mode of Phone Manager operation. The user acts as a VoIP extension, making calls through the
speaker and microphone of their PC. This mode requires further licenses in addition to the Phone Manager Pro licenses.
Details
CD
DVD
Languages
Brazilian, Chinese (Simplified), Danish, Dutch, English, French, Finnish, German, Italian, Korean,
Latin Spanish, Norwegian, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish.
IP500
License
PC Requirements
RAM
64MB
Server OS:
160MB for Lite/1GB for Pro.
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
PIII 800MHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Celeron 3 800Mhz
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon B 650MHz
2000 Professional
Additional Apps:
XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone also requires the user PC to have a speaker and microphone installed and the
user associated with an IP extension on the IP Office.
IP Office
Page 325
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Ports
Component
Ports
Phone Manager
Phone Manager\PhoneManager.exe
UDP 50796.
UDP 50799.
Phone Manager VOIP Server
Phone Manager\iClaritySvr.exe
UDP 1719.
UDP 1720.
Licenses
License
Description
RFA Name
Phone Manager Pro

(per user)
Enables Phone Manager Pro for 1, 5, 10, 20, IP400 Phone

50, 100 or unlimited users. The user's Phone Manager Pro
Manager mode is set through the IP Office
configuration (User | Telephony | Phone
Manager Type).
Phone Manager Pro IP Enables Phone Manager Pro IP softphone

IP400 IPPRO
Audio Enabled (per
operation for a user.
user)
Note: Also requires the user to have a Phone
Manager Pro license.
IP Office
SAP
1
177468
177469
10
177470
20
177471
50
177472
100
177473
unlimited
177474
171992
174463
10
174464
20
174465
50
174466
100
174467
Page 326
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.12 SoftConsole
This is a licensed application. It is intended for telephone system operators or receptionists. Its displays details of calls
directed to the user and allows them to quickly see the status of the callers required destination and transfer the call. The
SoftConsole user is able to access a range of details about the status of users and groups on the IP Office system.
The IP Office SoftConsole works in conjunction with a physical IP Office extension phone to provide the speech
path for calls. It is not supported for use with an IP softphone.
Up to 4 simultaneous SoftConsole users can be licensed.
Details
CD
DVD
Languages
Brazilian, Chinese (Simplified), Danish, Dutch, English, French, Finnish, German, Italian, Korean,
Latin Spanish, Norwegian, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish.
IP500
License
PC Requirements
RAM
128MB
Server OS:
1GB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
PIII 800MHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Celeron 3 800Mhz
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon B 650MHz
2000 Professional
Additional Apps:
XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
Ports
Component
Ports
SoftConsole
SoftConsole\SoftConsole.exe
UDP 50799.
UDP 50796.
Licenses
License
Description
RFA Name
SAP
SoftConsole
(users)
Adds one additional SoftConsole user. A maximum of four

SoftConsole user can be licensed.
IP400 SoftConsole
171987
IP Office
Page 327
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.13 System Status Application (SSA)

This tool provides a wide range of information about the current status of an IP Office 4.0 or higher system. Its includes
available resources and components within the system. This includes details of current call in progress. Details of the
number of alarms are recorded and the time date of the most recent alarms.
When required for diagnostics escalation SSA is able to take a snap shot image of the IP Office system's status including
a copy of its current configuration.
Use of SSA requires an IP Office service user name and password that has been configured for System Status access in
the IP Office's security settings.
Details
CD
DVD
IP500
License
PC Requirements
RAM
256MB
Server OS:
1.4GB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
PIII 800MHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Celeron 3 800Mhz
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon B 650MHz
2000 Professional
Additional Apps:
- Sun Java Virtual Machine
IP Office
XP Professional
Installed with SSA if not already
present.
Vista Ultimate
Page 328
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.14 TAPI
IP Office TAPI is a client PC application that allows TAPI compliant applications to interact with the IP Office. The IP Office
TAPI software can be used in one of two modes, depended on whether it is licensed or not. The same software is installed
in either case with the licenses, if any, being entered in the IP Office system configuration.
1st Party TAPI
In this unlicensed mode the TAPI software supports control of an individual user's associated extension, allowing a
TAPI compliant application to answer (requires a phone that supports handsfree answer) and make calls.
3rd Party TAPI
In this licensed mode, TAPI software can be used to control call function on multiple user extension. This mode is
used with CTI Developer applications.
Details
CD
DVD
IP500
License
Optional. Licenses are required for 3rd party TAPI mode

operation.
PC Requirements: 1st Party TAPI

RAM
64MB
Server OS:
50MB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
PIII 800MHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Celeron 3 800Mhz
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon B 65-0MHz
2000 Professional
XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
PC Requirements: 3rd Party TAPI

RAM
64MB
Server OS:
50MB
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
PIII 800MHz
Client OS:
- Celeron
Celeron 3 800Mhz
2000 Professional
- AMD
Athlon B 65-0MHz
XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
Ports
Component
Ports
TAPI2
TAPI\tspi2w.tsp
UDP 50797.
Licenses
License
Description
RFA Name
SAP
CTI Link Pro
Enables CTI Link Pro functionality (TAPI Link Pro and DEVLink
Pro).
IP400 CTI
171988
Wave User
Allows streaming of WAV files, using TAPILink Pro, for 3rd party IP400 TAPI WAV
voice applications. This is a per user license.
IP Office
177466
Page 329
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Note that TAPI WAV calls use system data channels taken from
the same pool as used for voicemail ports. The maximum
number of simultaneous TAPI WAV user calls and voicemail
users is determined by the IP Office control unit type; Small
Office Edition = 10, IP406 = 20, IP412 = 30, IP Office 500 =
30.
IP Office
Page 330
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.15 VoiceMail Lite

This application does not require an IP Office license. It can be installed from the IP Office Administrator Applications CD
to a Windows PC on the IP Office LAN. It provides voicemail operation for all IP Office users and groups, using the PC
hard-disk to store prompts and messages. Only 4 simultaneous connections to leave or play messages are supported.
Details
CD
DVD
Languages
Chinese (Mandarin), Danish, German, Greek, English UK), English (US), Spanish, Latin Spanish,
Finnish, French, French Canadian, Hungarian, Italian, Korean, Dutch, Norwegian, Polish,
Portuguese, Brazilian, Swedish.
IP500
License
PC Requirements
RAM
256MB
Server OS:
2GB*
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
P4 1.4GHz.
2008 Server
- Celeron
Celeron 1.7GHz
Client OS:
- AMD
Any 1.4GHz
2000 Professional
*Also allow 1MB per minute for message and prompt storage.
XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
Ports
Component
Ports
Voicemail Lite
Voicemail Server\VMLite.exe
UDP 50791.
IP Office
Page 331
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.16 VoiceMail Pro

This application requires various licenses entered into the IP Office configuration to control the features it offers and the
number of simultaneous connections, up to 30 on the IP412 and IP500 control units. The operation of Voicemail Pro can
be customized to provide special services.
The Voicemail Pro software can be installed as separate Voicemail Pro client and server parts. This allows the remote
administration of the Voicemail Pro server from a PC with just the Voicemail Pro client installed. A copy of the client is
automatically installed locally with the Voicemail Pro server.
Source
CD
IP Office Voicemail Pro 4.2 CD's (700459357)

ScanSoft TTS CD's (700293921)
DVD
Languages
Chinese (Mandarin and Cantonese), Danish, German, Greek, English (UK), English (US), Spanish,
Latin Spanish, Finnish, French, French Canadian, Hungarian, Italian, Korean, Dutch, Norwegian,
Polish, Portuguese, Brazilian, Swedish.
IP500
License
See below.
The Voicemail Pro server part of the software consists of several components in addition to the core server software,
these are:
Campaigns
The Voicemail Pro can be configured to run a campaign. This consists of a series of questions for which the
Voicemail Pro records the callers answer or key presses. The resulting recordings can then be played back by
users. The web aspect of campaigns allows user to perform this playback and processing of campaign recordings
via their web browser. This requires an IIS web server to be run on the same PC as the Voicemail Pro software.
Text to Speech (TTS)
Through adding additional licenses, the Voicemail Pro is able to use the TTS functions of Windows to speak text
and numbers to callers in addition to recording prompts. This is intended mainly for scenarios where the Voicemail
Pro is obtaining text and number values from a customer database.
Integrated Messaging Service (IMS)
Both Voicemail Pro and Voicemail Lite support a feature called voicemail email to send messages or message alerts
to a users email. This however is a one-way process. IMS allows this to become a two-way process, where users
can play voicemail messages through their email mailbox or voicemail mailbox. IMS interoperates with the
customer's Exchange server and the user's Outlook.
Basic Voicemail Pro

RAM
256MB
Server OS:
2GB*
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
P4 1.4GHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Any 1.7GHz
Client OS:
- AMD
Any 1.4GHz.
2000 Professional
XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
Voicemail Pro plus UMS Web Voicemail and/or Campaigns

RAM
512MB
Server OS:
2GB*
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
P4 2.8GHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Not tested.
Client OS:
- AMD
Athlon XP 3000+, Athlon 64
2000 Professional
IP Office
Page 332
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
Both Web Campaigns and UMS Web Voicemail require the IIS web server on the voicemail server PC to be
enabled.
UMS Web Voicemail will install PHP if not detected as already installed.
UMS (IMAP or Web Voicemail) cannot be installed if IMS is installed and vice versa.
Voicemail Pro plus IMS

RAM
512MB
Server OS:
2GB*
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
P4 2.8GHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Not tested.
Client OS:
- AMD
2000 Professional
XP Professional
Non OS Applications
IMS
Microsoft Exchange 2000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Microsoft Outlook 2003
Yes
Microsoft Outlook 2007
No
Vista Ultimate
Voicemail Pro plus IVR and or TTS

Minimum PC Requirements: Basic Voicemail Pro
RAM
512MB
Server OS:
20GB*
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
P4 2.8GHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Not tested.
Client OS:
- AMD
2000 Professional
Also allow 1MB per minute for message and prompt storage.
XP Professional
*Generic TTS only. The current ScanSoft TTS provided with Voicemail
Vista Ultimate
Pro is not supported on Vista.
*
*
If the database being queried is located on the VM Pro server the query speed of the database will be affected by
the amount of memory available. Please take into account the memory requirements of the database being
queried.
Voicemail Pro plus Compact Call Center

Minimum PC Requirements: Basic Voicemail Pro
RAM
512MB
Server OS:
10GB*
2000 Server
Processor:
2003 Server
- Pentium
P4 2.8GHz
2008 Server
- Celeron
Not tested.
Client OS:
- AMD
2000 Professional
IP Office
Page 333
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Also allow 1MB per minute for message and prompt storage.
XP Professional
Vista Ultimate
VM Pro and CCC can be run on the same server up to a maximum of 25 agents, 8 ports of VM Pro. Any Dual Core
CPU of 2.4Ghz and higher is supported.
Ports
Component
Ports
Voicemail Pro Service
Voicemail Pro\VM\vmprov5svc.exe
UDP 50791.
UDP 50795.
ALL 50801.
ALL 8089.
VMPro Database
Voicemail Pro\VM\VMPDBSvc.exe
VPIM Client
Voicemail Pro\VPIMClient.exe
VMPro VPIM DBSVR
Voicemail Pro\VPIM\vpimdbsvr.exe
VMPro VPIM Receiver
Voicemail Pro\VPIM\VPIMReceiver.exe
VMPro VPIM Server
Voicemail Pro\VPIM\VPIMServer3.exe
IMS Admin
Voicemail Pro\IMS\IMSAdmin.exe
IMS Service Restart
Voicemail Pro\IMS\IMSServiceRestart.exe
IMS Gateway Service
Voicemail Pro\IMS\UMServer.exe
IMS Voice Service
Voicemail Pro\IMS\VMServer.exe
IMS Security
Voicemail Pro\VM\IMSSec.exe
IMS Client for Outlook
%ProgramFiles%\Avaya\IMS Client\UMSForm.exe
IP Office
TCP 445.
TCP 593.
UDP 445.
UDP 593
TCP 445.
TCP 593.
UDP 445.
UDP 593.
Page 334
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Licenses
License
Description
RFA Name
SAP
AUDIX Voicemail
Enables IP Office to use a remote Intuity

IP400 AUDIX
Audix or Modular Messaging for voicemail.
Does not require a local Voice Mail Pro server.
177467
Voicemail Pro (4 ports)
Enables Voicemail Pro plus 4 ports.
IP400 Voicemail Pro
171991
Additional Voicemail Pro (ports)
Adds additional ports (2, 4, 8 or 16) to an

existing Voicemail Pro, up to the maximum
number of ports supported by the IP Office
control unit type.
Maximum: Small Office Edition = 10, IP406
V2 = 20, IP412 = 30, IP500 = 30.
IP400 Voicemail
Pro
174459
174460
174461
16
174462
Networked Messaging
Enables VPNM (Voicemail Pro Networked

IP400 Networked
Messaging) functionality within Voicemail Pro. Messaging
This allows message exchange with remote
Voicemail Pro systems and Avaya Interchange
systems.
182297
Integrated Messaging
Enables IMS Pro operation with Voicemail Pro. IP400 Integrated

Enables synchronization to MS Exchange
Messaging Pro
email systems with a form within Outlook to
control voicemail playback.
171990
VMPro TTS (Scansoft)
Enables use of text to speech facilities using IP400 Avaya TTS

Avaya supplied TTS software with Voicemail
Pro. One license per simultaneous instance of
TTS usage.
182299
VMPro TTS (Generic)
Enables use of text to speech facilities using IP400 3rd Party TTS
third party TTS software with Voicemail Pro.
One license per simultaneous instance of TTS
usage.
182303
VMPro VB Script
Enables VB Script functionality with Voicemail IP400 VB Scripting

Pro.
182300
VMPro Database Interface
Enables 3rd party database support within

Voicemail Pro call flows.
182298
VMPro Recordings Administrators
Enables integration between Voicemail Pro

IP400 ContactStore for
and the Avaya Contact Store for IP Office
IPO
application. ContactStore can be run
unlicensed from the date of the first recorded
call.
187166
UMS Web Services
Enables use of UMS Web Voicemail and IMAP IPO LIC VMPRO
for users to access their mailbox. Licensed
UMS 1
UMS Web Services users who hot desk to a
remote system remain licensed against their
home IP Office system.
217880
217881
10
217882
20
217884
50
217885
IP Office
IP400 3rd Party IVR
Page 335
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.17 IP Office Ports

Most PC firewalls will request the user to allow various exceptions when a newly installed application is first run. However
this may not always be the case, especially if the firewall is located elsewhere than the user's PC.
Adding Firewall Exceptions

The file avayafw.bat can be used to open up the necessary firewall exceptions for IP Office applications. The file can be
downloaded from http://marketingtools.avaya.com/knowledgebase/tools/firewall.
It only works for:
The default Windows XP/Windows 2003 firewall.
The application must be installed for the exception to be created.
The application must be installed in the default location.
Whilst avayafw.bat only works subject to the conditions above, for other firewalls study of this file will indicate the
necessary application files and ports for which exceptions need to be created.
IP Office
Page 336
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

Ports Used
The list below details many of the IP ports used by IP Office control units and IP Office applications. Many of these are
standard ports for different IP traffic protocols.
Indicates a listening port on the IP Office control unit.
a PC running an IP Office application.
indicates a port to which the IP Office sends, for example to
* Indicates that the port and or protocol can be changed.

Port
Protocol
25*
SMTP
TCP
Email system alarms from the IP Office to SMTP server. For IP Office 4.2 also
used for Voicemail Email on Embedded Voicemail.
37
Time
UDP
Time requests from the IP Office to a Time Server (RFC868).
53
DNS
UDP
Domain Name Service responses.
67
BOOTP/DHCP
UDP
DHCP server operation.
68
BOOTP/DHCP
UDP
DHCP client operation.
69
TFTP
UDP
File requests to the IP Office.
69
TFTP
UDP
File requests by the IP Office.
161*
SNMP
UDP
From SNMP applications.
162*
SNMP Trap
UDP
To addresses set in the IP Office configuration.
500
IKE
UDP
Key exchange for IPSec protocol.
389*
LDAP
TCP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.
520
RIP
UDP
520
RIP
UDP
To and from the IP Office to other RIP devices. For RIP1 and RIP2 (RIP1
compatible) the destination address is a subnet broadcast, eg. 192.168.42.255.
For RIP2 Multicast the destination address is 224.0.0.9.
1701
L2TP
UDP
Layer 2 tunneling protocol.
1718
H.323
UDP
H.323 Discovery
1719
H.323 RAS
UDP
H.323 Status. VoIP device registering with the IP Office.
1720
H.323/H.245
UDP
H.323 Signalling. Data to a registered VoIP device.
2127
(UDP)
Function
UDP
PC Wallboard to CCC Wallboard Server.
3478
SIP
UDP
Port used for STUN requests from the IP Office to the SIP provider.
5060
SIP
UDP/
TCP*
SIP Line Signalling
8080
HTTP
TCP
Browser access to the Delta Server application.
8089
Enconf
UDP
From the IP Office to the Conferencing Center Server Service. User access to the
conference center is direct via HTTP sessions.
8888
HTTP
TCP
Browser access to the IP Office ContactStore (VRL) application.
49152
to
53247
*
RTP/RTCP
UDP
Dynamically allocated ports used during VoIP calls for RTP and RTCP traffic. The
port range can be adjusted through the System | Gatekeeper tab.
50791
IPO Voicemail
UDP
To voicemail server address.
50793
IPO Solo
Voicemail
UDP
From IP Office TAPI PC with Wave drive user support.
50794
IPO Monitor
UDP
From the IP Office Monitor application.
50795
IPO Voice
Networking
UDP
Small Community Network signalling (AVRIP) and BLF updates. Each system does
a broadcast every 30 seconds. BLF updates are sent required up a maximum of
every 0.5 seconds.
50796
IPO PCPartner UDP
From an IP Office application (for example Phone Manager or SoftConsole). Used

to initiate a session between the IP Office and the application.
50797
IPO TAPI
UDP
From an IP Office TAPI user PC.
50798
(UDP)
UDP
IP Office Manager and UpgradeWizard
50799
IPO BLF
UDP
Broadcast to the IP Office LAN and the first 10 IP addresses registered from other
subnets.
50800
IPO License
Dongle
UDP
To the License Server IP Address set in the IP Office configuration.
50801
EConf
UDP
Conference Center Service to IP Office.
50802
Discovery
TCP
IP Office discovery from Manager.
50804
*
HTTP
TCP
IP Office configuration settings access.
50805
*
HTTPS
TCP
TLS Secure "
IP Office
Page 337
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Port
Protocol
Function
50808
*
HTTP
TCP
IP Office system status access.
50812
*
HTTP
TCP
IP Office security settings access.
50813
*
HTTPS
TCP
TLS Secure "
CDR/SMDR from the IP Office is sent to the port number and IP address defined during configuration and using either
TCP or UDP as selected.
IP Office
Page 338
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

Ports
IP Office Monitor can be used to display IP packet details including the source and destination Port numbers. As well as
displaying the port numbers (in decimal), IP Office Monitor also displays the names of more commonly used ports
including IP Office specific ports.
For example "src = 23" is interpreted as "src = 23 (Telnet)".
The list below details the ports currently decoded by IP Office Monitor. For a full list of assigned non-IP Office ports see
http://www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers.
20 File Transfer [Default Data]
156 SQL Service
21 File Transfer [Control]
161 SNMP
23 Telnet
162 SNMPTRAP
25 Simple Mail Transfer
179 Border Gateway Protocol
37 Time
1719 H.323Ras
43 Who Is
1720 H.323/H.245
53 Domain Name Server
50791 IPO Voicemail
67 Bootstrap Protocol Server
50792 IPO Network DTE
68 Bootstrap Protocol Client
50793 IPO Solo Voicemail (i.e. Wave driver for TAPI)
69 Trivial File Transfer
50794 IPO Monitor
70 Gopher
50795 IPO Voice Networking
79 Finger
50796 IPO PCPartner
80 World Wide Web-HTTP
50797 IPO TAPI
115 Simple File Transfer Protocol
50798 IPO Who-Is response
123 Network Time Protocol
50799 IPO BLF
137 NETBIOS Name Service
50800 IPO License Dongle
138 NETBIOS Datagram Service
50801 EConf
139 NETBIOS Session Service
Protocols
IP Office Monitor, as well as displaying the Protocol number (in decimal) of packets, also displays the names of the more
common Protocols. For example "pcol = 1" is decoded as "pcol = 1 (ICMP)".
Protocol numbers currently decoded by IP Office Monitor are:
1 - Internet Control Message [ICMP]
2 - Internet Group Management [IGMP]
6 - Transmission Control [TCP]
8 - Exterior Gateway Protocol [EGP]
9 - Interior Gateway Protocol [IGP]
17 - User Datagram [UDP]
41 - Ipv6 [IPV6]
46 - Reservation Protocol [RSVP]
47 - General Routing Encapsulation [GRE]
58 - ICMP for IPv6 [IPv6-ICMP]
111 - IPX in IP[IPX-In-IP]
115 - Layer Two Tunneling Protocol [L2TP]
121 - Simple Message Protocol [SMP]
IP Office
Page 339
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.10.18 Operating System Summary

The following table gives a summary of the operating systems on which the IP Office applications that are part of the IP
Office 4.2 release have been tested and therefore are supported. While the applications may function of other operating
systems, they will not have been tested by Avaya and so any faults reported will not be fixed.
Refer to the sections on the individual application for full details of operating system requirements and minimum PC
requirements.
IP Office Application
Server
2000
Client
2003
2008
2000
Pro
XP
Pro
Vista
Business/
Enterprise
Ultimate
Call Status
Compact Business Center
Compact Contact Center: Server
": Wallboard Server
": Wallboard Client
": PC Wallboard
": Call Center View
": CCC Reporter
Conference Center
ContactStore
Delta Server
Feature Key Server
Manager
Monitor
MS-CRM: Server
MS-CRM: Client
Phone Manager Lite
Phone Manager Pro
Phone Manager Pro PC Softphone
SoftConsole
TAPI: (1st Party)
": (3rd Party/WAV)
Voicemail Lite
Voicemail Pro: Basic
": plus IMS
": plus UMS Web Voicemail and or Campaigns
1. Microsoft Windows 95, 98, ME, and NT4 operating systems have not been supported for IP Office applications for
several releases. While the applications may function of these operating systems, they have not been tested with
IP Office 4.2 and any faults reported will not be fixed.
2. The Vista operating systems Vista Home Basic and Vista Home Premium are not supported.
3. For IP Office 4.2, Windows 2000 operating systems are no longer supported.
4. Currently only 32-bit versions of operating systems are supported for IP Office applications.
Non OS Applications6
CCC V5 Reporter
& Database
Conf. Center
Client
Internet Explorer 6
Yes
Yes
Internet Explorer 7
Microsoft MSDE 2000
IP Office
Conference
Center Database
Contact Store
Database
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 340
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office Applications Operating System/Service Pack Support Policy

When a new PC Operating System or Service Pack is released by Microsoft, Avaya will aim to support the new OS or
Service Pack within 6 months of release. This time is required to re-certify the applications through the Software
Verification and Field Trial programs. Support will then be announced in a Technical Tip or Bulletin.
IP Office
Page 341
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.11 Licence Keys

License shows the name as it appears in the IP Office configuration. RFA Name is the name used for the orderable item.
License
Description
RFA Name
SAP
Advanced Small
This license is used to enable remote hot desking, advertising
Community Networking hunt groups and distributed hunt groups within a Small
Community Network.
For remote hot desking a license is required on the
system to which a user hot desks.
For distributed and advertised hunt groups a license is
required on each system.
IPO LIC ADVANCED

NTWKG
202966
SIP Trunk Channels
IPO LIC SIP

TRNK RFA
202967
202968
10
202969
20
202970
171989
16
174457
24
174458
These licenses are used to configure the maximum number of

simultaneous SIP trunk calls supported.
DECT Integration
(ports)
Enables enhanced DECT integration with the IP Office system.

Used with Compact DECT and DECT DCU. Not used with Avaya
IP DECT.
IP400 CTI
DECT
Conferencing Center
Enables the IP Office Conferencing Center application.
IP400 Conferencing
Center
182302
SoftConsole (users)
Adds one additional SoftConsole user. A maximum of four

SoftConsole user can be licensed.
IP400 SoftConsole
171987
Compact Business
Center
Enables the CBC application for one user.
IP400 CBC
171993

WiFi
Enables use of the wireless card with the Small Office Edition
control unit.
IP400 Access Point
182197
Microsoft CRM
Integration (users)
Allows operation between IP Office and MS-CRM server and

clients.
IP400 Microsoft CRM

Intgr
180588
IPSec Tunneling
Enables the IP Office to initiate and terminate IPSec and L2TP

tunnels.
IP400 IPSec VPN
182301
Mobility Features
Enables the use of the IP Office 3.2+ mobile twinning features. Mobile
For IP Office 4.2+, the Mobile Twinning license is now called Twinning
the Mobility Features license, reflecting the fact that it can
be used for Mobile Call Control and one-X Mobile Client
support in addition to just mobile twinning. The mode of
license operation has also changed.
Prior to IP Office 4.2, the license was only consumed by
users who had Mobile Twinning enabled. For IP Office 4.2
it is consumed by a user when they are configured for
any of the mobility features, including mobile twinning
even if they have turned mobile twinning off.
For IP Office 4.2+, the license moves with hot desking
users including within a Small Community Network.
VPN IP Extensions
IP Office 4.1+. Used in conjunction with the Extension | VoIP |

VPN Phone Allowed setting to license the operation of 46XX
Series and 56XX Series phones using VPNremote firmware.
VPN Phone
195569
195570
10
195571
20
195572
50
195573
213980
213981
10
213982
25
213983
50
213984
100
213985
Unlimite 213986
d
10 Trial 213987
IP End-points
IP Office
Controls the number of 3rd party H.323 devices supported by IP IP400 IP

Office. No license is required for Avaya 4600 and 5600 series
Endpoint
telephones. IP enabled Phone Manager Pro is licensed
separately.
174956
174957
10
174958
20
174959
50
174960
100
174961
Page 342
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: Licence Keys
11.11.1 IP500
Updated for the IP500 PRI channels license. Also the change for IP500 Voice Networking license.
License
Description
RFA Name
SAP
IP500 Upgrade
Required to upgrade an IP500 from Standard Edition mode IP500 IPO EXP UPG TO
Standard to Professional to Professional Edition mode.
PRO
202959
IP500 Voice Networking Used with the IP500 to enable support for SCN, QSIG and
H323 IP trunks. A base license is required first to which
additional licenses can then be added.
For IP Office 4.0, this license is only supported in
Professional Edition mode.
For IP Office 4.1+ this license is supported in Standard
Edition and Professional Edition modes.
IP500 VOICE
4
NTWKG BASE 4 LIC
202960
IP500 VOICE
NTWKG ADD LIC
205450
IP500 Universal PRI

(Additional channels)
IP500 T1 Channels
Add
21580
21581
32
21582
21583
21584
22
21585
21586
21587
22
21588
IP500 VCM Channels
IP Office
The IP500 PRI-U card supports E1, T1 and E1-R2 PRI

modes. The IP Office system supports 8 unlicensed Bchannels on each IP500 PRI-U port fitted. Additional Bchannels, up to the capacity of ports installed and PRI
mode selected require IP500 Universal PRI (Additional
Channels) licenses added to the configuration. These
additional channels consume the licenses based on which
additional channels are configured as in-service from port 9
of slot 1 upwards. D-channels are not affected by licensing.
IP500 E1 Channels
Add
IP500 E1R2
Channels Add
Used with IP500 VCM modules to enable additional

IP500 VCM LIC 4 CH +4
channels. Each IP500 VCM base card supports 4 unlicensed
IP500 VCM LIC 8 CH +8
channels with additional channels requiring licenses.
202961
202962
IP500 VCM LIC 16

CH
+16 202963
IP500 VCM LIC 28

CH
+28 202964
IP500 VCM LIC 60

CH
+60 202965
Page 343
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.11.2 CCC
License
Description
RFA Name
SAP
CCC Server
Enables the CCC Server application

(Archiver and Wallboard Manager) with
support for 1 supervisor, reporting on 5
agents, and one PC Wallboard.
This license is a pre-requisite for all the
following CCC licensing.
IP400 CCC SVR
171994
CCC Agents
Enables various numbers of additional

agents (5, 10, 20, 50) for CCC reporting.
IP400 CCC AGT
CCC Supervisors
CCC PC Wallboards
Enables additional supervisors (1, 5, 10,

20) up to the maximum of 21 supported
supervisors.
171995
10
174469
20
174470
50
174471
IP400 CCC SUP
171996
"5
184730
" 10
10
184731
" 20
20
184732
172786
10
174472
" 20
20
174473
" 50
50
174474
IP400 CCC Wallboard
176196
184726
10
184727
20
184728
Enables additional CCC PC Wallboards for 5, IP400 CCC PCW

10, 20, 50 agents.
" 10
CCC Spectrum Wallboards
Enables the operation of between 4

Spectrum wallboards (not Ferrograph).
Licenses are cumulative up to a maximum
of 16 wallboards.
Report Viewer
Allows additional users (5, 10, 20) access to IP400 CCC Report
historic reports.
CCC Agent Rostering
Enables the Agent Rostering Interface for

CCC which provides connection to a 3rd
party Agent Rostering package (Blue
Pumpkin). No longer supported.
IP400 CCC Rostering
171997
CCC Designer (users)
Enables CCC Report Designer, which

permits a supervisor to design and
customize their own reports. One license
per user. Note: requires the user to have
Crystal Report Writer software.
IP400 CCC Designer
171999
CTI Link Pro
Required for the CCC Email and CCC Chat

licenses above.
IP400 CTI
171988*
IP Office
Page 344
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.11.3 CTI
License
Description
RFA Name
SAP
CTI Link Pro
Enables CTI Link Pro functionality (TAPI Link Pro and DEVLink
Pro).
IP400 CTI
171988
Wave User
Allows streaming of WAV files, using TAPILink Pro, for 3rd

IP400 TAPI WAV
party voice applications. This is a per user license.
Note that TAPI WAV calls use system data channels taken from
the same pools as used for voicemail ports. The maximum
number of simultaneous TAPI WAV user calls and voicemail
users is determined by the IP Office control unit type; Small
Office Edition = 10, IP406 = 20, IP412 = 30, IP500 = 30.
IP Office
177466
Page 345
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.11.4 Phone Manager

License
Description
RFA Name
SAP
Phone Manager Pro (per seat)
Enables Phone Manager Pro for 1,

5, 10, 20, 50, 100 or unlimited
users. The user's Phone Manager
mode is set through the IP Office
configuration (User | Telephony |
Phone Manager Type).
IP400 Phone Manager 1

Pro
5
177468
Phone Manager Pro IP Audio

Enabled (per user)
Enables Phone Manager Pro IP

IP400 IPPRO
softphone operation for a user.
Note: Also requires the user to
have a Phone Manager Pro license.
177469
10
177470
20
177471
50
177472
171992
174463
10
174464
20
174465
50
174466
In addition to entering Phone Manager licenses, each user is individually configured for the expected Phone Manager
type.
During operation, the number of Phone Manager license keys available and the number unused can be checked. Run
Phone Manager and select Help | About. Holding down the Ctrl and Shift keys, click on the software version number.
IP Office
Page 346
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.11.5 VoiceMail
License
Description
RFA Name
AUDIX Voicemail
Enables IP Office to use a remote Intuity

IP400 AUDIX
Audix or Modular Messaging for voicemail.
Does not require a local Voice Mail Pro server.
Enables Voicemail Pro plus 4 ports.
IP400 Voicemail Pro
Adds additional ports (2, 4, 8 or 16) to an

existing Voicemail Pro, up to the maximum
number of ports supported by the IP Office
control unit type.
Maximum: Small Office Edition = 10, IP406
V2 = 20, IP412 = 30, IP500 = 30.
IP400 Voicemail
Pro
SAP
177467
171991
2
174459
174460
174461
16
174462
VMPro Networked Messaging
Enables VPNM (Voicemail Pro Networked

IP400 Networked
Messaging) functionality within Voicemail Pro. Messaging
This allows message exchange with remote
Voicemail Pro systems and Avaya Interchange
systems.
182297
Enables IMS Pro operation with Voicemail Pro. IP400 Integrated

Enables synchronization to MS Exchange
Messaging Pro
email systems with a form within Outlook to
control voicemail playback.
171990
VMPro TTS (Scansoft)
Enables use of text to speech facilities using IP400 Avaya TTS

Avaya supplied TTS software with Voicemail
Pro. One license per simultaneous instance of
TTS usage.
182299
VMPro TTS (Generic)
Enables use of text to speech facilities using IP400 3rd Party TTS
third party TTS software with Voicemail Pro.
One license per simultaneous instance of TTS
usage.
182303
VMPro VB Script
Enables VB Script functionality with Voicemail IP400 VB Scripting

Pro.
182300
Enables 3rd party database support within

Voicemail Pro call flows.
182298
Enables integration between Voicemail Pro

IP400 ContactStore for
and the Avaya Contact Store for IP Office
IPO
application. ContactStore can be run
unlicensed from the date of the first recorded
call.
187166
UMS Web Services
Enables use of UMS Web Voicemail and IMAP IPO LIC VMPRO
for users to access their mailbox. Licensed
UMS
UMS Web Services users who hot desk to a
remote system remain licensed against their
home IP Office system.
217880
217881
10
217882
20
217883
50
217884
IP Office
IP400 3rd Party IVR
Page 347
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.11.6 IP DECT
These licenses are for Avaya IP DECT. They differ from normal IP Office licenses in that they are entered into the Avaya
IP DECT Mobility Manager (ADMM) base station of the IP DECT system and not into the configuration of the IP Office
system. The licenses are based on the PARK number of the ADMM base station.
License
Description
RFA Name
SAP
1 Base Station
Allows a single base station (that

being the ADMM).
IP DECT IPO MOBMGR 1 RFP LIC:CU
700379027
2 Base Stations
Allows up to 2 base stations.
IP DECT IPO MOBMGR 2 RFP LIC:CU
700379035
3-5 Base Stations
IP DECT IPO MOBMGR 3-5 RFP LIC:CU
700379043
>5 Base Stations
IP DECT IPO MOBMGR >5 RFP LIC:CU
700379050
Upgrade to 2
Upgrade to allow up to 2 base

stations.
IP DECT IPO UPG TO A 2 BASE STATION

LIC:CU
700379068
Upgrade to 3-5

stations.

LIC:CU
700379076
Upgrade to >5

stations.

LIC:CU
700379084
IP Office
Page 348
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.11.7 Trial Licenses

These licenses differ from other IP Office licenses in that they are time based and expire 60 days after issue. Each trial
licenses will only be issued once for a particular Feature Key dongle serial number.
License
RFA Name
SAP
Voicemail Pro Networked Messaging
IPO TRIAL NTWKD MSGING LIC:DS
189776
3rd Party Database/IVR
IPO TRIAL 3RD PARTY IVR RFA LIC:DS
189777
Avaya Text-to-Speech for IP Office (1 port)
IPO TRIAL AVAYA TTS RFA 1 LIC:CU
189778
VB Scripting
IPO TRIAL VB SCRIPTING RFA LIC:DS
189779
Conferencing Center
IPO TRIAL CONF CENTER RFA LIC:DS
189780
Third Party Text to Speech (1 port)
IPO TRIAL 3RD PRTY TTS RFA LIC:CU
189781
IPO TRIAL VM PRO RFA LIC:DS
189782
SoftConsole (1 user)
IPO TRIAL SOFTCONSOLE/BLF RFA LIC:CU
189783
Phone Manager PC Softphone (10 user)
IPO TRIAL IPPRO RFA 10 LIC:CU
189784
Phone Manager Pro (10 user)
IPO TRIAL PMGR PRO RFA 10 LIC:CU
189785
Centralized Voicemail with Avaya Messaging
IPO TRIAL ACM CENTRAL VM LIC:DS
189786
Mobility License (Mobile Twinning)
IPO LIC MOBILE TWINNING TRIAL RFA 5
195574
VPN IPSec
IPO TRIAL IPSEC VPN RFA LIC:DS
189788
IPO LIC IP500 STD UPG TO PRO TRIAL
205822
VPN IP Phone
IPO LIC VPN PHONE 10 TRIAL
213987
UMS Web Services (10 users)
IPO TRIAL UMS 10 LIC:CU
217890
IP Office
Page 349
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12 Ports
The following port types are found on IP Office systems:
Port
Found on
Description
ANALOG
ATM4 Trunk card (x4).

Analog Trunk expansion module (x16).
Used for the connection of external analog trunks.
AUDIO
All IP Office control units (x1).
Used for input of an external music on hold source.
BRI
Quad BRI trunk card (x4).

So8 expansion module (x8).
Used for connection of BRI trunks (Quad BRI trunk

card) and ISDN terminals devices (So8 module).
DC I/P
All control units (x1).

All expansion modules (x1).
Power input from external power supply unit.
DS
IP403 control unit (x8).

IP406 V2 control unit (x8).
Digital Station expansion modules (x16/x30).
Connection of Avaya digital station phones

supported by IP Office.
RS232/
DTE

All expansion modules (x1).
Used for control unit maintenance under Avaya

guidance. On expansion modules not used.
EXPANSION
All control units (x various).

All expansion modules except WAN3 (x1).
Used for interconnection of external expansions

modules and control units.
EXT O/P
Used to control external relay systems. The port

provides two switchable (on, off and pulse)
controls.
All modules (x1).
Used for connection of functional or protective

ground if required.
LAN
All control units (x various).
10/100Mbps Ethernet LAN ports.
PF
Analog Trunk expansion module (x2).
Analog power fails ports.
PHONE
(POT)
IP403 control unit (x2).

IP406 V2 control unit (x2).
Phones expansion modules (x8/x16/x30).
Analog phone extension ports. On older units these

ports are labeled as POT ports.
PRI
Single PRI trunk cards (x1).
PRI trunk ports.
Dual PRI trunk cards (x2).

USB
IP500 Control Unit (x1).
Not used.
WAN
WAN interface ports. V.24, V.35 and X.21 through

cable selection.
WAN3 expansion module (x3).

Small Office Edition (x1)
IP Office
RJ45 Ethernet port. Acts as Layer 3 ethernet switch

to the modules LAN ports.
Page 350
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: Ports
11.12.1 Cables
The IP Office systems are designed primarily for use within an RJ45 structured cabling system using CAT3 unshielded
twisted-pair (UTP) cabling and RJ45 sockets.
A structured cabling system is one where cables are run from a central RJ45 patch panel in the communications/data
room to individual RJ45 sockets at user's desk. All wires in each cable between the patch panel and the desk socket are
connected straight through. This arrangement allows devices connected at the patch panel to be swapped to match the
type of device that needs to be connected at the user socket. For example, making one user socket a phone port and
another user socket a computer LAN port, without requiring any rewiring of the cables in between.
Traditional IDC Punchdown Wiring Installations

Where necessary, the far end RJ45 plug can be stripped from IP Office cables and wired into traditional wiring systems
using punch-block connectors. This type of installation should be performed by an experienced wiring technician.
Trunk Connections
The majority of IP Office trunk ports use RJ45 connectors for acceptance of an RJ45-to-RJ45 cable. However,
connection at the line providers end may require use of a different plug type in order to match the line providers
equipment.
RJ11 Phone Connectors
Many phones use RJ11 sockets and are supplied with RJ11-to-RJ11 cables. RJ11 plugs can be inserted into RJ45
sockets and in many case the connection will work. However this is not recommended or supported as the connection
lock is not truly positive and may become disconnected. An RJ45-to-RJ11 cable is available for these connections.
IP Office
Page 351
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Standard IP Office Cables

The following are Avaya standard cables available for use with IP Office systems. The maximum length is applicable if the
standard Avaya cable is replaced with an alternate cable.
Cable
Description
SAP Code
Standard
Length
Maximum
Length
9-Way DTE Cable
Connects to control unit RS232 DTE

port. 9-Way D-type plug to 9-way Dtype socket.
2m/6'6''.
2m/6'6''.
Structured Cabling DS Line Cable Connects from RJ45 sockets to RJ11

socketed DS and analog phones.
700047871
4m/13'2''.
See table
below.
BRI/PRI Trunk Cable
Connects BRI/PRI trunk ports to the

line providers network termination
point. RJ45 to RJ45. Red.
700213440
3m/9'10''.
Connects the control unit to expansion 700213457

modules (except WAN3 modules). RJ45
to RJ45. Blue.
1m/3'3''.
1m/3'3''.
LAN Cable
Connects from IP Office LAN ports to IP 700213481

devices. RJ45 to RJ45. Grey.
3m/9'10''.
100m/328'.
Connects WAN3 module to the control

unit. Replace with a LAN crossover
cable for IP412 control units. Green.
700213465
1m/3'3''.
LAN Crossover Cable
Used for connection of IP devices to

LAN ports on the IP412 control unit.
Black
700213473
3m/9'10''.
100m/328'.
V.24 WAN Cable

plug.
3m/9'10''.
5m/16'5''
V.35 WAN Cable
37-Way D-type plug to 34-way MRAC

plug.
700213424
3m/9'10''.
5m/16'5''
X.21 WAN Cable

plug.
3m/9'10''.
5m/16'5''
The table below details the maximum total cable distances for DS and analog extensions using different cable types.
Unshielded Twisted-Pair (UTP) - 50nf/Km
Telephone
CW1308
AWG22
(0.65mm)
AWG24
(0.5mm)
AWG26
(0.4mm)
2400/5400 Series
1200m/3937'.
1000m/3280'.
670m/2200'.
400m/1310'.
4406D Phone
1000m/3280'.
1000m/3280'.
400m/1310'.
400m/1310'.
4412D Phone
1000m/3280'.
700m/2295'.
400m/1310'.
400m/1310'.
4424D
500m/1640'.
500m/1640'.
400m/1310'.
400m/1310'.
6400 Series
1000m/3280'.
1000m/3280'.
400m/1310'.
400m/1310'.
T3 Series (Upn)
1000m/3280'.
1000m/3280'.
400m/1310'.
Analog Phones
1000m/3280'.
1000m/ 3280'.
400m/1640'.
800m/2620'.
IP Office
Page 352
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.2 ANALOG Port

These ports are analog trunk ports. The IP400 ATM4 analog trunk cards and IP500 analog trunk cards only support loopstart trunks. The ATM16 Analog Trunk module supports both loop-start and ground-start trunks, switchable within the IP
Office configuration.
ANALOG
Pin
Description
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Ring.
Tip.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Off-Hook Current: 25mA.
IMPORTANT
earth.
WARNING
Within the Republic of South Africa and in areas of high lightning risk, any module using analog trunk connections must
be connected to a protective ground and to surge protection equipment.
11.12.3 AUDIO Port

This port is found on the rear of all IP Office control units. It is used for the input of an external music-on-hold sound
source. Note that if the IP Office has loaded an internal music-on-hold sound file, any input from this socket is ignored.
The port is a 3.5mm stereo jack socket suitable for use with the most standard audio leads and connection to the
'headphone' output socket of most audio systems.
The use of a 'headphone' socket allows simple volume adjustment. Connection via a 'Line Out' socket may require
additional equipment in order to adjust the volume level.
Pin No.
Description
Common
Common
Left
Audio In - Left Channel.
Right
Audio In - Right - Channel.
Input impedance: 10k /channel. Maximum a.c. signal 200mV rms.
IP Office
Page 353
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.4 BRI Port (So)

The BRI ports found on the front of the So8 module are BRI So interface ports for connect to ISDN terminal devices.
For IP Office 4.2+, IP500 BRI trunk daughter cards can be switched from To to So mode. IP400 BRI trunk cards can only
be used as To connections.
IP Office
BRI
Wire
RJ45
BRI
ISDN Terminal
PIN
White/Orange
Orange/White
Rx-A
White/Green
Tx-B
Blue/White
Tx-A
White/Blue
Rx-B
Green/White
White/Brown
Brown/White
RJ45
Terminating Resistors
100ohm Terminating resistors are required across the transmit and receive wire pairs at each end of the S-bus.
The IP Office So8 module BRI ports include integral 100ohm terminating resistors.
For IP Office 4.2+, individual ports of an IP500 BRI daughter card can be switched to So mode. This is done by
setting the Line Sub-Type to S-Bus in the IP Office configuration. In this case terminating resistors must be
added at the IP Office end in addition to those at the other end of the S-bus connection.
Addition of the necessary termination at the IP Office end can be done using an IP500 BRI So Converter Cable
(700458649). This short (25cm/10") cable includes both the necessary terminating resistors and the cable
cross-over.
Many ISDN terminal devices includes terminating resistors. If this is not the case, 100ohm (+/-5%) resistors must
be connected across the receive wire pair and the transmit wire pair in the junction box immediately before the
last ISDN terminal on the S-bus.
IP Office
Page 354
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.5 BRI Port (To)

These ports are BRI To interface ports for connection to external BRI trunk services. Note that BRI ports found on the
IP400 So8 module are BRI-S interface ports for connect to ISDN terminal devices, see BRI Port (So).
PRI/BRI Trunk Cable

This cable is used to connect from IP Office BRI/PRI trunk ports to the line providers network termination equipment. If
that equipment does not use RJ45 sockets, the cable may need to be stripped and rewired or an alternate cable used.
The appropriate signal pin-outs and wire colours are detailed below.
IP Office
BRI
Wire
RJ45
BRI
PRI
Network
Termination
Supply: BRI/PRI trunks cards are not

supplied with these cables.
PIN
Cable Color: Red.

SAP Code: 700213440.
Rx-A
White/
Orange
Rx-B
Orange/ 2
White
Maximum Length: 5m/16'5''.
White/
Green
Though not used pins 7 and 8 are through

connected for ease of construction.
RJ45
Standard Length: 3m/9'10".
Tx-A
Rx-A
Tx-A
Blue/
White
Rx-B
Tx-B
White/
Blue
Tx-B
Green/
White
White/
Brown
Brown/
White
IP Office
Page 355
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.6 DC I/P Port

Found on all IP Office control units and expansion modules. Used for connection from the external power supply unit
supplied with the control unit or module.
No other type of power supply unit should be used with the module or module unless specifically indicated by Avaya.
11.12.7 DS Ports
These ports are used for connection from an RJ45 structured cabling system to digital station phones supported by the IP
Office.
Though the RJ11 to RJ11 cables supplied with most DS phones can be plugged directly into RJ45 ports including those on
IP Office modules, this is not recommend as the connection lock is not positive and may become disconnected.
DS ports on Digital Station V1/V2 expansion modules can be connected to out-of-building extensions. If this is the case,
connection must be made via suitable protective devices at each end and via each building primary protection. In
addition the Digital Station module must be connected to a protective ground.
DS ports on IP Office control units must not be connected to out-of-building extensions.
Structured Cabling Line Cord

This is an RJ45 to RJ11 cable suitable for connection from a structured cabling system RJ45 port to a DS phone. It can
also be used for two-wire analog phone extensions.
This cable is not suitable for connection from an Avaya 1151D1/B2 power supply unit to a DS phone with a 4450, EU24
or XM24 add-on module. In those cases the cables supplied with the power supply unit and the add-on module should be
used.
IP Office
DS Port
Phone
Pin
Description
Pin
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Signal 1.
Signal 2.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Port
SAP Code: 700047871.
IP Office
Page 356
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.8 RS232 DTE Port

These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units and external expansion modules. The DTE ports on
external expansion modules are not used.
The RS232 DTE ports on the control units can be used for system maintenance and connection of serial terminal
adaptors. On IP400 control units the port can also be used for connection of the IP Office serial port licence key dongle.
An asynchronous terminal program such as HyperTerminal is also required. Configure this for operation via a PC serial
port, as follows:
Bits per second 38,400
Data bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None

Settings | Emulation TTY
DTE Cables
These cables are used for system maintenance and diagnostics under Avaya guidance. They can also be used for
connection of RS232 serial terminal adaptor equipment to the IP Office control unit.
The cable required depends on the IP Office control unit. This cable is a "Straight through DB9 female to DB9 male serial
cable".
IP Office 9-Way RS232 Signal

DTE Port
IP Office
PC/Terminal
Adaptor
Receive data
Transmit Data
RTS (Request To Send)
CTS (Clear To Send)
DSR (Data Set Ready)
Ground
DCD (Data Carrier Detect)
DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
RI (Ring Indicator)
Page 357
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.9 EXPANSION Port

This type of port is found on the rear of IP Office control units and external expansion modules. It is used for connecting
the external expansion modules to there parent IP Office control unit.
The connection between these ports should only be done using an Avaya Expansion Interconnect Cable. No other cable
type should be used.

The Expansion Interconnect cable is used to link expansion ports between the IP Office control unit and external
expansion module (except WAN3 modules).
WARNING: This is the only cable that should be used for connecting an IP Office control unit to external expansion
modules (except for WAN3 modules).
Supply: One cable is normally supplied with each external expansion module.
SAP Code: 700213457
11.12.10 EXT O/P Port

These ports are found on the rear of all IP Office control units. They are used for connection to external switching relays.
The port uses a standard 3.5mm stereo jack plug for connection.
The IP Office is able to open (high resistance), close (low resistance) or pulse (close for 5 seconds and then open) two
switches within the port. Either switch can be operated separately. These switches are intended for activation of external
relays in systems such as door opening systems.
CAUTION: In installations where this port is connected to a device external to the building, connection must be via a
towerMAX SCL/8 Surge Protector and a protective ground connection must be provided on the IP Office control unit.
EXT O/P
Pin
Description
Switch 1.
Switch 2.
0 Volts (Ground/Chassis)
Switching Capacity: 0.7A.

Maximum Voltage: 55V d.c.
On state resistance: 0.7 ohms.
Short circuit current: 1A.
Reverse circuit current capacity: 1.4A.
Ensure that pins 1 and 2 are always at a positive voltage with respect to pin 3.
3.5mm stereo audio jack plugs are frequently sold as pre-wired sealed modules. It may be necessary to use a multimeter to determine the wiring connections from an available plug. Typically 3 (common to both relays) is the cable
screen.
IP Office
Page 358
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.11 LAN Port

These ports are found on IP Office control units and the WAN3 10/100 expansion module. They are used for connection
to IP LAN's and IP devices. On the WAN3 10/100 module the port is used for direct connection to a control unit.
All IP Office LAN ports are 10/100Mbps auto-sensing. Operation varies as follows:
IP Office 500
This unit has 2 RJ45 Ethernet ports, marked as LAN and WAN. These form a full-duplex managed layer-3 switch.
Within the IP Office configuration, the physical LAN port is LAN1, the physical WAN port is LAN2.
IP460 V2
This unit has 8 RJ45 Ethernet ports marked as LAN 1 to 8. These form a full-duplex unmanaged layer-2 LAN switch.
Ports are auto-MDI/MDIX. Within the IP Office configuration the physical LAN ports are LAN1.
IP412
This unit has 2 RJ45 Ethernet ports marked as LAN 1 to 2. These form a half-duplex managed layer-3 switch. Both
ports are fixed MDI crossover ports. Within the IP Office configuration, physical port 1 is LAN1, physical port 2 is LAN2.
This unit has 4 RJ45 Ethernet ports marked LAN 1 to 4. These form a full-duplex unmanaged layer-2 switch. An
addition RJ45 Ethernet socket marked as WAN exists. With the LAN ports this acts as a managed layer-3 switch. Within
the IP Office configuration, the physical LAN ports are LAN1, the physical WAN port is LAN2.
The LAN port LED's are used as follows:

Green: On = connected, Flashing = Activity.
Yellow: On = 100Mbps, Off = 10Mbps.
LAN Cables
These are CAT5 UTP cables for connection of various IP devices within the IP Office system.
IP Office
LAN
Pin
MDIX
MDI
(Normal)
(Crossover)
Wire
Standard/
Crossover
Interconnect
Rx-A.
Tx-A.
White/Orange
Rx-B.
Tx-B.
Orange/White
Tx-A.
Rx-A.
White/Green
Not used.
Not used.
Blue/White
Not used.
Not used.
White/Blue
Tx-B.
Rx-B.
Green/White
Not used.
Not used.
White/Brown
Not used.
Not used.
Brown/White
SAP Code:
LAN Cable - GREY: 700213481.
Standard straight LAN cable.
LAN Interconnect Cable - Green: 700213465.
Supplied with WAN3 modules for the direct connection of the WAN3 module to an IP Office control unit LAN port. For
an IP412 control unit, this cable should be replaced with a LAN crossover cable.
LAN Crossover Cable - Black: 700213473.
LAN crossover cable.
IP Office
Page 359
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.12 PF Port
These ports are analog extension ports that can be used in conjunction with analog loop-start trunks during power failure
to the IP Office system. They are found on the rear of the IP400 Analog Trunk expansion module.
There are a number of options to connect analog extension ports to analog trunks during power failure. In all cases these
only work with loop-start analog trunks. Any phones connected to these ports should be clearly labeled as power fail
extensions in accordance with the appropriate national and local regulatory requirements.
IP400 Small Office Edition
On the Small Office Edition control unit, ANALOG port 2 is connected to PHONE (POT) port 1 during power failure.
IP400 ATM16 External Expansion Module
During power fail conditions, PF1 is internally connected to ANALOG port 1 on the module, PF2 is internally connected
to ANALOG port 2 on the same module.
IP500 Office
When an IP500 Analog Phone 8 base card is fitted with an IP500 Analog Trunk daughter card, during power failure
extension port 8 is connected to analog trunk port 12.
Any phones connected to these ports should be clearly labelled as power fail extensions in accordance with the
appropriate national and local regulatory requirements.
PF
Pin
Description
Not used.
Pin 2 is internally connected to pin 5 via a ringer capacitor.
Not used.
Ring.
Tip.
Pin 6 is internally connected to pin 5 via a ringer capacitor.
Not used.
Not used.
Minimum Wire Size: AWG 26.

Maximum Cable Length:
AWG26: 500m / 1640'.
AWG24, AWG22: 1000m / 3280'.
IP Office
Page 360
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.13 PHONE (POT) Port

These ports are analog extension ports. On older IP Office units these ports were labeled as POT ports rather than PHONE
ports.
PHONE ports on Phone V1/V2 expansion modules can be connected to out-of-building extensions. If this is the case,
connection must be made via suitable protective devices (IP Office Barrier Box) at each end and via each building
primary protection. In addition the Phone module must be connected to a protective ground.
PHONE ports on IP Office control units must not be connected to out-of-building extensions.
PHONE
Pin
Description
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Ring.
Tip.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
REN: 2
Off-Hook Current: 25mA.
Ring Voltage: 40V rms.
Minimum Wire Size: AWG 26.
Maximum Cable Length:
AWG26: 0.5km / 1640 feet.
AWG24, AWG22: 1km / 3280 feet.
Except on some older equipment, these ports do not include a ringing capacitor. Therefore for connection to 4-wire
analog phones where this is a requirement (typically the United Kingdom and New Zealand), connection should be via a
Master socket containing ringing capacitors. On some older Small Office Edition, IP403 and IP400 Phone V1 modules,
pins 2 and 6 are internally connected via ringing capacitors.
Structured Cabling Line Cord

This is an RJ45 to RJ11 cable suitable for connection from a structured cabling system RJ45 port to a DS phone. It can
also be used for two-wire analog phone extensions.
IP Office
DS Port
Phone
Pin
Description
Pin
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Signal 1.
Signal 2.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Port
SAP Code: 700047871.
IP Office
Page 361
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.14 PRI Port

These ports are used for connection to PRI trunk services including E1, T1 and E1-R2.
PRI/BRI Trunk Cable

This cable is used to connect from IP Office BRI/PRI trunk ports to the line providers network termination equipment. If
that equipment does not use RJ45 sockets, the cable may need to be stripped and rewired or an alternate cable used.
The appropriate signal pin-outs and wire colours are detailed below.
IP Office
Wire
BRI
RJ45
BRI
PRI
Network Termination
PIN
Rx-A
White/Orange
Rx-B
Orange/White
White/Green
Tx-A
Rx-A
Tx-A
Blue/White
Rx-B
Tx-B
White/Blue
Tx-B
Green/White
White/Brown
Brown/White
RJ45
Supply: BRI/PRI trunks cards are not supplied with these cables.
Cable Color: Red.
SAP Code: 700213440.
Standard Length: 3m/9'10".
IP Office
Page 362
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.15 WAN Port

This type of port 37-way D-type port is found on the rear of IP406 V2 and IP412 control units, and on the rear of the
WAN3 10/100 external expansion modules. For the Small Office Edition control unit an optional WAN trunk interface card
can be fitted.
Each WAN port supports a single synchronous data connection, which can be X.21, V.35 or V.24/V.28. Selection of the
required interface is determined by the cable plugged into the WAN port when power is applied.
WAN ports must be clocked externally, the IP Office does not provide a clock signal. The clock signal is usually
provided by the service provider but under some circumstances (for example laser, microwave or baseband modems)
extra provision must be made by the installer.
Pin
Protocol
X.21
X.21
Description
Pin
Protocol
Rx-B: Receive Data B.
20
X.21
Rx-A: Receive Data A.
Ind-A: Indicate A.
21
X.21
Ind-B: Indicate B.
X.21
Clk-A: Clock A.
22
X.21
Clk-B: Clock B.
X.21
Tx-A: Transmit Data A.
23
X.21
Tx-B: Transmit Data B.
X.21
Ctl-B: Control B.
24
X.21
Ctl-A: Control A.
X.21
Ground
25
V.35
WAN ID 0: Connect to Pin 6.
X.21
WAN ID 1: Connect to Pin 6.
26
V.24
Tx: Transmit Data.
V.24/V.35
DTR: Data Terminal Ready.
27
V.24/V.35
RTS: Request to Send.
V.24
Rx: Receive Data.
28
V.24
RxClk: Receive Clock.
10
V.24
TxClk: Transmit Clock.
29
V.24/V.35
RI: Ring Indicator.
11
V.24/V.35
DCD: Data Carrier Detect.
30
V.24/V.35
12
V.24/V.35
CTS: Clear to Send.
31
13
32
V.35
14
V.35
33
V.35
SCTE-A: External Clock A.
15
V.35
SCTE-B: External Clock B.
34
V.35
V35 Gnd
16
V.35
35
V.35
17
V.35
TxClk-B: Transmit Clock B.
36
V.35
TxClk-A: Transmit Clock A.
18
V.35
RxClk-B: Receive Clock B.
37
V.35
RxClk-A: Receive Clock A.
19
V.24
CHASSIS
Not used.
Description
DSR: Data Set Ready.

Not used.
1. For the USA, only FCC Part 68 registered data circuit terminal equipment should be connected to the WAN Ports.
2. In all cases Pin 19 should be connected to the cable screen.
IP Office
Page 363
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.16 V.24 WAN Cable

This cable is used for connection an IP Office 37-way D-type WAN port to the V.24 WAN service providers equipment.
IP Office
WAN Port
Signal
V.24 WAN
Service
Ground
20
Rx: Receive Data
10
Tx: Transmit Clock
15
11
12
CTS: Clear To Send.
26
Tx: Transmit Data.
27
RTS: Request To Send.
28
Rx-Clk: Receive Clock.
17
29
RI: Ring Indicator.
22
30
At the IP Office end pin 25 is connected to pin 6.

At the IP Office end pin 19 is connected to the Screened Cable
Drain Wire.
Supply: This cable is not supplied with the control unit or WAN3 module. It must be ordered separately.
SAP Code: 700213416
Cable: 12-core screened cable. Each core is 7/0.203mm (24 AWG) tinned copper stranded wire, nominal capacitance
of 95pF/m, resistance of 92 ohms/km, screened with tinned copper braid, maximum working voltage of 440V rms and
a maximum current per core of 1A rms. The maximum core to core capacitance must not exceed 800pF.
Maximum Length: 5m/16'5''. This is the maximum length that should be used if the above cable is replaced with an
alternate cable.
IP Office
Page 364
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.17 V.35 WAN Cable

This cable is used for connection an IP Office 37-way D-type WAN port to the V.35 WAN service providers equipment.
IP Office WAN Signal

Port
Wire
V.35 WAN
Service
-----
11
-----
12
CTS: Clear To Send.
-----
27
RTS: Request To Send.
-----
29
RI: Ring Indicator.
-----
30
-----
32
Twisted Pair
14
35
16
36
TxClk-A: Transmit Clock A.
17
TxClk-B: Transmit Clock B.
37
RxClk-A: Receive Clock A.
18
RxClk-B: Receive Clock B.
33
SCTE-A: External Clock A.
15
SCTE-B: External Clock B.
34
Ground
S
Twisted Pair
R
T
Twisted Pair
Y
AA
Twisted Pair
V
X
Twisted Pair
U
W
At the IP Office end pins 7 and 25 are connected to pin 6.

At the IP Office end pin 19 is connected to the Screened Cable Drain Wire.
SAP Code: 700213424.
Cable: 10 twisted pair screened cable - each core is 7/0.203mm (24 AWG) tinned copper stranded wire, nominal
capacitance of 98pF/m, impedance of 80 10% at 1MHz, screened with aluminized tape and a tinned copper wire drain.
The maximum core to core capacitance must not exceed 800pF.
alternate cable.
IP Office
Page 365
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.12.18 X.21 WAN Cable

This cable is used for connection from an IP Office 37-way D-type WAN port to the X.21 service providers equipment.
IP Office
WAN Port
Signal
Rx-B: Receive B.
20
Rx-A: Receive A.
Tx-A: Transmit A.
23
Tx-B: transmit B.
24
Ctl-A: Control A.
Ctl-B: Control B.
Ind-A: Indicate A.
21
Ind-B: Indicate B.
Clk-A: Clock A.
22
Clk-B: Clock B.
Ground
Wires
X.21 WAN
Service
Twisted Pair
11
4
Twisted Pair
2
9
Twisted Pair
3
10
Twisted Pair
5
12
Twisted Pair
6
13
------
At the IP Office end pin 7 is connected to pin 6.

At the IP Office end pin 19 is connected to the Screened Cable Drain
Wire.
SAP Code: 700213408.
Cable: 6 twisted pair screened cable - each core is 7/0.203mm (24 AWG) tinned copper stranded wire, nominal
capacitance of 98pF/m, impedance of 77ohms at 1MHz, screened with aluminized tape and a tinned copper wire drain.
alternate cable.
IP Office
Page 366
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.13 SAP Codes

Update with IP500 PRI-U trunk daughter card details. Also update the IP Office 4.1 CD/DVD codes and Voicemail Pro 4.1
CD code.
IP Office Control Units

Variant
Companding
Country
SAP Code
IP500 Office.
All
700417207
IP412 Office.
A-Law
Rest of World
700234479
U-Law
North America
700350408
A-Law
Rest of World
700343536
U-Law
North America
700359946
A-Law
Rest of World
700280209
U-Law
North America
700350424
A-Law
Rest of World
700280217
U-Law
North America
700350432
IP406 V2 Office DS.

Small Office Edition 4T+4A+8DS (3 VoIP)
Small Office Edition 4T+4A+8DS (16 VoIP)
IP400 and Small Office Edition control units are supplied with an external power supply unit but not a locale specific
power cord. All control units are available in either North America or Rest of World variants. The choice controls various
default settings of the unit. For E911 support a North American variant control unit must be used. The companding can
be changed once a unit is installed.
IP500 control units have an integral power supply unit but are not supplied with a locale specific power cord. The
appropriate Mu-Law or A-Law Smart Card feature key dongle must be order with the control unit.
IP500 Base Cards

IP500 Base Cards
Country
SAP Code
Digital Extension
IPO 500 Extn Card Dgtl Sta

8
IP Office 500 Extension Card Digital Station All

8
700417330
Analog Extension
All
700431778
All
700417231
IPO 500 MC VCM 32
IP Office 500 Media Card Voice Coding

Module 32
All
700417389
IPO 500 MC VCM 64
IP Office 500 Media Card Voice Coding

Module 64
All
700417397
IPO 500 Carrier Card
IP Office 500 Carrier Card
All
700417215
VCM
Carrier Card

Variant
Country
SAP Code
Analog
IPO 500 Trnk Anlg 4 Uni
IP Office 500 Trunk Card Analog All

4 Universal
700417405
PRI
IPO 500 Trnk PRI 1 Uni
IP Office 500 Trunk Card

Primary Rate 1 Universal
All
700417439
IPO 500 Trnk PRI 2 Uni
IP Office 500 Trunk Card

Primary Rate 2 Universal
All
700417462
IP Office 500 Trunk Card Basic

Rate 4 Universal
All
700417413
IP Office 500 Trunk Card Basic

Rate 8 Universal
All
700417421
BRI
IP Office
Page 367
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP400 Trunks Cards

Variants
Analog
BRI
T1/PRI
E1 PRI
E1R2
WAN
Country
SAP Code
ATM4 Uni (Loop-Start)
All
700359938
IP400 Analog 4 (Loop-Start)
North and South

America
700185192
IP400 Analog 4 EU (Loop-Start)
Europe
700241672
IP400 Analog 4 NZ (Loop-Start)
New Zealand
700241706
IP400 BRI 8 (UNI)
All except China
700262017
IP400 BRI
All
700185168
IP400 PRI 24 T1
North America
700185200
IP400 PRI 48 T1
North America
700185218
IP400 PRI 30 E1 (1.4)
All except China

and CALA.
700272461
IP400 PRI 60 E1
All except China

and CALA.
700185184
CALA, Korea, China 700241631
CALA, Korea, China 700241649
CALA
700241656
CALA
700241664
IP400 WAN Expansion
All
700289713
SOE
IP406 IP412 IP500

V2

Variant
Country
SAP Code
Analog Trunk
US
700449473
BRI So8
IPO 500 BRI So8
All
700449515
Digital Station
IPO 500 Digital Station 16
All
700449499
IPO 500 Digital Station 30
All
700426216
IPO 500 Phone 16
All
700449507
IPO 500 Phone 30
All
700426224
Analog Phone
IP Office
Page 368
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
System Components: SAP Codes

Variant
Analog Trunk
Digital Station
Phone
Country
SAP Code
North America/CALA
700211360
Europe
700241680
New Zealand
700241698
IP400 Digital Station 16 V2
All
700359839
IP400 Digital Station 30 V2
All
700359847
IP400 Digital Station 16
All
700184807
IP400 Digital Station 30
All
700184880
IP400 Phone 8 V2
All
700359896
IP400 Phone 16 V2
All
700359904
IP400 Phone 30 V2
All
700359912
IP400 Phone 8
All
700184773
IP400 Phone 16
All
700184781
IP400 Phone 30
All
700184799
S0 (BRI)
IP400 So8
All
700185077
WAN
IP400 WAN3
All
700185028
IP400 WAN3 10/100
All
700262009
Internal Cards
Variants
Modem Cards
Country
SAP Code
Modem 2 Card
All
700185226
Internal Modem Card
All
700343452
Embedded Voicemail
Memory Cards
All
700289721
IP406 V2
All
700343460
Wireless Cards
All
700289739
IP400 Voice Compression

Modules (25ms)
VCM 5
All
700185119
VCM 10
All
700185127
VCM 20
All
700185135
VCM 30
All
700293939
VCM 4
All
700359854
VCM 8
All
700359862
VCM 16
All
700359870
VCM 24
All
700359888
IP400 Voice Compression

Modules (64ms)
IP Office
SOE
IP406
V2
IP412
IP500
Page 369
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Power Supply Units

The following power supply units are used with IP Office control units and expansion modules. Normally the appropriate
PSU is supplied with the IP Office control unit or expansion module. Note however that a locale specific power cord is not
included with each control unit or expansion module.
Variant
Used with
Country
SAP Code
40W Unearthed PSU

Uses IEC60320 C7 power cords.
IP403.
IP406 V1.
Analog.
Digital Station V1.
Phone V1.
All
700210792
45W Earthed PSU

Uses IEC60320 C13 power cord.
All
700284938
60W Earthed PSU

Uses IEC60320 C13 power cord.
IP406 V2.
IP412.
Digital Station V2.
Phone V2.
So8.
WAN3 10/100.
All
700357387
The following power supply units have various applications. They are used to provide power to 4600 Series and 5600
Series IP phones. They are also used to provide power to other phone types when those phones are supporting an XM24,
EU24 or EU24BL add-on unit. Note: An appropriate locale specific power cord is required for the power supply unit. These
units are not support for use with 1600 Series phones.
Variant
SAP Code
1151D1 Power Supply.
With CAT5 cable.
700434897
With CAT5 cable.
700434905
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790591
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
The following items are associated with providing IEEE 802.3af Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) to devices including Avaya IP
phones. For full details refer to the IP Office IP Phone Installation Manual.
Variant
1U Mid-Span Power Distribution Unit
SAP Code
6 Ports
700409675
6 Ports + SNMP
700409691
12 Ports*
700250525
12 Ports + SNMP*
700253107
24 Ports*
700180433
24 Ports + SNMP
700409717
Cisco Catalyst Power Adapter*.
700259369
*These items are no longer available as new from Avaya.
IP Office
Page 370
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Power Cords
IP Office control unit and expansion module power supply units are not supplied with a power cord. The appropriate
power cord must be ordered or sourced locally.
Power Cord Type
Power Outlet Plug Type
Locales
SAP Codes
Earthed Power Cords (IEC60320 C13)
CEE7/7 (Schuko)
Europe and
South Africa.
700289762
Control Units
IP500.
IP406 V2.
IP412.*
BS1363
Czech Republic,
Ireland,
United Kingdom.
700289747
NEMA5-15P / CS22.2 No.42
North,
Central and
South America.
700289770
CPCS-CCC
China.
700261977
CEE7/16 (Europlug)
Europe and
South Africa.
700213382
BS1363
Czech Republic,
Ireland,
United Kingdom.
700213374
NEMA1-15
North,
Central and
South America.
700213390
Korea.
700254519
China.
700314172

Digital Station V2.
Phone V2.
So8.*
WAN3 10/100.*
Unearthed Power Cord (IEC60320 C7)

Analog.
Digital Station V1.
Phone V1.
IP Office
Page 371
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
The following additional power cords are available for use with the Avaya 1151D1 and 1151D2 power supply units.
SAP Code
USA
405362641
Europe
407786623
407786631
India
407790991
United Kingdom
407786599
Argentina
408161453
Cables
Cable
Description
SAP Code
25-Way DTE Cable
Connects to a IP403 or IP406 V1 control unit. 25-Way D-type

plug to 9-way D-type socket.
700213432 2m/6'6''.
9-Way DTE Cable
Connects to an SOE, IP406 V2 or IP412 control unit. 9-Way Dtype plug to 9-way D-type socket.
Structured Cabling DS Line

Cable
Connects from RJ45 sockets to RJ11 socketed DS and analog

phones.
700047871 4m/13'2''.
BRI/PRI Trunk Cable
Connects BRI/PRI trunk ports to the line providers network

termination point. RJ45 to RJ45. Red.
700213440 3m/9'10''.
IP500 BRI So Converter Cable
Provides the 100ohm terminating resistors necessary for an

IP500 BRI trunk daughter card port set to S-Bus mode. Also
provides the cable crossover. RJ45 plug to RJ45 socket.
700458649 25cm/10"
Connects the control unit to expansion modules (except WAN3

modules). RJ45 to RJ45. Blue.
700213457 1m/3'3''.
LAN Cable
Connects from IP Office LAN ports to IP devices. RJ45 to RJ45.

Grey.
700213481 3m/9'10''.
Connects WAN3 module to the control unit. Replace with a LAN 700213465 1m/3'3''.
crossover cable for IP412 control units. Green.
LAN Crossover Cable
Used for connection of IP devices to LAN ports on the IP412

control unit. Black
700213473 3m/9'10''.
V.24 WAN Cable
37-Way D-type plug to 25-way D-type plug.
700213416 3m/9'10''.
V.35 WAN Cable
37-Way D-type plug to 34-way MRAC plug.
700213424 3m/9'10''.
X.21 WAN Cable
37-Way D-type plug to 15-way D-type plug.
700213408 3m/9'10''.
IP Office
Length
2m/6'6''.
Page 372
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Mounting
Rack Mounting Kits
SAP Code
Note
700210800
One per IP400 control unit or IP400 external expansion module.
700429202
One per IP500 control unit or IP500 external expansion module.
700430150
One per IP500 control unit.
700429194
Includes 3 front panels for the IP500 control unit.
Barrier Box Rack Mounting Kit
700293905
Up to 8 IP Office Barrier Boxes.
Barrier Boxes
IP Office Barrier Boxes
SAP Code
IP400 Phone Barrier Box
700293897 Use with Phone V1 module. Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable and functional
earth lead.
IP400 Phone Barrier Box V2

(101V)
700385495 Use with Phone V2 module. Includes an RJ45 to RJ11 cable and functional
earth lead.
Feature Keys Dongles

Feature Key Dongle
SAP Code
Parallel Port Feature Key
700185234
USB Port Feature Key
700261506
Serial Port Feature Key
700293095
Smart Card Feature Key (MU-Law)
700417470
Smart Card Feature Key (A-Law)
700417488
CCC Licenses
License
RFA Name
CCC Server
IP400 CCC SV
CCC Agents
IP400 CCC AGT
CCC Supervisors
CCC PC Wallboards
IP400 CCC SUP
IP400 CCC PCW
SAP
171994
5
171995
10
174469
20
174470
50
174471
171996
184730
10
184731
20
184732
172786
10
174472
20
174473
50
174474
CCC Spectrum
Wallboards
IP400 CCC Wallboard
176196
Report Viewer
IP400 CCC Report
184726
10
184727
20
184728
CCC Agent Rostering
IP400 CCC Rostering
171997
CCC Designer (users)
IP400 CCC Designer
171999
IP Office
Page 373
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
CTI Licenses
License
RFA Name
SAP
CTI Link Pro
IP400 CTI RFA
171988
Wave User
IP400 TAPI WAV RFA 4
177466
General Licenses
License
RFA Name
DECT Integration (ports)
IP400 CTI DECT
SAP
8
171989
16
174457
64
174458
Conferencing Center
IP400 Conferencing Center
182302
SoftConsole (users)
IP400 SoftConsole
171987
IP400 CBC
171993
Small Office Edition WiFi
IP400 Access Point
182197
Microsoft CRM Integration (users)
IP400 Microsoft CRM Intgr
180588
IPSec Tunneling
IP400 IPSec VPN
182301
Mobile Twinning
or
Mobility Features
IPO Lic Mobile Twinning
SIP Trunk Channels
IPO LIC SIP TRNK RFA
Advanced Small Community Networking
IPO LIC ADVANCED NTWKG
IP End-points
IP400 IP Endpoint
VPN IP Extensions
IP Office
VPN Phone
195569
195570
10
195571
20
195572
50
195573
202967
202968
10
202969
20
202970
202966
174956
174957
10
174958
20
174959
50
174960
100
174961
213980
213981
10
213982
25
213983
50
213984
100
213985
Unlimited
213986
Trial (10)
213987
Page 374
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Licenses
License
RFA Name
IP500 IPO EXP UPG TO PRO
IP500 Voice Networking
IP500 VOICE NTWKG BASE 4 LIC
202960
IP500 VOICE NTWKG ADD LIC
205450
IP500 T1 Channels Add
21580
21581
32
21582
21583
21584
32
21585
21586
21587
IP500 Universal PRI (Additional channels)
SAP
IP500 E1 Channels Add
IP500 E1R2 Channels Add
IP500 VCM Channels
202959
22
21588
IP500 VCM LIC 4 CH
+4
202961
IP500 VCM LIC 8 CH
+8
202962
IP500 VCM LIC 16 CH
+16
202963
IP500 VCM LIC 28 CH
+28
202964
IP500 VCM LIC 60 CH
+60
202965
Phone Manager Licenses

License
RFA Name
Phone Manager Pro (per seat)
IP400 Phone Manager Pro
Phone Manager Pro

IP Audio Enabled (per user)
IP Office
IP400 IPPRO
SAP
1
177468
177469
10
177470
20
177471
50
177472
171992
174463
10
174464
20
174465
50
174466
Page 375
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Voicemail Licenses
License
RFA Name
SAP
AUDIX Voicemail
IP400 AUDIX
177467
IP400 Voicemail Pro
171991
IP400 Voicemail Pro
174459
174460
174461
16
174462
VMPro Networked Messaging
IP400 Networked Messaging
182297
IP400 Integrated Messaging Pro
171990
VMPro TTS (ScanSoft)
IP400 Avaya TTS
182299
VMPro TTS (Generic)
IP400 3rd Party TTS
182303
VMPro VB Script
IP400 VB Scripting
182300
IP400 3rd Party IVR
182298
IP400 ContactStore for IPO
UMS Web Services
IPO LIC VMPRO UMS
187166
1
217880
217881
10
217882
20
217883
50
217884
Trial
217890
IP DECT Licenses
See IP DECT section. IP DECT licenses are entered into the IP DECT system configuration, not the IP Office configuration.
60 Day Trial Licenses

These licenses start expiring from the day the license is generated, not the date of installation. Each license will only be
generated once for a given Feature Key dongle serial number.
License
RFA Name
SAP
Voicemail Pro Networked Messaging
IPO TRIAL NTWKD MSGING LIC:DS
189776
3rd Party Database/IVR
IPO TRIAL 3RD PARTY IVR RFA LIC:DS
189777
Avaya Text-to-Speech for IP Office (1 port)
IPO TRIAL AVAYA TTS RFA 1 LIC:CU
189778
VB Scripting
IPO TRIAL VB SCRIPTING RFA LIC:DS
189779
Conferencing Center
IPO TRIAL CONF CENTER RFA LIC:DS
189780
Third Party Text to Speech (1 port)
IPO TRIAL 3RD PRTY TTS RFA LIC:CU
189781
IPO TRIAL VM PRO RFA LIC:DS
189782
SoftConsole (1 user)
IPO TRIAL SOFTCONSOLE/BLF RFA LIC:CU
189783
Phone Manager PC Softphone (10 users)
IPO TRIAL IPPRO RFA 10 LIC:CU
189784
Phone Manager Pro (10 users)
IPO TRIAL PMGR PRO RFA 10 LIC:CU
189785
Centralized Voicemail with Avaya Messaging
IPO TRIAL ACM CENTRAL VM LIC:DS
189786
Integrated Messaging Pro
IPO TRIAL INTG MSGING PRO RFA LIC:DS
189787
Mobile Twinning (5 users)
IPO LIC MOBILE TWINNING TRIAL RFA 5
195574
VPN IPSec
IPO TRIAL IPSEC VPN RFA LIC:DS
189788
IPO LIC IP500 STD UPG to PRO TRIAL
205822
VPN IP Phone
IPO LIC VPN PHONE 10 TRIAL
213987
UMS Web Services (10 users)
IPO TRIAL UMS 10 LIC:CU
217890
IP Office
Page 376
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office Application CDs

Application
Variant
SAP Code
Voicemail Pro CD
4.2
700459357
4.1
700448954
4.0
700428592
3.2
700407588
3.1
700380405
3.0
700350457
2.1
700330970
2.0
700304546
Voicemail Pro ScanSoft Text-to-Speech (TTS)
700293921
Conferencing Center
3.2
700407596
3.1
192226
3.0
700372287
2.1
700293913
IP Office Software Developer's Kit (SDK)
700188873
5.2
700451545
5.0
700330962
4.0
700188881
4.2
700459332
4.1
700449457
4.0
700428576
3.2
700407604
3.1
700380389
3.0
700345879
2.1
700329725
2.0
700304074
4.2
700459340
4.1
700449465
4.0
700428584
3.2
700407612
3.1
700380397
IP Office User and Administration CD Set
IP Office Applications DVD
IP Office
Page 377
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
1600 Series Phones

Material Description
SAP Code
Phones and Modules

1603 IP PHONE
700415540
1608 IP PHONE
700415557
1616 IP PHONE
700415565
BM32 BUTTON MODULE
700415573
Accessories
700383326
700436710
700415623
700415631
1600 SERIES BM32 CABLE - REPLACEMENT
700415581
1600 SERIES BM32 BOND BRIDGE - REPLACEMENT
700415599
700419831
700415664
700415672
1603 WEDGE STAND - REPLACEMENT
700415615
700415714
700415722
1600 SERIES BM32 FLIP STAND - REPLACEMENT
700432800
700427495
700429707
700383821
Power Supply
1603 PoE adapter
700415607
700451230
700451248
700451255
700451263
700451271
700451289
700451297
700459795
Paper Labels
700415706
700415649
700415656
700434210
700434228
700434236
IP Office
Page 378
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
2400 Series Phones

Variant
SAP Code
2402
Multi-grey
700381973
2410
Multi-grey
700381999
2420D
Multi-grey
700381585
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
201B Recorder Interface for 2420/5420D
700381635
3600 Series Phones

Variant
SAP Code
3616 Wireless Phone.
700413040
700413065
700277387
Desktop charger for 3616.
700412901
Belt Clip for 3616.
700413057
700413024
700277395
Desktop charger for 3626

Charger Power Supply
700412919
Europe
700412810
United Kingdom
700412828
Switzerland
700412836
3626 8-Gang changer.
700412927
Belt Clip for 3626.
700413131
3626 Vinyl case with keypad cover.
700412984
3626 Carry case.
Yellow
700289309
3626 Carry case with keypad cover
Black
700289317
Yellow
700289325
700375934
Avaya Voice Priority Processor 10 (AVPP 10)
700413164
Avaya Voice Priority Processor 20 (AVPP 20)
700413172
AVPP Power Supply
Europe
700412844
United Kingdom
700412851
Switzerland
700412869
Netlink OAI Gateway
700245756
Rack Mount Kit
700245459
Variant
SAP Code
AWTS 3641 WRLS PHONE.
700430408
AWTS 3645 WRLS PHONE.
700430416
AWTS 3641 Single Charger Bundle- includes phone, standard battery and single charger.
700436736
AWTS 3645 Single Charger Bundle- includes phone, single charger and standard battery.
700436744
AWTS 3641 Dual Charger Bundle- includes phone, dual charger and two extended batteries.
700436751
AWTS 3645 Dual Charger Bundle- includes phone, dual charger and two extended batteries.
700436769
IP Office
Page 379
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
3700 Series Phones

See IP DECT section.
3810 Phones
Item
SAP Code
3810 Set - Includes phone, base station, charger, belt clip and
power supply units for charger and base station.
700305105
4400 Series Phones

Variant
4406D+
SAP Code
White
108199019
Black
108199027
White
108199043
Black
108199050
White
108199076
Black
108199084
White
108199407
Black
108199696
108596412
Small Stand for 4406 or 4450
Black
108541194
White
108541202
Black
108541269
White
108541277
4412D+
4424D+
DSS4450
Large Stand for 4412D+ or 4424D+.
IP Office
Page 380
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
4600 Series Phones (New Style)

Variant
SAP Code
4601+
Multi-grey
700381890
4602IP
Multi-grey
700221260
4602SW+
Multi-grey
700381916
4610SW
Multi-grey
700381957
4620IP
Multi-grey
700212186
4620SW
Multi-grey
700259674
4621SW
Multi-grey
700345192
4625SW
Multi-grey
700381551
EU24 1XU-A Expansion Module
Multi-grey
700381817
EU24BL 2XU-A Backlighted Expansion Module
Multi-grey
700381825
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
5400 Series Phones

Variant
SAP Code
5402
Multi-grey
700381981
5410
Multi-grey
700382005
5420
Multi-grey
700381627
EU24
Multi-grey
700381817
EU24BL
Multi-grey
700381825
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
201B Recorder Interface for 2420/5420D
IP Office
700381635
Page 381
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
5600 Series Phones

Variant
SAP Code
5601+
Multi-grey
700381908
5602SW+
Multi-grey
700381932
5610SW
Multi-grey
700381965
5621
Multi-grey
700385982
EU24
Multi-grey
700381817
EU24BL
Multi-grey
700381825
Replacement Handset
Dark Grey
700203797
Amplified Handset
Dark Grey
700229735
Dark Grey
700229743
Dark Grey
700229727
6400 Series Phones

Variant
6408D+
6416D+M
6424D+M
6408 Stand
6416/6424 Stand
XM24
XM24 Stand
IP Office
SAP Code
Grey
70020100
White
70020092
Grey
108807611
White
108807603
Grey
108807595
White
108807587
Grey
108933169
White
108933177
Grey
848219127
White
848219119
Grey
700406523
White
700406515
Grey
108272378
White
108272386
Page 382
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
T3 Series Phones (Upn)

Variant
SAP Code
T3 Compact
T3 Classic
T3 Comfort
T3 DSS Unit
T3 Headset Link Unit
Black
700380264
White
700380298
Black
700380272
White
700380306
Black
700380280
White
700380314
Black
700380322
White
700380330
Black
700380348
White
700380355
700380363
T3 Series Phones (IP)

Variant
T3 Compact
T3 Classic
T3 Comfort
SAP Code
Black
700414717
White
700414709
Black
700414733
White
700414725
Black
700414758
White
700414741
Power Supply Unit for T3 IP Phones
700414766
T3 AEI/Headset Link for IP Phones
700414774
Power Supply Unit for DSS on T3 IP Phone
700414790
IP Office
Page 383
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Spares
The following spares can be ordered from Avaya.
Item
Color
Handset HIP QD CORD- 4606/16/24/30 SETS
SAP Code
700414121
Cat 5 Cable specific to 4620
700261613
Handset Cords 25ft
Dark Grey
700217417
IP PHONE MOD CORD 1ft CAT5
408406932
408406957
408406940
IP DECT Handsets and Handset Accessories

Handsets are supplied with 3 AAA rechargeable batteries and a charger. Region specific power adaptor for the charger
must be ordered separately.
Item
Region
SAP Code
IP DECT 3701 Handset
EMEA
700346802
IP DECT 3711 Handset
EMEA
700346810
North America
700430267
Belt Clip
700346885
Phone Charger for 3701/3711

Requires power adaptor below.
Global
700346828
European
700346836
United Kingdom
700346844
Australia
700378318
North America
700430309
Global
700346851
Power Adaptor for Rack Mount Charger

Global
Require region specific IEC60320 C13/C14 power cord ordered separately.
700346869
Power Cord IEC60320 C13
Europe
700289762
United Kingdom
700289747
North America
700289770
IP DECT Phone Firmware Upgrade RS232 Serial Cable
EMEA
700379688
IP DECT Phone Firmware Upgrade USB Cable
North America
700436603
Leather Case for 3711
Global
700436629
IP DECT Headset for 3701/3711
Global
700346950
Rack mount 8-phone charger

Requires power adaptor below.
IP Office
Page 384
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP DECT Base Stations

Item
Region
SAP Code
RFP32 Indoor Base Station

North America
Requires power adaptor or PoE. Note: These are not pre-licensed 'plug and
EMEA
play' base stations, see below for those items.
700430275
Power Adaptor for RFP32
North America
700430291
Europe
700346901
United Kingdom
700346919
700420789
Australia
700378326
RFP34 Outdoor Base Station

PoE only. Note: These are not pre-licensed 'plug and play' base stations,
see below for those items.
North America
700430283
EMEA
700420797
Outdoor Base Station Wall Mounting Kit
Global
700378334
Outdoor Base Station Mast Mounting Kit (65mm)
Global
700347156
Outdoor Base Station Mast Mounting Kit (>65mm)
Global
700347172
External Dipole Aerial (pair)
EMEA
700346935
External Beam Aerial (pair)
EMEA
700346943
Mounting Kit for External Aerials
EMEA
700347149
External Aerial Connection Cable (0.5m)
EMEA
700347115
Item
Region
SAP Code
IP DECT Starter Kit

Includes 2 RFP32 base stations.
North America
700436538
EMEA
700378995
RFP32 Upgrade Kit
North America
700436579
EMEA
700436561
North America
700436595
EMEA
700436587
Item
Region
SAP Code
IP DECT Survey Kit with Tripod

Includes custom RFP, 2 handsets, charger, charger power adaptor and
tripod.
North America
700436512
IP DECT Survey Kit without Tripod

Includes custom RFP, 2 handsets, charger, charger power adaptor.
Europe
700378284
United Kingdom
700378292
Tripod for IP DECT Survey Kit
Global
700378300
Item
Region
SAP Code
IP DECT License for 1 RFP
All
700379027
IP DECT License for 2 RFP's
All
700379035
IP DECT License for 3 to 5 RFP's
All
700379043
IP DECT License for 6+ RFP's
All
700379050
IP DECT License for upgrade from 1 to 2 RFP's
All
700379068
IP DECT License for upgrade from 2 to 3-5 RFP's
All
700379076
IP DECT License for Upgrade to 6+ RFP's
All
700379084
IP DECT License Conversion from IP Office to CM
All
700379167
Plug and Play IP DECT Kits
RFP34 Upgrade Kit
IP DECT Site Survey Kits
IP DECT Licenses
IP Office
Page 385
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
11.13.1 Availability
SAP codes and details of specific items within this documentation are for reference only. Items available in any specific
locale should be confirmed against the local Avaya IP Office price list for that locale. The local price list may also include
additional items relative to the installation requirements of that locale.
11.13.2 RoHS
RoHS is an European Union directive for the Removal of Certain Hazardous Substances from Electrical and Electronic
Equipment. Similar legislation has been or is being introduced in a number of other countries. Avaya has decided to make
its global product range compliant with the requirements of RoHS. The actions taken vary
In some cases equipment has been discontinued and is no longer available from Avaya.
In some cases new manufactured stock has been made RoHS compliant and keeps its existing SAP code.
In other cases the equipment has been replaced by a new RoHS compliant alternative with new SAP codes.
The SAP codes within this document are for RoHS compliant equipment unless otherwise stated.
IP Office
Page 386
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Chapter 12.
Safety Statements
IP Office
Page 387
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
12. Safety Statements

12.1 Safety and Homologation Statements
The CE mark affixed to this equipment means that the module complies with the 1999/5/EC (R&TTE), 89/336/EEC
(EMC) and 72/23EEC (LVD) Directives.
Declaration of Conformity
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) for the IP400 Office products is available within on the IP Office Documentation
CD (Engineer's Toolkit CD).
This warning symbol is found on the base of IP406 V2, IP412 and IP500 modules.
Refer to Trunk Interface Modules for information concerning which Trunk Interface module variants are fitted in which
country.
WARNING
The Avaya IP400 Office and IP500 Office modules are intended to be installed by 'Service Personnel' and it is the
responsibility of the Service Personnel to ensure that all subsidiary interconnected equipment is wired correctly and also
meet the safety requirements of IEC60950 or UL60950 where applicable.
IP Office
Page 388
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Safety Statements: Safety and Homologation Statements
12.2 Lithium Batteries

A lithium battery is fitted to the real time clock on IP Office control unit mother boards.
WARNING
The Lithium battery must only be replaced by Avaya personnel or authorized representatives. There is a danger of
explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
12.3 Lightning Protection/Hazard Symbols

Lightning protectors
The buildings lightning protectors must be verified as follow:
1. Check the lightning protectors, at the trunk cable entry point to the building housing the Avaya IP Office, paying special
attention to the lightning protection grounding. Report any problems, in writing, to the telephone company.
2. Equipment that is designed to be connected using internal wiring is typically not lightning protected. Hence, Avaya IP
Office extension cabling must not leave the building. For installations where telephones and/or other standard (tip/ring)
devices are installed in another building then lightning protection is required (see Out of Building Telephone
Installations).
Hazard Symbol
The shock hazard symbol is intended to alert personnel to electrical hazard or equipment damage. The
following precautions must also be observed when installing telephone equipment:
2. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

3. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
4. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network
interface.
5. Always use caution when working with telephone lines.
IP Office
Page 389
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
12.4 Trunk Interface Modules

To ensure the validation of the approvals, only the following types of trunk interface cards must be fitted in the following
IP Office control units.
USA/Canada
Product
Quad
BRI
PRI E1
Single
Dual
PRI T1
Single
ATM4
WAN
ATM4
WAN
Dual
IP500 Office
IP406 V2 Office
IP412 Office
Rest of World
Product
Quad
BRI
PRI E1/E1R2
Single
Dual
PRI T1
Single
Dual
IP500 Office
IP406 V2 Office
IP412 Office
Notes
Single WAN trunk card is only supported in the Small Office Edition control unit.
Small Office Edition control units include 4 integral analog trunk ports.
E1R2 trunks are only supported in CALA and Korea.
IP Office
Page 390
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Safety Statements: Trunk Interface Modules
12.5 Further Information and Product Updates

Further information, including Product and Reference Manual updates, can be obtained from Avaya's Dealers and
Distributors, or from Avaya's web site: http://www.avaya.com.
This guide is also available from the Avaya's support web site: http://support.avaya.com.
Support Telephone Numbers

For initial help and support, contact your distributor/supplier. The following contact points are for Avaya authorized
partners.
In the USA only
Avaya provides a toll-tree Customer Helpline 24 hours a day:
Name: Avaya Technical Support Organization (TSO)
Customer Helpline: 1 800 628-2888
Address: 8744 Lucent Blvd., Highlands Ranch, Colorado, 80129 USA
URL: http://support.avaya.com
If you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system, call the Helpline or your Avaya
representative. Consultation charges may apply.
Outside the USA

If you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system, contact your Avaya representative.
URL: http://support.avaya.com
12.6 Compliance with FCC Rules

Transmit and Receive Gain Settings for PRI/T1 and Analog Ports
The Gain settings are password controlled for use by qualified installation personnel only and must not be made available
to the end user. The default gain settings of 0dB ensures compliance with FCC part 68 section 68.308(b)(5) and TIA/EIAIS-968 Section 4.5.2.5. "Through transmission amplification from ports for the connection of separately registered
equipment or from other network connection ports". Gain setting adjustment by unqualified personnel may result in
violation of the FCC rules. Qualified personnel may adjust gain settings above these levels only where:
1. Measurement is made to ensure that the power levels sent to line at each network interface connected does not exceed
the maximum levels specified in FCC part 68 section 68.308(b) and TIA/EIA-IS-968 Section 4.5 for that specific
interface type.
2. Where gain adjustment away from the default values are made, precautions should be taken to ensure that the
connection of terminal equipment is controlled by qualified installation personnel.
IP Office
Page 391
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
12.7 Port Safety Classification

The Avaya IP Office systems have the following ports which are classified as follows:
Port Name
Port Description
Port Classification
PRI port
PRI ISDN connection (NET)
TNV (Operating within the limits of SELV)
BRI ports
BRI ISDN connection (NET)
TNV (Operating within the limits of SELV)
Analog ports
Two wire analog trunk
TNV3
Power fail ports
Two wire analog trunk
TNV3
DTE port
Async Data connection.
SELV
Analog Telephone Ports
Telephone Extension ports
TNV2
Digital Telephone Ports
Telephone Extension ports
SELV
WAN port
WAN connection (NET).
SELV
LAN ports
10/100 BaseT attachment to LAN.
SELV
Expansion ports
Expansion Module connector.
SELV
Audio port
Connector for Music on Hold.
SELV
External Control port
Connector for Controlling Ancillary

circuits.
SELV
DC Input port
Connector for DC input power.
SELV
Interconnection circuits shall be selected to provide continued conformance with the requirements of EN 609050:1992/
A3:1995 clause 2.3 for SELV circuits and with the requirements of clause 6 for TNV circuits, after connections between
equipment.
IP Office
Page 392
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Safety Statements: Port Safety Classification
12.8 EMC Directive

889/336/ EEC (EMC Directive) CISPR 22:1993 including A1 + A2, AS/NZ 3548:1995 (ROW)
WARNING
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense.
Canadian Department of Communications (DOC)

''NOTICE: This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is
confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was
performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It
does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment."
EMC Caution for China
IP Office
Page 393
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
12.9 Regulatory Instructions for Use

12.9.1 Australia
Connection
Connection of IP400 Office products must be via a Line Isolation Module with a telecommunications compliance label.
BRI Interface
During the configuration, ensure "000" emergency number is not barred, by performing the following:
Short Code: 000
Telephone No: 000;
Function: DialEmergency
Connections to TS013, the following Bearer Capabilities shall not be used:

7kHz Audio, Video, Restricted Digital Information.
If unknown type of number is used in calling party number, the network will use the default CLI.
The system must be configured for Point to Multi point connection to comply with Austel requirements for connecting to
TS013 circuits.
As the IP Office does not support emergency dialing after loss of power, the following warning notice should be
recognized:
WARNING
This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.
PRI Interface
During the configuration, ensure "000" emergency number is not barred, by performing the following:
Short Code: 000
Telephone No: 000;
Function: DialEmergency
WARNING
This equipment will be inoperable during mains power failure.
12.9.2 Canada
This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by
the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed
based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment.
''NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 1. The REN assigned to each terminal
equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.
The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum
of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five.''
IP Office
Page 394
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Safety Statements: Regulatory Instructions for Use
12.9.3 China
IP Office
Page 395
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
12.9.4 European Union

1. 999 and 112 calls must not be barred. Doing so will invalidate the approval.
2. All connections at the MDF shall be identifiable by suitable labeling.
3. The CE mark displayed on IP Office equipment indicates the systems compliance with the EMC, LVD, and R&TTE
Directives and common technical regulations for Primary Rate and Basic Rate ISDN.
4. All ports for the connection of other non-telecommunications apparatus have a Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) safety
status.
12.9.5 New Zealand

The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item
complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom,
nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all
respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product
is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.
12.9.6 FCC Notification

This equipment is registered with the ACTA (Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments) in accordance with FCC
Part 68 of its rules. In compliance with those rules, you are advised of the following:
Means of Connection
Connection of this equipment to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface jack. Connection
to 1.544-MBps digital facilities must be through a USOC RJ48C. Connection to the Analog Trunk facilities must be
through a USOC RJ45S.
Notification to the Telephone Companies
Before connecting this equipment, you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company's
business office of the telephone number or numbers you will be using with this equipment.
The facility interface codes (FIC) for 1.544-MBps digital connection (i.e. IP400 Office PRI-T1) are 04DU9.BN, 04DU9.
DN, 04DU9.IKN, 04DU9.ISN.
The facility interface code (FIC) for analog trunk connection (i.e IP400 Office Quad Analog Trunk-LS) are OL13A,
OL13B, OL13C, 02AC2, 02LA2, 02LB2, 02LC2, 02LR2, 02LS2.
The facility interface code (FIC) for analog trunk connection (i.e. IP400 Office ATM16-LS/GS) are OL13A, OL13B,
OL13C, 02AC2, 02GS2, 02LA2, 02LB2, 02LC2, 02LR2, 02LF2.
The Service Order Code (SOC) for 1.544-MBps digital connection (i.e. IP400 Office PRI-T1) is 6.0Y.
The Service Order Code (SOC) for analog trunk connection (i.e. IP400 Office Quad Analog Trunk-LS) is 9.0Y.
Disconnection
You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the
line or lines.
Hearing Aid Compatibility
The custom telephone sets for this system are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the
FCC.
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN). The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the
telephone line. Excessive RENs on the line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most,
but not all, areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five. To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company to determine the maximum
REN for the calling area.
IP Office
Page 396
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Index
Voicemail 51
VoiceMail Lite 331
VoiceMail Pro 332
Assessments
Network 55
VoIP 55
Audio
Codec Conversion 56
Port 350
Audio Port 353
Availability of Equipment 10, 386
Index
2
2400 Series Phone
Checking Firmware 159
Desk Mounting 159
Installing 159
SAP Code 367
Software Upgrade 159
Wall Mounting 159
3
3600 Serices Phone
SAP Code 367
3700
Series Phone SAP Code
3810
Phone SAP Code 367
B
367
5
5400 Series Phone
Checking Firmware 159
Desk Mounting 159
Installing 159
SAP Code 367
Software Upgrade 159
Wall Mounting 159
5600
Series Phone SAP Code 367
6
6400
Series Phone SAP Code
C
367
A
Add-Ons
201B Recorder 309
4450 Features 304
EU24 Features 306
EU24BL Features 307
Programmable Buttons 304, 306, 307, 308, 310
T3 DSS Features 308
XM24 Features 310
Analog
Phone Barrier Boxes 188
Phone Region Availability 44, 263
Port 350, 353
Trunk Card 24
Application
Call Center 52
Call Logging 52
Call Status 312
CD/DVD 54
Compact Business Center 313
Compact Contact Center 314
Conference Center 318
ContactStore 319
CTI 53
Delta Server 320
Feature Key Server 321
Maintenance 49
Manager 322
Monitor 323
MS-CRM 324
Phone Manager 325
SoftConsole 327
System Status Application 328
TAPI 329
User 50
IP Office
Barrier Boxes
Analog Phone 188
Rack Mounting 190
SAP Code 367
Base Card
Analog Phone 21
Digital Station 21
Legacy Card Carrier 21
VCM 21
Batteries
Lithium 389
BRI
(So) Port 354
(Trunk) Port 355
Port 350
Button Programming 166
Cable
Access Requirements 62
Clearance Requirements 62
Cables
Maximum Cable Distances 36, 351
SAP Code 367
Standard IP Office 36, 351
Cabling
Lightening Protection 39, 186
Call Logging Application 52
Call Status
Application 49
PC Requirements 312
Cards
Analog Trunk 230, 231
ATM4 231
ATM4U 230
BRI Trunk 231
E1 PRI 232
E1R2 PRI 233
Embedded Voicemail Memory 31, 228
IP400 Voice Compression Modules 31
IP500 Analog Phone Base 237
IP500 Digital Station Base 236
IP500 Legacy Card Carrier 234
IP500 VCM 235
Modem 31, 227
Small Office Edition Wireless 31
T1 PRI 232
VCM 229
Voice Compression 229
WAN Trunk 233
Wireless 227
Castle Rock 200
CCC
SAP Code 367
Page 397
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Channels
Compression 56
Clock 174
Application 52
PC Requirements 313
Compact Contact Center
Application 52
Components 314
License Requirements 314
PC Requirements 314
Compression Channels 56
Conference Center
Application 50
ConferenceCenter
Components 318
PC Requirements 318
Configuration
Create New 69
Erase 207
New 68
Off Line 68
Connections
Grounding 38
Out of Building 39, 158, 186
ContactStore
Application 51
Components 319
PC Requirements 319
Control Unit
IP406 v2 18, 218
IP412 18, 216
IP500 20, 214
IP500 System Unit 18
Professional Edition 20
Rack Mounting 40
Small Office Edition 225
SOE 18
Standard Edition 20
Summary 19
Wall Mounting 40
Control Units
SAP Code 367
Core Software 45
Country
Languages 47
Supported Locales 47
Create Configuration 69
CTI
SAP Code 367
D
Daughter Cards
Analog Trunk 23, 238
BRI Trunk 23, 239
PRI Trunk 240
PRI-U Trunk 23
Trunk 23
DC I/P
Port 350
DCI I/P Port 356
DECT
Handset 278, 279
Phone 44, 263
Region Availability 44, 263
IP Office
Delta Server
Components 320
PC Requirements 320
DevLink Application 53
DS
IROB 187
Phone 44, 187, 263
Port 350, 356
Region Availablility 44, 263
DTE Port 206
Cable requirement 206, 357
RS232 206, 357
Settings 206, 357
Dual PRI
Trunk Card 24
E
Embedded Voicemail
Application 51
Memory Card 31
EMC Cautions
Canadian Department of Communications 393
EMC Caution for China 393
Federal Communications Commission
393
Envirmental Requirements 64
Equipment Availability 10, 386
Expansion
Port 350
Expansion Modules
IP400 Analog Trunk 16 241
IP400 Digital Station 26, 245
IP400 Digital Station V2 243
IP400 Phone 26, 249
IP400 Phone V2 247
IP400 So8 26, 251
IP400 WAN3 26
IP400 WAN3 10/100 253
IP500 Analog Trunk 16 255
IP500 BRI So8 257
IP500 Digital Station 26, 259
IP500 Phone 26, 261
IPO 500 BRI So8 26
Expansion Port 358
Exporting Settings 70
EXT O/P
Port 350
EXT O/P Port 191, 358
Extension Numbers
Changing 168
Renumbering 168
Swapping 170
External Expansion Modules 26
F
Faulty Units 10
FCC Rules 391
Feature Key Dongles
SAP Code 367
Feature Key Server
Application 49
Components 321
PC Requirements 321
Feature Keys
Page 398
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Index
Feature Keys
Parallel 42, 193
Serial 42, 193
Smart Card 42, 193
USB 42, 193
Features
2402D Phone 270
2410D Phone 271
2420 Phone 272
3616 Phone 273
3620 Phone 274
3626 Phone 275
3641 Phone 276, 278
3645 Phone 277
3711 Phone 279
3810 Phone 280
4406D+ Phone 281
4412D+ Phone 282
4424D+ Phone 283
4601 Phone 284
4602IP Phone 285
4602SW Phone 285
4610SW Phone 286
4620IP Phone 287
4620SW Phone 287
4621SW Phone 288
4625SW Phone 289
5202D Phone 290
5220D Phone 292
5410 Phone 291
5601 Phone 293
5602IP Phone 294
5602SW Phone 294
5610SW Phone 295
5620 Phone 296
5621 Phone 297
6408D Phone 298
6416D Phone 299
6424D Phone 300
T3 Classic 301
T3 Comfort 302
T3 Compact 303
Firewall Exceptiong 336
G
General
Licenses SAP Code 367
General Information
Training Courses 57
Web Sites 58
Grounding Control Units 38
H
H323
Phones 44, 263
Region Availability 44, 263
Handset Accessories
SAP Code 367
Hazard Symbols 389
Hazardous Substances 10, 386
Homologation Statement 388
HP OpenView 200
I
Importing Settings 70
Installing
2400 Series Phones
5400 Series Phones
IP Office
159
159
EU24 Add-on 164

Internal Cards
SAP Code 367
IP 400 Installation
Admin Applications 75, 95
Connect Manager PC 79, 99
Expansion Modules 111
Grounding 115
Modem Cards 104
Power up Control Unit 97
Rack Mounting 109
Receive Configuration (Pre 3.2) 80, 100
System Status Application 91, 122, 155
Trunk Cards 106
Unpacking 74, 94
Upgrade 117
VCM Cards 102
WAN 3 113
IP Dect
Base Stations SAP Code 367
Handset SAP Code 367
Licenses SAP Code 367
SAP Code 367
Survey Kits SAP Code 367
IP Office Application CDs
SAP Code 367
IP Office Operation in
Australia 394
Canada 394
China 395
European Union 396
New Zealand 396
USA 396
IP400
External Exapansion Modules SAP Code 367
Trunk cards 24
Trunk cards SAP Code 367
Voice Compression Modules card 31
IP400 Installation
Recieve Configuration (3.2+) 90, 121
Security Settings 89, 120
Using Monitor 81, 101
IP406 v2 14
Control Unit 218
IP412 14
Control Unit 216
IP500
Analog Phone Base Card 21
Analog Trunk Daughter Card 23
Base Cards SAP Code 367
BRI Trunk Daughter Card 23
Control Unit 214
Daughter Cards SAP Code 367
Digital Station Base Card 21
External Expansion Modules SAP Code 367
Legacy Card Carrier Base Card 21
PRI-U Trunk Daughter Card 23
Reset Button 185
SAP Code 367
system 16
Trunk Daughter Card 23
VCM Base Card 21
IP500 Installation
IP500 Installation
Admin Applications 136
Page 399
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP500 Installation
Card 129
Check Card LED 142
Check CPU LED 141
Connect Manager 138
Documentation 127
Expansion Modules 145
Feature Key 133
Grounding 153
Licences 144
Power 134
Rack Mounting 148
Receive Config 143
Security Settings 89, 120, 147
Start Manager 139
Tools 126
Unpacking 128
Upgrade Software 140
Wall Mounting 151
Trial 367
VoiceMail 367
Lightening Portection 389
Lightening Protection 39, 186
Lithium Batteries 389
M
Maintenance
Applications 49
Manager
Application 49
Button Programming 166
Clock Quality 174
Components 322
Extension Numbers 168
PC Requirements 322
Prefix Dialing 178
Trunks 176
Upgrade Software 182
Modem Card 31
Module
Polycom Video 198
Modules
Trunk Interface 390
Monitor
Application 49
Components 323
PC Requirements 323
Protocols 336
Mounting
SAP Code 367
MS-CRM
Application 50
Components 324
PC Requirements 324
L
LAN
Port 350
LAN Port 359
Level of Software 45
Licences
CCC 344
Compact Contact Center 314
Conference Center 318
ContactStore 319
CTI 345
Delta Server 320
Feature Key Server 321
General 342
Installation Requirements 194
IP DECT 348
IP500 343
IP500 PRI Trunk Channels 20
IP500 Voice Networking 20
Manager 322
Monitor 323
MS-CRM 324
Parallel Port Feature Key 196
Phone Manager 325, 346
Serial Port Feature Key 195
SoftConsole 327
Syatem Status Application 328
TAPI 329
Trial Licenses 349
USB Feature Key 196
VoiceMail 347
VoiceMail Lite 331
VoiceMail Pro 332
License Keys
Enter 43, 192
Licenses
CCC 367
CTI 367
General 367
IP Dect 367
IP500 367
PC-Base 42, 193
PC-Less 42, 193
Phone Manager 367
IP Office
N
20
Network Assessments 55
New Configuration 68, 69
O
Off Line Configuration 68
Operating Systems 340
Out of Building
Connections 39, 158, 186
P
Package Damage
Check 74, 94
Parallel Feature Key 42, 193
PC
Minimum Specifications 340
PC-Base Licensing 42, 193
PC-Less Licensing 42, 193
PF
Port 350
PF Port 360
Phone (POT)
Port 350
Phone (POT) Port 361
Phone 2000 Series
2402D 270
2410D 271
2420 272
Phone 3000 Series
3616 273
Page 400
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Index
Phone 3000 Series
3620 274
3626 275
3641 276
3645 277
3701 278
3711 279
3810 280
DECT Handset 278, 279
WiFi 273, 274, 275, 276, 277
Wireless 280
Phone 4000 Series
4406D+ 281
4412D+ 282
4424D+ 283
4601 284
4602IP 285
4602SW 285
4610SW 286
4620 287
4620SW 287
4621SW 288
4625SW 289
Phone 5000 Series
5402D 290
5410 291
5420D 292
5601 293
5602IP 294
5602SW 294
5610SW 295
5620 296
5621 297
Phone 6000 Series
6408D 298
6416D 299
6424D 300
Phone Manager
Application 50
Components 325
Licences SAP Code 367
PC Requirements 325
Phone T3 Series
Classic 301
Comfort 302
Compact 303
Polycom Video Module 198
Port
Analog 350, 353
Assigned 336
Audio 350, 353
BRI 350
BRI (So) 354
BRI (Trunk) 355
DC I/P 350
DCI I/P 356
Door 191
DS 350, 356
Expansion 350, 358
EXT O/P 191, 350, 358
IP Office 336
LAN 350, 359
PF 350, 360
Phone (POT) 350, 361
PRI 350, 362
IP Office
RS232/DTE 350
RS323 DTE 206, 357
Safety Classification 392
USB 350
Used 336
WAN 350, 363
WAN V.24 364
WAN V.35 365
WAN X.21 366
Power Cords
SAP Code 367
Power Supplies
1151C1 33
1151C2 33
Cords 34
Type 40w PSU 33
Type 45W Earthed PSU 33
Type 60W Earthed PSU 33
Uninterrupted Power Supply 35
Power Supply Units
SAP Code 367
PRI
Port 350
PRI Port 362
Programmable Buttons 304, 306, 307, 308, 310
Programming
Button 166
Protocols 336
Q
Quad BRI
Trunk Card
24
R
Rack Mounting Control Units 40
Recorder Interface 309
Region Availability
Analog Phone 44, 263
DECT Phone 44, 263
DS Phone 44, 263
H323 Phone 44, 263
Renumber Extensions 168
Requirements
Cable Access 62
Cable Clearance 62
Enviromental 64
Parts 65
Space 62
Tools 65
Wall Mounting 64
RoHS 10, 386
RS232/DTE
Port 350
S
Safety Statement 388
SAP Codes
201B Recorder 309
2400 Series Phone 367
2402D Phone 270
2410D Phone 271
2420D Phone 272
3600 Serices Phone 367
3616 Phone 273
3620 Phone 274
3626 Phone 275
3641 Phone 278
Page 401
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
SAP Codes
3711 Phone 279
3810 Phone 280, 367
4406D+ Phone 281
4412D+ Phone 282
4424D+ Phone 283
4450 Programmable Buttons 304
4601 Phone 284
4602IP Phone 285
4602SW Phone 285
4610SW Phone 286
4620IP Phone 287
4620SW Phone 287
4621SW Phone 288
4625SW Phone 289
5402D Phone 290
5410 Phone 291
5420D Phone 292
5601 Phone 293
5602IP Phone 294
5602SW Phone 294
5610SW Phone 295
5620 Phone 296
5621 Phone 297
6408D Phone 298
6416D Phone 299
6424D Phone 300
Barrier Boxes 367
Cables 367
CCC Licenses 367
CTI Licenses 367
EU24 Programmable Buttons 306
EU24BL Programmable Buttons 307
Feature Key Dongles 367
General Licenses 367
Handset Accessorie 367
Internal Cards 367
IP DECT Base Station 367
IP Dect Handset 367
IP Dect Licenses 367
IP Dect Survey Kit 367
IP Office Application CDs 367
IP Office Control Units 367
IP400 External Exapansion Modules 367
IP400 Trunk cards 367
IP500 Base Cards 367
IP500 Daughter Cards 367
IP500 External Expansion Modules 367
IP500 Licenses 367
Mounting 367
Phone Manager Licences 367
Power Cords 367
Power Supply Units 367
Series Phone 367
Spares 367
T3 Classic 301
T3 Comfort 302
T3 Compact 303
T3 DSS Programmable Buttons 308
T3 Series Phone 367
Trial Licenses 367
VoiceMail Licenses 367
XM24 Programmable Buttons 310
IP Office
Security Settings
Default 209
Serial Feature Key 42, 193
Server
Minimum Specifications 340
Settings
CSV File Formats 70
Exporting 70
Importing 70
Single E1 PRI
Trunk Card 24
Single E1R2
Trunk Card 24
Single PRI T1
Trunk Card 24
Small Office Edition 13
Control Unit 225
Wireless Card 31
Smart card Feature Key 42, 193
SNMP 200
Enabling 203
Installation 201
Port 203
respond 203
Trap Generation 204
Trap Sending 203
SNMP MIBs
Application 49
So8
Example ISDN Terminal 197
Example Video Conference 198
SOE Installation
Admin Applications 75, 95
Connect Manager PC 79, 99
Default Control Unit 77
Fittomg Trunk Cards 82
Grounding 86
Mounting 84
Receive Configuration (Pre 3.2) 80, 100
Security Settings 89, 120
Unpacking 74, 94
Upgrade Core Software 87
SoftConsole
Application 50
Components 327
PC Requirements 327
Software
Erase Core Software 210
Software level 45
Space Requirements 62
Spares
SAP Code 367
Statement
Homologation 388
Safety 388
Supported
Language 47
Locales 47
System Status
Application 49
Components 328
Page 402
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Index
PC Requirements 328
T
T3
Series Phone SAP Code 367
TAPI
Components 329
PC Requirements 329
WAV Driver Application 53
TAPILink Lite
Application 50
TAPIlink Pro Application 53
Training Courses 57
Trial Licenses
SAP Code 367
Trunk Interface Modules 390
U
Unpacking 74, 94
Upgrade Software 45
USB
Feature Key 42, 193
Port 350
V
Voice Compression Channels 56
VoiceMail
SAP Code 367
VoiceMail Lite
Application 51
Components 331
PC Requirements 331
VoiceMail Pro
Application 51
Components 332
PC Requirements 332
VoIP Assessments 55
W
Wall Mounting Control Units 40
Wall Mounting Requirements 64
WAN
Link 184
Port 24, 350, 363
V.24 Port 364
V.35 Port 365
X.21 Port 366
Waterproof Phone 274
Web Sites 58
WiFi Phone 273, 274, 275, 276, 277
Wireless Phone 280
IP Office
Page 403
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
IP Office
Page 405
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)
Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical, and must be
specifically confirmed in writing by Avaya before they become applicable to any
particular order or contract. The company reserves the right to make alterations
or amendments to the detailed specifications at its discretion. The publication of
information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other
protective rights of Avaya or others.
Intellectual property related to this product (including trademarks) and registered
to Lucent Technologies have been transferred or licensed to Avaya.
All trademarks identified by the or are registered trademarks or trademarks,
respectively, of Avaya Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
This document contains proprietary information of Avaya and is not to be
disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Any comments or suggestions regarding this document should be sent to
"[email protected]".
2008 Avaya Inc. All rights reserved.
Avaya
Unit 1, Sterling Court
15 - 21 Mundells
Welwyn Garden City
Hertfordshire
AL7 1LZ
England.
Tel: +44 (0) 1707 392200
Fax: +44 (0) 1707 376933
Web: http://www.avaya.com/ipoffice/knowledgebase
IP Office
Page 406
15-601042 Issue 19l (06 November 2008)

Ip Office Installation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ip Office Installation

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ip Office Installation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IP Office

15-601042 Issue 19l - (06 November 2008)

2008 AVAYA All Rights Reserved.

5. Small Office Edition Installation

5.5 Receiving a.....................................................................

6. IP400 Basic Installation

7. IP500 Basic Installation

9. External Trunk Configuration

10. Additional Processes

11. System Components

11.4 IP500 Base

12. Safety Statements

Compact Contact Center (CCC) Installation.

Embedded Voicemail Installation.

Contact Store Installation.

Voicemail Lite Installation.

Compact DECT Installation.

Voicemail Pro Installation.

Delta Server (SMDR) Installation.

3600 Series Wireless IP Installation.

Compact Business Center (CBC) Installation. Phone Manager Installation Manual.

1.1 Equipment Availability

2.1 Small Office Edition System Components

2.2 IP400 Office System Components

System Overview: IP400 Office System Components

2.3 IP500 Office System Components

IP500 Base Cards

IP500 External Expansion Modules

System Overview: IP500 Office System Components

Surge Protectors and Barrier Boxes

2.4 Control Units

IP406 V2 Control Unit

Small Office Edition Control Unit (SOE)

System Overview: Control Units

2.5 Control Unit Summary

Digital Station (DS) Ports

Analog Phone (PHONE) Ports

Optional Embedded Voicemail Card Slot

Audio In (MOH) Port

Voicemail Pro/TAPI WAV Channels

Maximum Extension Capacity

- Digital (DS) Phones only.

- Analog Phones only.

IP400 Trunk Cards Supported

- Analog trunk cards

- Dual PRI trunks cards

- WAN port card

- IP500 Analog trunk cards

Height x Width x Depth

2.6 IP Office Standard Edition

External Expansion Modules

The following licences are specific to IP Office 500 systems.

System Overview: IP Office Standard Edition

2.7 IP500 Base Cards

IP500 Digital Station Base Card

IP500 Analog Phone Base Card

IP500 VCM Base Card

IP500 Legacy Card Carrier Base Card

ANLG 4 Uni (US only)

PRI 30 E1R2 RJ45